Operations Manual Tandberg E5500 Encoder PDF

ST.TM.E10033.
3
Issue 3
ENGLISH (UK)
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
E5500 Mobile Contribution Encoder
Software Version 2.8 (and later)

[Host Processor of Motherboard]
M2/ENC/E5500 and Options

Preliminary Pages
ENGLISH ( K) ITALIANO
READ THIS FIRST! LEGGERE QUESTO AVVISO PER PRIMO!
If you do not understand the contents of this manual Se non si capisce il contenuto del presente manuale
DO NOT OPERATE THIS EQUIPMENT. NON UTILIZZARE L’APPARECCHIATURA.
Also, translation into any EC official language of this manual can be made È anche disponibile la versione italiana di questo manuale, ma il costo è a
available, at your cost. carico dell’utente.
SVENSKA NEDERLANDS
LÄS DETTA FÖRST! LEES DIT EERST!
Om Ni inte förstår informationen i denna handbok Als u de inhoud van deze handleiding niet begrijpt
ARBETA DÅ INTE MED DENNA UTRUSTNING. STEL DEZE APPARATUUR DAN NIET IN WERKING.
En översättning till detta språk av denna handbok kan också anskaffas, på U kunt tevens, op eigen kosten, een vertaling van deze handleiding
Er bekostnad. krijgen.
PORTUGUÊS SUOMI
LEIA O TEXTO ABAIXO ANTES DE MAIS NADA! LUE ENNEN KÄYTTÖÄ!
Se não compreende o texto deste manual Jos et ymmärrä käsikirjan sisältöä
NÃO UTILIZE O EQUIPAMENTO. ÄLÄ KÄYTÄ LAITETTA.
O utilizador poderá também obter uma tradução do manual para o Käsikirja voidaan myös suomentaa asiakkaan kustannuksella.
português à própria custa.
FRANÇAIS DANSK
AVANT TOUT, LISEZ CE QUI SUIT! LÆS DETTE FØRST!
Si vous ne comprenez pas les instructions contenues dans ce manuel Udstyret må ikke betjenes
NE FAITES PAS FONCTIONNER CET APPAREIL. MEDMINDRE DE TIL FULDE FORSTÅR INDHOLDET AF DENNE
HÅNDBOG.
En outre, nous pouvons vous proposer, à vos frais, une version française Vi kan også for Deres regning levere en dansk oversættelse af denne
de ce manuel. håndbog.
DEUTSCH ΕΛΛΗΝΙΚΑ
LESEN SIE ZUERST DIESEN HINWEIS! ÄΙΑΒΑΣΤΕ ΠΡÙΤΑ ΑΥΤΟ!
Sollte Ihnen der Inhalf dieses Handbuches nicht klar verständlich sein, Αν δεν καταλÜβετε το περιεχüìενο αυτοý του βοηθÞìατοò/εγχειριδßου
dann ΜΗΝ ΛΕΙΤΟΥΡΓΗΣΕΤΕ ΑΥΤΟΝ ΤΟΝ ΕΞΟΠΛΙΣΜΟ.
BEDIENEN SIE DIESE GERÄTE NICHT!
Επßσηò, αυτü το εγχειρßδιο εßναι διαθÝσιìο σε ìετÜφραση
σε αυτÞ τη γλþσσα και ìπορεßτε να το αγορÜσετε.
Eine Übersetzung des Handbuches in diese Sprache ist gegen
Berechnung lieferbar.
ESPAÑOL
LEA ESTE AVISO PRIMERO!
Si no entiende el contenido de este manual
NO OPERE ESTE EQUIPO.
Podemos asimismo suministrarle una traducción de este manual al

(idioma) previo pago de una cantidad adicional que deberá abonar usted
mismo.
This document and the information contained in it is the property of Issue 3 first published in 2001 by:
TANDBERG Television Ltd and may be the subject of patents TANDBERG TELEVISION LTD
pending and granted. It must not be used for commercial purposes
nor copied, disclosed, reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or REGISTERED ADDRESS:
transmitted in any form or by any means (electronic, mechanical, 35 BASINGHALL STREET
photocopying, recording or otherwise), whether in whole or in part, LONDON
without TANDBERG Television’s prior written agreement. EC2V 5DB
UNITED KINGDOM
 2001 TANDBERG Television Ltd. All rights reserved.
Registered Company Number 03695535
Page ii Instruction Manual: evolution 5000 E5500 Mobile Contribution Encoder

ST.TM.E10033.3
Preliminary Pages
List of Contents
Chapter 1: Introduction
Gives a general description of the equipment and its main features and
functions. Identifies the controls, indicators and connectors on the front
and rear panels, and lists the available options.
Chapter 2: Installing the Equipment

Provides a guide to the suitability of an installation and gives detailed
procedures for the preparation and installation of the equipment. Also
details the external connectors and provides important safety
information.
Chapter 3: Operating the Equipment Locally

Describes local control in detail. Provides the power-up/-down procedures
and other general operating/control/set-up procedures.
Chapter 4: Equipment Description

Provides a high-level functional description of the equipment and a brief
explanation of some of the principles used to aid in understanding its
operation.
Chapter 5: Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding

Details routine maintenance tasks to be performed by the operator and
provides general servicing advice and fault-finding information. Provides
information regarding warranty and maintenance available from Customer
Services. Gives relevant disposal information.
Annex A: Glossary
Annex B: Technical Specification
Annex C: Error Messages
Annex D: Predefined User Configurations
Annex E: Language Abbreviations
Annex F: Creating and Downloading a Logo
Annex G: Quick Reference Guide
Index
Instruction Manual: evolution 5000 E5500 Mobile Contribution Encoder Page iii
ST.TM.E10033.3
Preliminary Pages
About this Manual

This manual provides instructions and information for the installation and
operation of the MCE.
This manual should be kept in a safe place for reference for the life of the
equipment. It is not intended that this manual will be amended by the
issue of individual pages. Any revision will be by a complete reissue.
Further copies of this manual can be ordered from the address shown on
page vi. If passing the equipment to a third party, also pass on the
relevant documentation.
Issues of this manual are listed below:
Issue Date Software Version Comments

1 May 2000 2.8 to 3.1 Initial release. Software version is that of the Host
Processor.
1r1 July 2000 2.8 to 3.1 Contact information updated, minor formatting changes.
2 Aug 2000 2.8 to 3.1 Updated to include Remultiplexing, RAS and additional
Audio options.
3 Feb 2001 2.8 to 3.3 New functionality added: BISS; Linear audio PCM
coding now compliant with SMPTE 302M; Auto lip sync
option; allow PIDs to be set via front panel; add Ident
text onto test patterns; include display/contrast setting;
include two ISOG configs; Brown out feature added
(QPSK Modulator); add Power On State (Modulator
menu). Manual reformatted to corporate style.
The following associated manuals are also available:

• ST.TS.E9140: Remote Control Protocol
• ST.TS.SNMP.E10022: SNMP Remote Control Protocol.
Acknowledgements
General
All best endeavours have been made to acknowledge registered
trademarks and trademarks used throughout this manual. Any notified
omissions will be rectified in the next issue of this manual. Some
trademarks may be registered in some countries but not in others.
Registered trademarks and trademarks used are acknowledged below and
marked with their respective symbols. However, they are not marked
within the text of this manual.
Registered Trademarks
AC-3® is a registered trademark of Dolby Laboratories Licensing

Corporation.
Dolby Digital® is a registered trademark of Dolby Laboratories Licensing
Corporation.
Page iv Instruction Manual: evolution 5000 E5500 Mobile Contribution Encoder

ST.TM.E10033.3
Preliminary Pages
Musicam® is a registered trademark of Thomson and Télédiffusion de

France (TDF), Europe, and is a registered trademark of CCS (now Musicam
USA Incorporated), USA.
Pro Logic® is a registered trademark of Dolby Laboratories Licensing
Corporation.
Ethernet® is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
XILINX® is a registered trademark of Xilinx Inc.
Trademarks
NDS™ is a trademark of NDS Limited.
Pozidriv™ is a trademark of European Industrial Services.
Panasonic™ is a trademark of Matsushita Electric.
Warnings, Cautions and Notes

Heed Warnings
All warnings on the product and in the operating instructions should be
adhered to. The manufacturer can not be held responsible for injuries or
damage where warnings and cautions have been ignored or taken lightly.
Read Instructions
All the safety and operating instructions should be read before this product
is operated.
Follow Instructions
All operating and user instructions should be followed.
Retain Instructions
The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future
reference.
WARNINGS....
WARNINGS GIVE INFORMATION WHICH, IF STRICTLY OBSERVED, WILL PREVENT PERSONAL
INJURY OR DEATH, OR DAMAGE TO PERSONAL PROPERTY OR THE ENVIRONMENT. THEY
ARE BOXED AND SHADED FOR EMPHASIS, AS IN THIS EXAMPLE, AND ARE PLACED
IMMEDIATELY PRECEDING THE POINT AT WHICH THE READER REQUIRES THEM.
CAUTIONS...
Cautions give information which, if strictly followed, will prevent damage to equipment or other goods.
They are boxed for emphasis, as in this example, and are placed immediately preceding the point at
which the reader requires them.
NOTES...
Notes provide supplementary information. They are highlighted for emphasis, as in this example, and
are placed immediately after the relevant text.
Instruction Manual: evolution 5000 E5500 Mobile Contribution Encoder Page v

ST.TM.E10033.3
Preliminary Pages
EMC Compliance
This equipment is certified to the EMC requirements detailed in Annex B,
Technical Specifications. To maintain this certification, only use the leads
supplied or if in doubt contact Customer Services.
Contact Information
TANDBERG Television Customer Services
Support Services
Our primary objective is to provide first class customer care that is tailored
to your specific business and operational requirements. All levels are
supported by one or more service performance reviews to ensure the
perfect partnership between TANDBERG Television and your business.
Levels of Support
We offer a number of support service levels so you can choose the one
most appropriate to your business requirements.
• For the initial 12 months, Bronze Level Support is provided free on
this product. An extended time period can be purchased for this level.
• Silver Level Support extends the coverage to include on-site support,
preventive maintenance and discount on pre-designed training.
• The Gold Level Support gives an enhanced support package. It builds
on the Silver Level by including advanced repair exchange, an account
focused engineer, version migration support and further discount on
predesigned training.
Where to Find Us
Europe, Middle East +44 (0) 23 8048 4455
and Africa: Fax: +44 (0) 23 8048 4467
fieldservice@tandbergtv.com
Americas Office: + 1 888 637 0023
fieldservice-americas@tandbergtv.com
South Americas Office: + 1 949 725 2699
fieldservice-americas@tandbergtv.com
Hong Kong Office: + 852 2899 7000
fieldservice-asia@tandbergtv.com
Australia/NZ Office: +61 2 9356 8599
fieldservice-australia@tandbergtv.com
Internet Address: http://www.tandbergtv.com
Page vi Instruction Manual: evolution 5000 E5500 Mobile Contribution Encoder

ST.TM.E10033.3
Preliminary Pages
Technical Training
Training Courses
TANDBERG Television provides a wide range of training courses on the
operation and maintenance of our products and on their supporting
technologies. TANDBERG can provide both regularly scheduled courses and
training tailored to individual needs. Courses can be run either at your
premises or at one of our dedicated training facilities.
Where to Find Us
For further information on TANDBERG Television's training programme
please contact us:
International Telephone: +44 23 8048 4229
International Facsimile +44 23 8048 4467
E-mail Address: training@tandbergtv.com
Internet Address http://www.tandbergtv.com
Customer Services and Technical Training Postal Address

Tandberg Television
Strategic Park
Comines Way
Hedge End
Southampton
Hampshire
SO30 4DA
United Kingdom
Technical Publications
If you need to contact TANDBERG Television Technical Publications
regarding this publication, e-mail: techpubs@tandbergtv.com.
Instruction Manual: evolution 5000 E5500 Mobile Contribution Encoder Page vii
ST.TM.E10033.3
Preliminary Pages
BLANK
Page viii Instruction Manual: evolution 5000 E5500 Mobile Contribution Encoder
ST.TM.E10033.3
Chapter 1
1. Introduction
Contents
Pre-encoded AC-3...................................... 1-12
1.1 Scope of this Manual .................................................1-3
Test Tone ................................................... 1-12
1.1.1 Who Should Use this Manual........................1-3
1.3.3 Vertical Blanking Interval Line Processing.. 1-12
1.1.2 Software Versions .........................................1-3
Vertical Blanking Interval Line Processing
1.1.3 Equipment Covered by this Manual ..............1-3
Modes......................................................... 1-12
Equipment Model ..........................................1-3
1.3.4 Data Channels............................................ 1-14
Information Label ..........................................1-4
1.3.5 QPSK IF Modulation ................................... 1-14
Hardware Configuration ................................1-5
1.3.6 Control and Monitoring ............................... 1-14
Build Revision ...............................................1-5
Methods...................................................... 1-14
Firmware / Software Versions .......................1-5
1.4 Guided Tour ............................................................ 1-15
1.2 Role of the MCE ........................................................1-5
1.4.1 The User Interface...................................... 1-15
1.2.1 Typical System..............................................1-5
1.4.2 LED Colour Coding Philosophy .................. 1-15
1.3 Summary of Features................................................1-7 1.4.3 Front Panel Description .............................. 1-15
1.3.1 Video Encoding .............................................1-7 Components ............................................... 1-15
MPEG-2 Encoding ........................................1-7 Front Panel Status Display and Keyboard.. 1-15
Video Encoding Modes .................................1-7 1.4.4 Rear Panel Description............................... 1-16
Video Input Types .........................................1-8 1.4.5 Construction................................................ 1-17
Serial Digital Video Input Error Detection Enclosure.................................................... 1-17
and Handling (EDH) ......................................1-8 Boards/Modules in the MCE ....................... 1-17
Video Encoding Functions ............................1-8
1.5 Standard Modules................................................... 1-18
Motion Estimation..........................................1-8
1.5.1 Functions .................................................... 1-18
Video Variable Bit-rate ..................................1-9
1.5.2 Analogue Video Input (M2/EOM1/VID)....... 1-18
Coding Resolutions .......................................1-9
1.5.3 Frequency Agile QPSK Modulator
Internal Frame Synchroniser.........................1-9
(M2/EOM1/QPSK2) .................................... 1-18
Output on Video Loss....................................1-9
1.5.4 RS-232 and RS-422 Data Input
1.3.2 Audio Encoding .............................................1-9 (M2/EOM1/DAT) ......................................... 1-18
General .........................................................1-9
Audio Inputs ................................................1-10 1.6 Option Modules....................................................... 1-19
Audio Channels...........................................1-10 1.6.1 Module Numbering ..................................... 1-19
MPEG Encoding Modes..............................1-10 1.6.2 RAS Scrambling Module
(M2/EOM1/RAS)......................................... 1-19
Audio Variable Bit-rate ................................1-11
1.6.3 Internal Remux module
Dolby Digital (AC-3) ....................................1-12
(M2/EOM1/REMUX) ................................... 1-20
Instruction Manual: evolution 5000 E5500 Mobile Contribution Encoder Page 1-1
ST.TM.E10033.3
Introduction
List of Illustrations
Figure 1.1: Mobile Contribution Encoder Front View ..................... 1-3
Figure 1.2: Information Label 1 ...................................................... 1-4
Figure 1.3: Information Label 2 ...................................................... 1-4
Figure 1.4: Correlation Between Hardware and Build Standard
Numbers ....................................................................... 1-4
Figure 1.5: Typical evolution 5000 MCE Configuration ................. 1-6
Figure 1.6: Typical Remultiplexing Configuration (Remux
Option Fitted)................................................................ 1-7
Figure 1.7: Front Panel Indicators................................................ 1-16
Figure 1.8: Rear Panel Connectors ............................................. 1-16
List of Tables
Table 1.1: Equipment Model Description....................................... 1-4
Table 1.2: Video Coding Resolutions and Typical Bit-rates........... 1-9
Table 1.3: MPEG-2 Audio Encoding Bit-rates.............................. 1-11
Table 1.4: Dolby Digital Audio Encoding Bit-rates ....................... 1-12
Table 1.5: Front Panel Indicators................................................. 1-15
Table 1.6: Mandatory Card and Module Positions....................... 1-17
Table 1.7: RAS and REMUX Module Numbering ........................ 1-19
Page 1-2 Instruction Manual: evolution 5000 E5500 Mobile Contribution Encoder
ST.TM.E10033.3
Introduction
1.1 Scope of this Manual

1.1.1 Who Should Use this Manual
This manual is written for operators/users of the E5500 Mobile
Contribution Encoder (MCE). The Mobile Contribution Encoder is used as a
stand-alone unit to output a complete modulated transport stream into a
satellite network.
The manual is written to assist in the installation, operation and day-to-day
care of the unit. All information is applicable to all models of the Encoder
unless otherwise stated.
WARNING…
DO NOT REMOVE THE COVERS OF THIS EQUIPMENT. HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT
WITHIN THIS EQUIPMENT AND MAY BE EXPOSED IF THE COVERS ARE REMOVED. ONLY
TANDBERG TELEVISION TRAINED AND APPROVED SERVICE ENGINEERS ARE PERMITTED TO
SERVICE THIS EQUIPMENT.
CAUTION…
Unauthorised maintenance or the use of non-approved replacements may affect the equipment
specification and invalidate any warranties.
This manual does not include any maintenance information or procedures

that require the removal of covers.
1.1.2 Software Versions

This manual has been written to cover the functionality of firmware version
1.1 and later of the Motherboard1 (S8475) and software version 2.8 and
later of the Host Processor of the Motherboard. The current software
version can be found by viewing the Version Info Menu (see Chapter 3,
Figure 3.9).
This manual continues to be relevant to subsequent firmware issues where
the functionality of the equipment has not changed. Where a new issue of
firmware changes the functionality, a new issue of this manual is provided.
1.1.3 Equipment Covered by this Manual

Equipment Model
Figure 1.1: Mobile Contribution Encoder Front View

The MCE comprises an enclosure with a Motherboard1 and Video
Compression Module fitted. The three option slots of the bottom tray are
fitted with a Video Input Module, a Data Input Module and a QPSK
Modulator Card.
1
S8475 is sometimes referred to as the Base Board 3ASI.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Introduction
If option slot 4 is not occupied by an option module, it must have a

blanking module fitted to maintain correct internal air-flow (see Table 1.7).
The marketing product number and model number of the basic unit is
shown in Table 1.1.
Table 1.1: Equipment Model Description
Model Model Marketing Description

Name Number Number
Encoder E5500 E10033 M2/ENC/E5500 MPEG-2 Encoder with 4:2:0 video encoding mode (4:2:2 is available
as a purchasable upgrade), analogue video, SDI and data inputs.
QPSK modulation.
Information Label
There are two information labels which identify the configuration of the
unit. Figure 1.2 and Figure 1.3 are typical examples.
Bar Code
Used for unit identification in the
EVOLUTION 5000 ENCODER manufacturing process
Serial Number
A unique number for unit identification Serial No. 41
Build Revision
A reference which identifies the build
Hardware Configuration revision of the equipment
A reference which identifies each 10033 – 49 Bld rev 1_0_3
piece of hardware in the equipment Marketing Number
M2/ENC/E5500 A code which identifies the product
for marketing purposes
Figure 1.2: Information Label
Product Name Serial Number
A name which identifies the type ENCODER
A unique number for unit identification
of product Serial No. NNNN
10033 – 49
Bld rev 1_0_3
Marketing Number
M2/ENC/E5500
A code which identifies the product
for marketing purposes
Figure 1.3: Information Label 2
Option Slot Number n/a 1 2 3 4 For reference – not shown on label (see Figure 1.7).
Hardware Configuration 10033 -1 -3 -2 -49 Each piece of hardware has a unique number (see Table 1.7).
Build Standard 01 -01 -01 -01 -01
Refers to a Blank Module in option slot 4.
Refers to a QPSK Module in option slot 3.
Refers to a Non DVB Data IP Module (sometimes known as
an RS-422 Data Input Module) in option slot 2.
Refers to a Video Input Module in option slot 1.
Refers to the basic enclosure with one Motherboard (Base
Board 3ASI) and one Video Compression Module fitted.
Figure 1.4: Correlation Between Hardware and Build Standard Numbers
NOTE…
Refer to Table 1.7 and Figure 1.8 for the position of the module slots.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Introduction
Hardware Configuration
Each piece of hardware has a specific reference number. These are linked
to give a hardware configuration number (see Figure 1.4) for the whole
unit. The first part of the number refers to the enclosure and any
mandatory modules, and each subsequent part refers to an option module.
Refer to Table 1.7 for the positions of each option module.
Build Revision
The build revision number (see Figure 1.4) refers to the physical status of
the enclosure and any option modules at the time the equipment was
shipped from the factory.
Firmware / Software Versions

This manual has been written to cover the functionality of the firmware
versions which are contained within the build standard identified on the
information label (see the rear of the Encoder and also Figure 1.4).
This manual continues to be relevant to subsequent build standards where
the functionality of the equipment has not changed. Where the build
standard changes the functionality, a new issue of this manual is provided.
1.2 Role of the MCE

1.2.1 Typical System
The Mobile Contribution Encoder (MCE) is a transportable digital exciter
designed specifically for mobile contribution applications. It is compact and
lightweight, fully MPEG-2 and DVB compliant, and has high performance
for the transmission of studio-quality video material. The equipment is
designed to be suitable for both flyaway use (within an appropriate flight
case) and truck installation.
The Encoder comprises a single video encoder, two stereo audio encoders
(dual standard MPEG-1 (layer 2)/Dolby Digital) and general purpose VBI
extraction and encoding circuitry.
High quality video encoding is ensured by the inclusion of digital noise
reduction techniques and many other proprietary algorithms as well as
standard MPEG compression techniques. Hierarchical motion estimation is
also used.
Video is input to the unit in Composite, Component or serial digital (SDI)
format. There is also a logo overlay facility allowing broadcasters to
trademark material.
Transponder bandwidth can be traded with video quality by operating the
video compression bit-rate in the range 1.5 – 45 Mbit/s. Over this
operating range, encoded video resolution can be controlled in order to
optimise subjective encoding performance.
The MCE encodes up to four channels of audio, which may be configured
as four mono channels or two stereo pairs, input as either analogue or
AES/EBU digital audio.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Introduction
One channel of asynchronous data and one channel of high speed

synchronous data can also be supported (data channels are not
compressed).
The MCE multiplexes these input signals, under user control, to provide
secure programme transmission. The digital stream is then processed for
forward error correction (FEC) and modulates a single IF carrier for output
to an Up-converter and High Power Amplifier (HPA) equipment for
transmission to the satellite.
If the Compact Remultiplexing option module is fitted, the MCE is capable
of accepting up to three separate transport streams via ASI connectors
and, (together with the host encoder transport stream), provides four
transport streams multiplexed together. Refer to Figure 1.6 and Chapter 4,
Equipment Description for details.
Local control of the equipment is via the front panel keypad and display.
The MCE can also be controlled remotely over an Ethernet interface or
RS-232/RS-485 port. Local health monitoring is incorporated, along with a
local alarm/fail/reset port.
The equipment is fully configurable and extremely flexible, while still being
simple to operate and maintain. Various alignment, testing and diagnostic
facilities have been incorporated to assist with operation and maintenance
in the field.
Up-link equipment Down-link equipment

(including (including Low
Up-converter and Noise Block)
High Power
Amplifier)
Tx LNB
VIDEO
E5500 Mobile Contribution Encoder AUDIO
ASYNC DATA
ALTEIA
ALARM
REMOTE CNTRL
AUTHORIZED
BER STATUS LOCK MULTIFUNCTIONAL DISPLAY
SYNC DATA
VIDEO (ANALOGUE)
Alteia Satellite Receiver
VIDEO (DIGITAL) IF
AUDIO Encoder Modulator
SYNC DATA
ASYNC DATA
Figure 1.5: Typical evolution 5000 MCE Configuration
ST.TM.E10033.3
Introduction
E5500 Mobile
Contribution Encoder 1
DVB ASI
VIDEO (ANALOGUE)
(SERVICE 2)
VIDEO (DIGITAL)
AUDIO
1 2 3
4 5 6
TANDBER
7 8 9
G
SYNC DATA
ASYNC DATA
E5500
E5500 Mobile
Contribution Encoder 2 Mobile Contribution
VIDEO (ANALOGUE) DVB ASI (Master) Encoder
VIDEO (DIGITAL) (SERVICE 3)
DVB ASI OUT
AUDIO
1 2 3
4 5 6
TANDBER
7 8 9
IF (4 SERVICES)
G
SYNC DATA
ASYNC DATA 1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0 * ±
VIDEO (ANALOGUE)
TANDBERG
VIDEO (DIGITAL) SERVICE 1

E5500 Mobile AUDIO
Contribution Encoder 3 SYNC DATA
VIDEO (ANALOGUE) DVB ASI ASYNC DATA
VIDEO (DIGITAL) (SERVICE 4)
AUDIO
1 2 3
4 5 6
TANDBER
7 8 9
G
SYNC DATA
ASYNC DATA
Figure 1.6: Typical Remultiplexing Configuration (Remux Option Fitted)
1.3 Summary of Features

1.3.1 Video Encoding
MPEG-2 Encoding
The encoder processes a broadcast-standard video signal into a
compressed encoded bit-stream in accordance with:
• The MPEG-2 Main profile @ Main level (MP@ML) specification (ISO/IEC
13818); or
• The MPEG-2 4:2:2 Profile @ Main Level (4:2:2P@ML) specification
(ISO/IEC 13818).
NOTE…
The 4:2:2 option will only be available if purchased as an option.
Video Encoding Modes

Either the 4:2:0 or 4:2:2 video encoding modes can be selected. The
coding mode selected affects the compression techniques, encoder delay
and rate control.
NOTE…
The 4:2:2 option will only be available if purchased as an option.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Introduction
Video Input Types

The video input types which are supported are:
• Analogue Composite – 625-line, PAL-B, -D, -G, -H or -I (ITU-R BT.
624-4).
• Analogue Composite – 525-line, NTSC-M (with or without pedestal)
(ITU-R BT. 624-4).
• Analogue Component –YPRPB, PAL 625 line format (ITU-R BT. 601-
5).
• Analogue Component – YPRPB, NTSC 525 line (with or without
pedestal), or 525 line (no pedestal, Beta levels) format (ITU-R BT.
601-5).
• Serial Digital (SDI) – 4:2:2 YCRCB (ITU-R BT. 656-1 part 3) (“D1”
serial format), SMPTE-259M.
• Internal test pattern function.
Serial Digital Video Input Error Detection and Handling (EDH)

The serial digital video input supports error detection and handling (EDH)
as defined by the specification SMPTE RP 165-1994, ‘Error Detection
Checkwords and Status Flags for Use in Bit Serial Digital Interfaces for
Television’. Refer to Chapter 4, Equipment Description for further
information.
Video Encoding Functions

The standard video encoding functions include:
• Support for all MP@ML standard coding modes, (and 422P@ML, if
purchased).
• Selectable bit-rate operation, 1.5 Mbit/s - 15 Mbit/s.
• Support for the standard set of video picture resolutions (720, 704,
640, 544, 480, 352 and SIF) in both 625 and 525 line operation.
• Hierarchical motion estimation.
• A built in frame resynchroniser to maintain a valid encoded bit-stream
in the event of loss of video.
• Various low delay modes for delay critical applications.
• Support for a variety of Group of Pictures (GOP) structures with a
variable number of B frames.
• Built in patented adaptive noise reduction circuitry.
• The ability to generate internal video test patterns. These can be
moving, with the ability to load 2 frames.
• A logo overlay facility whereby the MCE is able to overlay broadcaster’s
logos onto the active video.
• Various video fail options, eg, freeze frame, cut to black.
Motion Estimation
The MCE uses Hierarchical motion estimation. It takes a macro block (16
pixels x 16 pixels) and then performs a series of exhaustive searches for
that block on areas of increasing resolution homing in on an exact match.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Introduction
Video Variable Bit-rate

The MPEG-2 compression algorithm uses adaptive field/frame coding,
forward and backward predictive processing with motion estimation and
compensation to reduce the bit-rate to the range 1.5 to 15 Mbit/s.
NOTE…
If the 4:2:2 upgrade has been purchased, video bit-rates of up to 50 Mbit/s are available on the ASI
output. The actual modulated output depends on the symbol rate (which has a maximum of 30
Msymbols/s).
Coding Resolutions
To provide optimum picture quality over the full bit-rate range, the
encoded picture resolution is controlled automatically according to the
video bit-rate. Alternatively, the user can override this and select manual
control, if desired. Available coding resolutions are shown in Table 1.2.
Table 1.2: Video Coding Resolutions and Typical Bit-rates
625 Line Modes 525 Line Modes Typical Bit-rate Typical Bit-rate 4:2:2 (Mbit/s)
4:2:0 (Mbit/s)
720 pixels x 576 lines 720 pixels x 480 lines 4.0 – 8.0 up to 50.
704 pixels x 576 lines 704 pixels x 480 lines 4.0 – 8.0 up to 50.
544 pixels x 576 lines 544 pixels x 480 lines 2.5 – 6.0 -
System configuration can be stored in non-volatile random access memory

(NVRAM) for restoration of configured state at power-on.
Internal Frame Synchroniser

An internal frame synchroniser is incorporated to maintain a valid encoded
bit-stream in the event of discrepancies between the relative timing of the
input video syncs and the internal flywheel syncs.
Output on Video Loss

The MCE can be software-configured to show, in the event of video input
loss, either:
• Test pattern
• Freeze frame
• Cut to a black screen.
1.3.2 Audio Encoding

General
Audio can be encoded to either:
• MPEG-1 Audio (layer 2) standard (sampling rate 32 kHz or 48 kHz).
• Dolby Digital (sampling rate 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz).
Output bit-rate is selectable in the range 32-384 kbit/s (dependent on
configuration) for MPEG-1 Audio (layer 2) and 56-640 kbit/s
(dependent on configuration) for Dolby Digital.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Introduction
• Pre-compressed (or pre-encoded – IEC 61937) audio in pass-through

mode is also available (it only operates at 48 kHz). This is where an
audio stream has already been encoded externally, prior to entering
the Encoder, and passes through to the output. This type of audio is
supported in Dolby Digital.
NOTE…
Motherboard software prior to ver 3.3 included Dolby Digital (AC-3) as part of the standard product.
A separate licence is required from software ver 3.3, this is available from TANDBERG Television.
The input for this type of audio is either via the Serial Digital Input of
the audio connector or it can be embedded with the incoming video.
Audio Inputs
The standard audio input is:
• AUDIO IN - 15 way male D-type - software selectable balanced
analogue or digital AES/EBU, with AES/EBU on left only. The right
channel can be configured to output a reference AES/EBU signal for an
external Dolby AC-3 Encoder. The audio connector is a 15-way male D-
type, but a break out cable is supplied which plugs into this connector
and provides a more convenient means of connecting the audio inputs
via four XLR female connectors.
• Alternatively, audio can be input embedded as AES/EBU on the serial
digital input (SDI). In this mode a maximum of four stereo pairs can
be extracted. Audio may be converted to either of the standard output
frequencies, 32 kHz or 48 kHz, by use of the built-in asynchronous
sample rate converters.
Audio Channels
The MCE supports four channels of audio, which may be configured as:
• Four analogue single mono channels, 600 Ω or 20 kΩ
• Two analogue stereo pairs, 600 Ω or 20 kΩ
• Two digital channels, AES/EBU or embedded SDI.
MPEG Encoding Modes

The two stereo pairs may be configured in various MPEG-2 encoding
modes:
• Single mono: a mono signal is encoded on the left channel only
• Dual mono: the left and right signals are encoded and carried in the
transport stream as a single Packetised Elementary Stream (PES) data
stream. The way that the left and right signals are output from the
receiver is dependent on how the routing is set up on the receiver.
Both the left and the right may be output, or the left only, or the right
only. This is typically used for multilingual services
• Stereo: A stereo pair is coded as two mono signals - the two signals
are output as stereo at the receiving end
• Joint/intensity stereo: A stereo pair is coded taking advantage of
the stereo nature of the channels - the two signals are output as
stereo at the receiving end.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Introduction
NOTE…
Joint/intensity stereo is not available in Dolby Digital mode.
Audio Variable Bit-rate

MPEG-1 audio output bit-rate (see Table 1.3) is selectable in the range
32-384 kbit/s (dependent on configuration).
Table 1.3: MPEG-2 Audio Encoding Bit-rates
Bit-rate Single Dual Dual Dual Channel

(kbit/s) Channel Channel Channel Joint (Intensity)
Mono Mono Stereo Stereo
32 - - -
48 - - -
56 - - -
64
80 - - -
96
112
128
160
192
224 -
256 -
320 -
384 -
ST.TM.E10033.3
Introduction
Dolby Digital (AC-3)

Dolby Digital (AC-3) audio encoding incorporates digital normalisation,
preprocessing (filtering), dynamic range compression and the addition of
bit-stream information. Dolby Pro Logic audio can be carried as stereo
audio through the Encoder as long as a suitably high bit-rate is selected.
The audio outputs may be configured in single channel mono (1/0) or dual
channel stereo (2/0) encoding mode. The audio output bit-rate is
selectable in the range 56 – 640 kbit/s (dependent on configuration). See
Table 1.4.
Table 1.4: Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio Encoding Bit-rates
Bit-rate Single Channel Dual Channel

(kbit/s) Mono (1/0) Stereo (2/0)
56 -
64 -
80 -
96
112
128
160
192
224
256
320
384
448
512
576
640
Pre-encoded AC-3
The encoder supports pre-encoded AC-3 to the standard IEC 61937,
‘Interfaces for Non-linear PCM Encoded Audio Bitstreams applying
IEC 60958’.
Test Tone
The equipment can be configured to generate a test tone for alignment
purposes. Refer to Annex B, Technical Specification for level and
frequency.
1.3.3 Vertical Blanking Interval Line Processing

Vertical Blanking Interval Line Processing Modes
Introduction
The Encoder has three possible modes for processing Vertical Blanking
Interval (VBI) lines.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Introduction
NOTE…
The following three processing modes are only available if the 4:2:2 upgrade is purchased.
VBI in Picture
By selecting the extended active picture format available in the MPEG
4:2:2 specification the MCE compresses and transmits the VBI data as part
of the active picture. This mode requires up to 3 Mbit/s of extra bit-rate,
depending on the amount and complexity of the VBI present.
NOTE…
VBI in Picture transmits the VBI waveform as part of the picture and as such will be subject to some
distortion. Most analogue VBI types are robust against this type of distortion but others, e.g. video
index, are intended for SDI transmission and will not survive MPEG coding/decoding in VBI in Picture
mode.
VBI in PID
The MCE has the ability to extract and transmit a wide variety of VBI line
formats. Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA) circuitry on the front end
of the equipment incorporates a number of general purpose line grabbers
so that known formats of VBI data can be extracted. Closed caption data
together with other formats of VBI data such as VITC and VPS are to be
transmitted in the user data field of the video.
The following VBI data formats are supported:
• Line 21 data Services EIA-608 (Closed Caption and V-chip)
• Neilson AMOL 11
• VITC (EBU and SMPTE)
• Programme Delivery and Control PDC, via ITU-R system B Teletext
extension data packets of type 8/30, format 2 and Line 16 Video
Programming System (VPS). Video Programming Teletext (VPT) and
VPS are trade names
• Wide Screen Signalling (WSS) EN 300 294
• Test Signals UK-ITS, ITU-R, FCC ITS (inserted at the receiver)
• Video Index (for Pan Scan and Aspect Ratio).
Teletext Extraction
The Encoder supports internal Teletext data extraction (Teletext drop)
from the VBI of a video input and formats this data into a transport
packet, as specified in the DVB specification.
The MCE can extract up to 18 lines of Teletext from each field of the video
frame. The supported VBI line number range is 10-22 and 273-285 for 525
lines and 7-24 and 319-336 for 625 lines. Line filters can be invoked to
selectively disable any individual lines in this range. These are provided to
allow the user to ensure that non-Teletext lines (e.g. ITS lines) are not
erroneously extracted. The extracted Teletext lines are formatted into PES
packets according to the DVB specification. The Teletext PES packets are
time-stamped to allow correct alignment of subtitling captions with
decoded video.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Introduction
The following Teletext services are extractable:

• WST Teletext
• PDC Program Delivery Control
• STARTEXT;
• Softel Remote Control;
• Night Owl Remote Control;
• Studio Talk Back;
• Inverted Teletext.
1.3.4 Data Channels

The MCE can provide data channels that operate as bit-pipes between the
encoder and decoders. Two types of data channel are supported:
• Synchronous RS-422: one channel is supported at data rates of
n × 64 kbit/s (up to 2.048 Mbit/s) or n × 56 kbit/s (up to 1.792 Mbit/s)
where n = 32 max.
• Asynchronous RS-232: one channel is supported at baud rates of
1.2 – 38.4 kbaud.
1.3.5 QPSK IF Modulation

The QPSK Modulator Module provides the satellite transmission functions
specified for MPEG-2 packet signals as defined by the following
specifications:
• EN 300 421, ‘Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB); Framing Structure,
Channel Coding and Modulation for 11/12 GHz Satellite Services’;
• prEN 301 210, ‘Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB); Framing Structure,
Channel Coding and Modulation for Digital Satellite News Gathering
(DSNG) and Other Contribution Applications by Satellite’.
The modulator module provides QPSK modulation in the frequency range
70 MHz ± 20 MHz, and outputs data at a symbol-rate defined by the
encoding module. The spectrum of the QPSK signal can be set to Normal
and Inverted states. The convolutional FEC rate can be selected from
values 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, and 7/8. Output power can be programmed in
the range -20 dBm to +5 dBm
1.3.6 Control and Monitoring

Methods
Remote control of the MCE is via the Ethernet network running the Simple
Network Management Protocol (SNMP) protocol. The protocol, (MIB
interface), can be provided on request.
The unit is also provided with RS-232/RS-485 serial interfaces for control.
The protocol for these interfaces can also be provided on request.
Alternatively, Local control is implemented through the front panel key pad
and display.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Introduction
1.4 Guided Tour

1.4.1 The User Interface
The MCE itself provides no controls at the rear panel but there is a status
display and keypad at the front panel. All connectors are provided at the
rear panel. Control and monitoring may be performed in a variety of ways
(see Control and Monitoring). Once configured, the system runs without
the need for further intervention unless system configuration requirements
change.
1.4.2 LED Colour Coding Philosophy

Two LED colours are used externally in this equipment:
• Red is used to indicate fault conditions, e.g. a missing or faulty input
signal. For correct operation, the red LED must be off, although it may
be on briefly during power-up.
• Green is used to indicate correct conditions and correct system
functioning. For normal operation, the green LED must be on
continuously.
This colour coding principle was devised to facilitate instant perception by
the operator of the equipment's operational status, i.e. the red LED on or
the green LED permanently off indicates a fault condition.
1.4.3 Front Panel Description

Components
The MCE provides a keypad to input data. There are two LED indicators,
located on then left of the front panel (see Figure 1.7).
Front Panel Status Display and Keyboard

The front panel status display and keyboard are used as a local control
method and to set up and configure the MCE (see Chapter 3, Operating
the Equipment Locally). They can also be used as quick method for
accessing the status of the equipment. The status display by default shows
the service name of the video channel being encoded, the equipment type
indicator and the alarm fail status.
Table 1.5: Front Panel Indicators
Indicator Colour Description

Alarm Red This LED is lit when an alarm condition has been detected by the MCE.
Power Green This LED is lit when power is being received by the MCE.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Introduction
ALARM Touch pads, to

POWER select options
Figure 1.7: Front Panel Indicators
1.4.4 Rear Panel Description

The MCE provides all the connectors at the rear panel. The connectors
depend on whether any of the option modules are fitted. All the
connectors, except the power connector, are physically located on the
separate modules that comprise the MCE. Cutaways in the rear panel
permit access to them. See Figure 1.8.
ETHERNET 1 and 2 HOST STATUS VCM STATUS

- data i/p and control (engineering use) (engineering use)
Technical Earth
ALARM Information Label 1
REMOTE CONTROL SDI - Serial Positioned on R/H side
REMOTE Slot 4
IN Data Interface (not shown)
CONTROL OUT (blank module)
- video i/p
Video Compression
Module (tray 1)
Motherboard
(Base Board 3ASI)
(tray 2)
Slots 1-3 (tray 3)
HSYNC IN ASI OUT 1,2,3 AUDIO IN i/p

Information Label 2
VIDEO INPUTS DATA INPUTS IF OUTPUTS Mains Power
(Slot 1) (Slot 2) (Slot 3) Connection
Figure 1.8: Rear Panel Connectors
NOTE…
The connectors with grey annotations on Figure 1.7 are unused on this model. These connectors are
also listed in Table 2.15 in Chapter 2, Installing the Equipment.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Introduction
1.4.5 Construction
Enclosure
The MCE is robustly constructed and is housed in a shielded, self-ventilated
2U high enclosure. All external connections are via rear panel connectors.
The equipment is designed primarily for free-standing, but may be
mounted in a 19 inch rack, if required. It is lightweight and compact, and
suitable for both flyaway use (within an appropriate flight case) and truck
installation.
The equipment operates from a mains power supply, having a wide-
ranging power supply covering 100 – 120 Vac or 220 – 240 Vac at
50/60 Hz nominal. The equipment is intended to operate in ambient air
temperature conditions in the range 0°C to +40°C.
Boards/Modules in the MCE

The MCE contains a Motherboard2 and a Video Compression Module which
are factory fitted in the two top tray positions provided by the enclosure
(see Table 1.6 and Figure 1.8). Video, Data and QPSK Modulator modules
are fitted in the three slots of tray three (see Table 1.7 and Figure 1.8).
Table 1.6: Mandatory Card and Module Positions
Tray Position Name Part

Number
1 LHS Video Compression Module S8652
2 – Motherboard (Base Board 3ASI) S8475
3 Slot 1 Analogue Video Input Module S8481
3 Slot 2 Data Input Module (RS-232 and RS-422) S8477
3 Slot 3 Frequency Agile QPSK Modulator Card S10949
NOTE…
The Motherboard (S8475) is labelled as ‘Base Board 3ASI’ on the PCB.
For module descriptions see Chapter 4, Equipment Description. Access to

the modules is not required for normal operation and may invalidate the
warranty.
2
The Motherboard is sometimes referred to as the Base Board 3ASI.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Introduction
1.5 Standard Modules

1.5.1 Functions
The MCE is shipped with the Video, Data and QPSK Modulator modules
fitted in slots 1, 2 and 3 respectively. The functionality of the basic MCE
can normally be enhanced with the inclusion of additional modules in slot
4. These consist of a horizontally mounted PCB with rear panel connector
space. At reset, the software of the Motherboard2 detects which modules
are fitted and configures them as necessary. The modules are fitted into
the positions indicated in Table 1.7.
1.5.2 Analogue Video Input

(M2/EOM1/VID)
The Video Input Module (S8481) provides the MCE with high quality
analogue video inputs via three BNC connectors. The input format is either
composite video (PAL B/D/G/H/I/M and NTSC-M) or component Y, CR, CB.
The Setup/Video/Source menu associated with this option is described in
Section 3.9.3 in Chapter 3. For a specification of this interface see Annex
B, Technical Specification.
1.5.3 Frequency Agile QPSK Modulator

(M2/EOM1/QPSK2)
The Frequency Agile QPSK Modulator (S10949) is an internal satellite
modulator module. It plugs into the MCE backplane and accepts an MPEG-
2 transport stream directly from the Encoder’s internal program Multiplexer
or via the RAS scrambling module over a synchronous parallel interface.
The Modulator performs energy-dispersal scrambling, Reed-Solomon
encoding, convolutional interleaving, convolutional encoding, symbol
mapping, baseband shaping and modulation, in accordance with the
EN 300 421 specification.
The Modulator module provides QPSK modulation in the frequency range
70 MHz ± 20 MHz, and outputs data at a symbol-rate defined by the
source equipment (Encoder). The spectrum of the QPSK signal can be set
to Normal and Inverted states. The convolutional FEC rate can be selected
from values 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, and 7/8. Output power can be programmed
in the range -20 dBm to +5 dBm.
Menus associated with this module are given in Section 3.9.6 in Chapter 3.
1.5.4 RS-232 and RS-422 Data Input (M2/EOM1/DAT)

The RS-232 and RS-422 Data Input Option Module (S8477) offers
supplementary data inputs in systems in which an Ethernet style data
input is insufficient. It comes with an RS-422 synchronous data input and
an RS-232 asynchronous data input. These inputs have been designed for
backward compatibility to existing System 3000 Encoders. RS-232 data is
input on a dedicated 9-way D-type connector and RS-422 data is input on
a dedicated 15-way D-type connector.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Introduction
RS-422 supports nx64 kbit (up to 2.048 Mbit/s) or nx56 kbit (up to 1.792
Mbit/s) data rates where n = 32 max. The RS-232 input can support data
baud rates of 1.2 k – 38.4 kbaud. RS-422 data can be time-delayed for
synchronisation. The time-delay is only accessible via the debug terminal
of the MCE.
Menus associated with this module are given in Section 3.9.5 in Chapter 3.
1.6 Option Modules

1.6.1 Module Numbering
Table 1.7: RAS and REMUX Module Numbering
Marketing Name Assembly Card Option

Number Part No Part No Number
M2/EOM1/RAS RAS Scrambling Module S10929 S8489 4
M2/EOM1/REMUX Internal Remux Option Module S10811 S10655 6
— Blank Module S8445 M01 — 49
— Blanking Plate S8500 M28 —
NOTES…
Empty module slots, except for slot 2, must be fitted with a blank module (S8445) to enable the correct
air-flow through the equipment. Slot 2 (see Table 1.7) can be fitted with a blanking plate (S8500)
alone.
1.6.2 RAS Scrambling Module (M2/EOM1/RAS)

The RAS Scrambling Module (S8489) is used to scramble the services in a
transport stream so that unauthorised users are denied access. It uses
TANDBERG Television’s proprietary Remote Authorisation System (RAS 1)
which supports two methods of key entry: SNG Key mode or Fixed Link
operation. The module can be located in option module slots 2, 3 or 4.
In SNG Key mode, a seven digit key is entered via the front panel on the
Encoder. In Fixed Link mode, an 8 digit key is assigned by TANDBERG
Television and pre-programmed into the Encoder and IRD. Scrambling can
be switched on and off under user control.
The input to the module is the Motherboard (Base Board 3ASI) Multiplexer
output via the backplane. The output is presented on the backplane as well
as three dedicated ASI outputs. The backplane output is used when further
processing is to be performed on the scrambled transport stream.
Examples of the backplane output being used would be when a RAS
Module is used in conjunction with an Internal QPSK Module or ATM
Interface Module. Three ASI outputs are provided, so that in addition to
the output, both monitor and redundancy connections can be catered for.
Menus associated with this option are given in Section 3.9.7 in Chapter 3.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Introduction
1.6.3 Internal Remux module (M2/EOM1/REMUX)

The Internal Remux module (S10655) is capable of accepting up to three
separate transport streams via ASI connectors and is under the control of
the host Encoder. The functionality allows four transport streams to be
multiplexed together, permitting Encoders to be applied to Multiple
Channels Per Carrier (MCPC) applications. Refer to Chapter 4, Equipment
Description for details. For a specification of this interface see Annex B,
Technical Specification.
Menus associated with this option are given in Section 3.9.8 in Chapter 3.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Introduction
BLANK
ST.TM.E10033.3
Chapter 2
2. Installing the Equipment
Contents
Technical Earth............................................. 2-9
2.1 Introduction................................................................2-3
Option Module Connections ....................... 2-10
2.1.1 General .........................................................2-3
2.1.2 Site Requirements.........................................2-3 2.4 AC Mains Operating Voltage and Earthing ............. 2-10
Power Supplies .............................................2-3 2.4.1 AC Power Supply........................................ 2-10
Environment..................................................2-3 2.4.2 Power Cable and Earthing.......................... 2-10
Lightning Protection ......................................2-3 General....................................................... 2-10
2.1.3 EMC Compliance Statements .......................2-3 Protective Earth/Technical Earth ................ 2-11
EN 55022 / AS/NZS 3548 .............................2-3 Connecting the MCE to the AC Power
FCC...............................................................2-4 Supply......................................................... 2-11
Shock and Vibration ......................................2-4 2.5 Signal Connections ................................................. 2-12
2.2 Preliminary Checks....................................................2-4 2.5.1 Introduction................................................. 2-12
2.2.1 Mechanical Inspection...................................2-4 2.5.2 Video Inputs................................................ 2-12
2.2.2 Moving the Equipment Safely .......................2-4 SDI.............................................................. 2-12
HSYNC IN................................................... 2-13
2.3 Installing the Equipment ............................................2-5
2.5.3 Audio Inputs................................................ 2-13
2.3.1 Read This First!.............................................2-5
Audio........................................................... 2-13
2.3.2 Fixing.............................................................2-5
2.5.4 Outputs ....................................................... 2-14
Free-standing Installation..............................2-5
ASI OUT 1, 2 and 3 .................................... 2-14
Rack Mounting ..............................................2-5
2.5.5 Control Interfaces ....................................... 2-14
Flight Case Mounting ....................................2-6
Ethernet 1 and 2 ......................................... 2-14
2.3.3 Installing Cables – Safety..............................2-6
Alarm .......................................................... 2-14
2.3.4 Cable Routing ...............................................2-6
Host Status ................................................. 2-15
2.3.5 Equipment Access ........................................2-6
Remote Control In....................................... 2-15
2.3.6 Ventilation .....................................................2-6
Remote Control Out.................................... 2-16
2.3.7 Connecting up the MCE ................................2-7
2.5.6 Option Module Connections ....................... 2-16
Connections ..................................................2-7
Analogue Video Input Option
Video Input....................................................2-9 (M2/EOM1/VID) .......................................... 2-16
Audio Input....................................................2-9 Additional Audio Option (M2/EOM1/AUD) .. 2-17
IF Outputs .....................................................2-9 RS-232 and RS-422 Data Input Option
Control...........................................................2-9 (M2/EOM1/DAT) ......................................... 2-18
Power Supply ................................................2-9 RAS Scrambling Module
Alarm/Status..................................................2-9 (M2/EOM1/RAS)......................................... 2-19
ST.TM.E10033.3
Installing the Equipment
Frequency Agile QPSK Modulator Option List of Tables

(M2/EOM1/QPSK2) .................................... 2-19 Table 2.1: Supply Cable Wiring Colours ......................................2-10
Internal Remux Option Table 2.2: SDI Connector.............................................................2-12
(M2/EOM1/REMUX) ................................... 2-20 Table 2.3: HSYNC IN Connector..................................................2-13
Table 2.4: Audio Input Connector ................................................2-13
2.6 Powering Up/Down ................................................. 2-20
Table 2.5: DVB ASI Connector ....................................................2-14
2.6.1 Before Powering Up ................................... 2-20
Table 2.6: Ethernet Connectors ...................................................2-14
2.6.2 Powering Up ............................................... 2-20
Table 2.7: Alarm Status Connector ..............................................2-15
2.6.3 Powering Down .......................................... 2-21 Table 2.8: Host Status Connector ................................................2-15
2.7 Setting the Encoder IP Address.............................. 2-21 Table 2.9: REMOTE CONTROL IN Connector ...........................2-15
2.7.1 Methods of Changing the Encoder IP Table 2.10: REMOTE CONTROL OUT Connector......................2-16
Address ...................................................... 2-21 Table 2.11: Composite Analogue Video Input Connector ............2-16
2.7.2 From the Front Panel Menus...................... 2-21 Table 2.12: Component Video Input Connectors .........................2-17
Table 2.13: AUDIO IN Connector.................................................2-17
2.7.3 From the VT100 (RS-232) Terminal........... 2-22
Table 2.14: ASYNC Connector ....................................................2-18
List of Illustrations Table 2.15: SYNC Connector.......................................................2-18
Figure 2.1: Fitting the MCE into a Rack......................................... 2-5 Table 2.16: DVB ASI Connector ..................................................2-19
Figure 2.2: Air Path through the Enclosure.................................... 2-7 Table 2.17: IF OUT MAIN Connector...........................................2-19
Figure 2.3: Equipment Connections for the Basic Unit .................. 2-8 Table 2.18: IF OUT MONITOR Connector...................................2-19
Figure 2.4: Option Module Connections ........................................ 2-8 Table 2.19: DVB ASI IN Connector..............................................2-20
Figure 2.5: Location of Technical Earth ....................................... 2-11 Table 2.20: DVB ASI OUT Connector..........................................2-20
Figure 2.6: Rear Panel Connectors ............................................. 2-12
ST.TM.E10033.3
2.1 Introduction
2.1.1 General
This chapter provides configuration and connection information for
planning the installation of the E5500 Mobile Contribution Encoder (MCE),
or for installing the equipment at another location. This information also
enables the final set-up of the equipment to be checked in the event of a
fault. In the event of problems, contact Customer Services (see
Preliminary Pages).
2.1.2 Site Requirements

Power Supplies
The MCE operates from a wide-ranging power supply covering the ranges
100-120 Vac, 60 Hz, or 220-240 Vac, 50 Hz. See Annex B, Technical
Specification for a full specification.
Environment
The MCE is intended to operate in ambient air temperature conditions in
the range 0°C to +40°C, and humidity 0% to 90% (non-condensing). See
Annex B, Technical Specification for a full specification.
This equipment is fitted with a splash-proof front panel, however, do not
install this product in areas of high humidity or where there is danger of
water ingress.
Lightning Protection
WARNING…
IF THE MCE HAS BEEN SUBJECT TO A LIGHTNING STRIKE OR POWER SURGE WHICH HAS
STOPPED IT WORKING, DISCONNECT THE POWER IMMEDIATELY. DO NOT REAPPLY POWER
UNTIL IT HAS BEEN CHECKED FOR SAFETY. IF IN DOUBT, CONTACT TANDBERG TELEVISION
CUSTOMER SERVICES.
Where appropriate, ensure this product has an adequate level of lightning

protection. Alternatively, during a lightning storm or when it is left
unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the supply
outlet and disconnect the output equipment. This prevents damage to the
product due to lightning and power-line surges.
2.1.3 EMC Compliance Statements1

EN 55022 / AS/NZS 3548
This equipment is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this
product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be
required to take adequate measures.
1
The EMC information was correct at the time of manufacture. The EMC tests were performed with the Technical
earth attached.
ST.TM.E10033.3
FCC
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits
are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference
when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment.
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual,
may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this
equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in
which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own
expense.
Shock and Vibration
MCE Chassis
The MCE chassis complies with the requirements of ETS 300-019-2-5
Table 2, for both non-operational and operational states, without any
special mounting or casing requirements over and above the standard
mounting requirements specified.
2.2 Preliminary Checks

2.2.1 Mechanical Inspection
When taking delivery of an MCE, check the equipment items delivered
against the enclosed delivery note. Inspect the equipment for damage in
transit. If in doubt, contact Customer Services (see Preliminary Pages).
WARNING…
DO NOT REMOVE THE COVERS OF THIS EQUIPMENT OR ANY MODULES FROM THE
EQUIPMENT. HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT WITHIN THIS EQUIPMENT AND MAY BE
EXPOSED IF THE COVERS ARE REMOVED. ENERGY HAZARDS2 EXIST ON THE BACKPLANE AT
THE FRONT OF THE CARD COMPARTMENT. ONLY TANDBERG TELEVISION-TRAINED AND
APPROVED SERVICE ENGINEERS ARE PERMITTED TO SERVICE THIS EQUIPMENT.
CAUTION…
Unauthorised maintenance or the use of non-approved replacements may affect the equipment
specification and invalidate any warranties.
2.2.2 Moving the Equipment Safely
Do not place this equipment on an unstable cart,

stand, bracket, or table. The equipment may fall,
causing serious injury and serious damage to the
product. Use only with a cart, stand, bracket or
table recommended by TANDBERG Television.
2
‘Energy hazard’ is defined in IEC 950 / EN60950 para 1.2.8.7.
ST.TM.E10033.3
An appliance and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick

stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the appliance and
cart combination to overturn.
Do not move or carry the equipment whilst it is still connected to the
supply or other leads, is live or is in operation.
2.3 Installing the Equipment

2.3.1 Read This First!
The MCE must be handled carefully and thoughtfully to prevent safety
hazards and damage. Ensure that the personnel designated to install the
equipment have the appropriate skills and knowledge. If in any doubt,
contact Customer Services.
Installation should be in accordance with the following instructions and
should only use installation accessories recommended by the
manufacturer.
2.3.2 Fixing
Free-standing Installation
The MCE can be installed free-standing. It should be installed on a secure
horizontal surface where it is unlikely to be knocked or its connectors and
leads disturbed. The equipment must be installed and operated in the
normal horizontal orientation, i.e. not inverted or standing on one side.
The MCE must be stationary during operation.
The equipment must not be used as a support for any other equipment.
Rack Mounting
The MCE can be operated mounted in a 19 inch rack. Ensure that it is
firmly and safely located and has an adequate through-flow of air.
Slide the Encoder onto the chassis supports and affix to the rack by means
of an M6 x 18 mm panhead screw in each corner.
Do not use this product as a support for any other equipment.
Insert screws here to attach

MCE to rack.
Repeat at opposite end of
MCE.
Figure 2.1: Fitting the MCE into a Rack
ST.TM.E10033.3
Flight Case Mounting

The MCE can be mounted in a flight case for temporary transportation, or
it may be used as a permanent housing where access to rear panel
connectors is achieved by means of a case-mounted connector panel which
is permanently wired to the MCE.
In either arrangement, the equipment must be securely fixed to the flight
case internal 19 inch rack using the fixing methods described above.
The equipment must be installed and operated in the normal horizontal
orientation, i.e. not inverted or standing on one side.
The MCE must be stationary during operation.
2.3.3 Installing Cables – Safety

Ensure that Low Voltage3, Extra-Low Voltage (ELV) and Safety Extra-Low
Voltage (SELV) cables are segregated. Do not run ac power cables in the
same duct as signal leads.
2.3.4 Cable Routing

Power supply cables should be routed so that they are not likely to be
walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them. Pay particular
attention to cables at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where
they exit from the appliance.
Do not run ac power cables in the same duct as signal leads.
2.3.5 Equipment Access

WARNING...
BERYLLIUM COPPER FINGER STRIPS ARE USED IN THIS EQUIPMENT TO SEAL THE
ENCLOSURE FOR EMI PROTECTION. THIS ARRANGEMENT IS PERFECTLY SAFE DURING
NORMAL OPERATION. DO NOT FILE THE STRIPS OR OTHERWISE CAUSE THEM TO PRODUCE
DUST OR PARTICLES. ANY CUTS CAUSED BY THE STRIP SHOULD BE TREATED
APPROPRIATELY.
In free-standing and rack-mounted applications, ensure that the MCE is

installed in such a way to allow access to the rear of the equipment in
order to be able to gain access to connectors.
2.3.6 Ventilation
WARNING...
NEVER PUSH OBJECTS OF ANY KIND INTO THIS EQUIPMENT THROUGH OPENINGS AS THEY
MAY TOUCH DANGEROUS VOLTAGE POINTS OR SHORT-OUT PARTS THAT COULD RESULT IN
A FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK. NEVER SPILL LIQUID OF ANY KIND ON THE PRODUCT.
3
Low Voltage, Extra-Low Voltage and Safety Extra-Low Voltage are defined in IEC 950 / EN60950.
ST.TM.E10033.3
CAUTIONS...
Openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the product and
to protect it from overheating, and these openings must not be blocked or covered. This product should
never be placed near or over a radiator or heat register. This product should not be placed in a built-in
installation such as a rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the instructions have been adhered to.
Do not install equipment so that the air intake of one aligns with the outlet on another. Provide baffles
and adequate spacing.
The fans contained within this unit are not fitted with a dust/insect filter. Pay particular attention to the
environment in which it is to be used.
The unit is designed for stationary or fixed use only. Ensure it is firmly and
safely located and has an adequate through-flow of air. Allow at least
50 mm free air-space at each side of the equipment.
Units in racks can be stacked without ventilation panels between. Racks
containing stacked equipment may need to be forced-air cooled to reduce
the operating ambient temperature.
The MCE chassis is cooled by five fans. Two of these fans cool the power
supply compartment towards the front of the unit, three fans cool the card
compartment towards the rear of the unit.
The air path through the equipment is shown in
Figure 2.2.
Cool air in
(right, rear)
Warm air out
Three fans mounted
(right, front)
at rear, left side of
unit
Warm air out Two fans mounted

(left, rear) at front, right side
of unit
Cool air in
(front)
Figure 2.2: Air Path through the Enclosure
2.3.7 Connecting up the MCE

Connections
Once the unit has been installed in its intended operating position, it is
ready to be connected up to the rest of the system equipment (Figure 2.3
and Figure 2.4), providing it too has been installed (see Section 2.5 Signal
Connections for pin-out details of the connectors).
Do not move or install equipment whilst it is still attached to the mains
supply. Ensure ESD precautions are observed whilst inter-connecting
equipment.
ST.TM.E10033.3
E5500 Mobile Contribution

Encoder
Video Input Output

ASI OUT DVB Transport stream output
Serial video input SDI IN
ASI OUT DVB Transport stream output
Studio timing HSYNC IN
reference signal ASI OUT DVB Transport stream output
Audio Input
Alarm
Audio input AUDIO IN
ALARM Alarm
Control/Data
10BaseT ETHERNET 1
10BaseT ETHERNET 2
Engineering use HOST STATUS
Not used REMOTE CONTROL IN

Not used REMOTE CONTROL
Figure 2.3: Equipment Connections for the Basic Unit
E5500 Mobile Contribution Encoder

Remux Module
ASI Inputs ASI Output
ASI Inputs 1, 2 and 3 DVB ASI IN 1, 2 and 3 DVB ASI OUT 1 Remultiplexed ASI Output
(from contributing Encoders)
Video Input Module

1Analogue Composite Video I/P Y/COMP
1Analogue Component Video I/P Y/COMP, CB, CR
2Balanced Analogue Audio I/P Audio Input Module

AUDIO IN
2AES/EBU Digital Audio I/P
Data Input Module
RS-422 Data Input SYNC

RS-232 Data Input ASYNC
QPSK Modulator Module
NOTE: IF Output
1Choose any ONE video input. IF OUT MAIN System IF Output
2Choose any ONE audio input.
RAS CA Module
DVB ASI 1, 2 and 3 ASI Outputs

(with security)
Figure 2.4: Option Module Connections
ST.TM.E10033.3
NOTES…
1. See Section 2.5 for details of pinouts.
2. Some connectors on the equipment rear panel are not used, and are hence not shown in Figure
2.3.
Video Input
The MCE accepts video in digital serial format, connect the video source to
the SDI IN connector. A timing reference can be connected to the HSYNC
IN connector from the studio black/burst signal, however, this input is not
normally used on this model.
Audio Input
The MCE accepts two channels of stereo audio in analogue and AES/EBU
digital formats. Connect the audio source to the AUDIO IN connector.
Alternatively, the audio can be embedded in the video data input on the
SDI digital video inputs.
IF Outputs
Connect the main IF output from the MCE to the external up-link
equipment. An IF output is also provided for monitoring purposes if
required.
Control
Remote control is achieved by connecting a control workstation to the
ETHERNET 1 or ETHERNET 2 interface connector. The Ethernet interface
also enables the download of a logo overlay to the equipment (using the
TFTP protocol). Contact Customer Services (see Preliminary Pages) for
further information if the remote control or logo overlay facilities are to be
used.
The REMOTE CONTROL IN connector provides an RS-485 port for remote
control of the MCE, if required. This connector is not normally used in this
configuration.
The HOST STATUS connector provides a low level control interface for
test engineer use only. Do not make any connection to this connector.
Power Supply
Section 2.4, AC Mains Operating Voltage and Earthing provides details of
power supply connection, Protective earthing and safety. Read all the
instructions carefully and take note of all warnings and cautions.
Alarm/Status
If required, connect an external status monitoring device to the ALARM
connector.
Technical Earth
Connect the MCE's Technical earth to a suitable point.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Option Module Connections

Section 2.5.6, Option Module Connections provides details of specific
option modules.
2.4 AC Mains Operating Voltage and Earthing

2.4.1 AC Power Supply
CAUTION...
This equipment should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label
and detailed in Annex B, Technical Specification. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to the
installation, consult your appliance dealer or local power company. For products intended to operate
from battery power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions.
The power supply used in this equipment is a wide-ranging, ac power

supply unit designed for use at either 100 – 120 Vac or 220 – 240 Vac at
50/60 Hz nominal (see Annex B, Technical Specification for a full power
supply specification). There are no links or switches to be altered for
operation from different ac supplies.
2.4.2 Power Cable and Earthing

General
Check that the ac power cable is suitable for the country in which the MCE
is to be used.
WARNINGS...
1. IF THE MOULDED PLUG FITTED TO THE MAINS CABLE SUPPLIED WITH THIS UNIT IS NOT
REQUIRED, PLEASE DISPOSE OF IT SAFELY. FAILURE TO DO THIS MAY ENDANGER LIFE
AS LIVE ENDS MAY BE EXPOSED IF THE REMOVED PLUG IS INSERTED INTO A MAINS
OUTLET.
2. POWER-SUPPLY CORDS SHOULD BE ROUTED SO THAT THEY ARE NOT LIKELY TO BE
WALKED ON OR PINCHED BY ITEMS PLACED UPON OR AGAINST THEM, PAYING
PARTICULAR ATTENTION TO CORDS AT PLUGS, CONVENIENCE RECEPTACLES, AND
THE POINT WHERE THEY EXIT FROM THE APPLIANCE.
The unit is supplied with a two metre detachable mains supply cable fitted
with a moulded plug suitable for the USA, UK or Europe.
The wires in the mains cable are coloured in accordance with the wire
colour code shown in Table 2.1.
Table 2.1: Supply Cable Wiring Colours
UK EUROPE USA
(BS 1363) (CEE 7/7) (NEMA 5-15P)
Earth: Green-and-yellow Green-and-yellow Green
Neutral: Blue Blue White
Live: Brown Brown Black
ST.TM.E10033.3
Protective Earth/Technical Earth
WARNINGS...
1. THIS UNIT MUST BE CORRECTLY EARTHED THROUGH THE MOULDED PLUG SUPPLIED.
IF THE LOCAL MAINS SUPPLY DOES NOT HAVE AN EARTH CONDUCTOR DO NOT
CONNECT THE UNIT. CONTACT CUSTOMER SERVICES FOR ADVICE.
2. BEFORE CONNECTING THE UNIT TO THE SUPPLY, CHECK THE SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS
IN ANNEX B.
The unit has a Technical earth terminal located at the rear panel, (see
Figure 2.5). Its use is recommended. This is NOT a Protective earth for
electric shock protection. The terminal is provided to:
1. Ensure all equipment chassis (if fixed within a rack) are at the same
Technical earth potential. To do this, connect a wire between the
Technical earth terminal and a suitable point on the rack.
2. Eliminate the migration of stray charges when connecting between
equipment.
WARNING...
IF THE TERMINAL SCREW HAS TO BE REPLACED, USE AN M4 X 12 mm LONG POZIDRIV
PANHEAD. USING A LONGER SCREW MAY CAUSE A SAFETY HAZARD.
Technical
Earth
Figure 2.5: Location of Technical Earth
Connecting the MCE to the AC Power Supply
WARNINGS...
1. DO NOT OVERLOAD WALL OUTLETS AND EXTENSION CORDS AS THIS CAN RESULT IN A
RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK.
2. AS NO MAINS SWITCH IS FITTED TO THIS UNIT, ENSURE THE LOCAL AC POWER SUPPLY
IS SWITCHED OFF BEFORE CONNECTING THE SUPPLY CORD.
3. THE MCE IS NOT FITTED WITH AN ON/OFF SWITCH. ENSURE THAT THE SOCKET-OUTLET
IS INSTALLED NEAR THE EQUIPMENT SO THAT IT IS EASILY ACCESSIBLE. FAILURE TO
ISOLATE THE EQUIPMENT PROPERLY MAY CAUSE A SAFETY HAZARD.
To connect the equipment to the local ac power supply:

1. Ensure the local ac supply is switched OFF.
2. Ensure the correct fuse type and rating has been fitted to both the
equipment (see Section 5.4.3, Fuse Replacement) and the ac power
cable.
3. Connect the ac power lead to the mains input connector and then to
the local mains supply.
ST.TM.E10033.3
2.5 Signal Connections

2.5.1 Introduction
All signal connectors are located at the rear panel of the MCE. For a
detailed interface specification see Annex B, Technical Specification.
Always use the specified cables supplied for signal integrity and compliance
with EMC requirements.
ETHERNET 1 and 2 HOST STATUS VCM STATUS

- data i/p and control (engineering use) (engineering use)
Technical Earth
ALARM
REMOTE CONTROL SDI - Serial
REMOTE Option Slot 4
IN Data Interface
CONTROL OUT (blank module)
- video i/p
Video Compression
Module (tray 1)
Base Board 3ASI

(Motherboard)
(tray 2)
Option Slots 1-3
(tray 3)
HSYNC IN ASI OUT 1,2,3 AUDIO IN i/p
VIDEO INPUTS DATA INPUTS IF OUTPUTS Mains Power

(if option 1 fitted) (if option 3 fitted) (if option 5 fitted) Connection
Figure 2.6: Rear Panel Connectors
NOTE…
Some connectors on the equipment rear panel are not used.
2.5.2 Video Inputs

SDI
A 75 Ω BNC connector provides a serial
digital video input to the unit.
The serial input supports error detection and
handling (EDH) as defined by the specification
SMPTE RP 165-1994, ‘Error Detection Checkwords
and Status Flags for Use in Bit Serial Digital
Interfaces for Television’.
Refer to Chapter 4, Equipment Description for further information.
Table 2.2: SDI Connector
Pin Signal
Centre Video Input
Screen Ground
ST.TM.E10033.3
HSYNC IN
A 75 Ω BNC connector provides a timing
reference to the unit. The timing
reference is fed to HSYNC IN from the
studio black/burst signal.
Table 2.3: HSYNC IN Connector
Pin Signal
Centre Video Input
Screen Ground
2.5.3 Audio Inputs

Audio
A 15-way, D-type male connector
provides an audio channel which may be
used as 4 channels of analogue audio for
configuration as 4 mono or 2 stereo audio
pairs analogue, or by selecting digital
audio can operate as digital AES/EBU
audio on left channel only. The right
channel can be configured to output a
reference AES/EBU signal for an external
Dolby AC-3 encoder.
The MCE is supplied with a ‘break out cable’ (part number RD.C.MSC1011)
which plugs into this connector, and provides a more convenient means of
connecting the audio inputs via four XLR female connectors.
Audio embedded on the SDI digital input can also be extracted and
encoded (see Table 2.2 for pinout details).
Table 2.4: Audio Input Connector
Analogue Input AES/EBU Digital Input
Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal

1 L A (+) 9 L A (-) 1 AES A (+) 9 AES A (-)
2 L A screen 10 R A (+) 2 AES A screen 10 AES OP A (+)
3 R A (-) 11 R A screen 3 AES OP A (-) 11 AES A screen
4 L B (+) 12 L B (-) 4 AES B (+) 12 AES B (-)
5 L B screen 13 R B (+) 5 AES B screen 13 AES OP B (+)
6 R B (-) 14 R B screen 6 AES OP B (-) 14 AES B screen
7 Not connected 15 Not connected 7 Not connected 15 Not connected
8 Chassis ground 8 Chassis ground
NOTE…
In analogue mode termination is either 20 kτ or 600 τ.
In AES/EBU mode termination in 110 τ.
ST.TM.E10033.3
2.5.4 Outputs
ASI OUT 1, 2 and 3
75 Ω BNC connectors provide three DVB
ASI outputs from the unit.
Table 2.5: DVB ASI Connector
Pin Signal
Centre Signal
Screen Ground
2.5.5 Control Interfaces

Ethernet 1 and 2
8-way, RJ45 connectors provide a
10BaseT Ethernet interface for
communications with external equipment
for control, monitoring and SI/PSI
information.
Table 2.6: Ethernet Connectors
Pin Signal Pin Signal

1 Tx Out (+) 4-5 Not connected
2 Tx Out (-) 6 Rx In (-)
3 Rx In (+) 7-8 Not connected
Alarm
A 9-way, D-type, male connector
provides an alarm relay interface, which
can be used to send a signal to remote
monitoring equipment. The connector
also provides a remote reset connection.
Two relays are provided – Alarm and Fail:
• The Alarm relay is triggered in response to an alarm condition – a
condition which is unusual but which may occur during normal
operation (such as loss of video input).
• The Fail relay is triggered during a hardware or software failure
condition – a condition that should never occur during the normal
operating life of the equipment. The Alarm relay is also triggered
during a fail condition.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Table 2.7: Alarm Status Connector
Item Specification
Pin: Pin 1  Ground Pin 6  Fail not active –
Pin 2  Fail (common) connected to pin 2
Pin 3  Alarm not active – during a normal (non-fail)
connected to pin 8 condition
during a normal (non- Pin 7  Fail active – connected
alarm) condition to pin 2 during a fail
Pin 4  Alarm active – condition
connected to pin 8 Pin 8  Alarm (common)
during an alarm Pin 9  Reset 2 – short to pin 5
condition to reset
Pin 5  Reset 1 – short to pin 9
to reset
Host Status
A 9-way, D-type male connector acts as a
low level interface for communicating with
the equipment and functions for test
engineers. This is not intended as a
customer interface.
Table 2.8: Host Status Connector

1 Not connected 4 Not connected
2 Test Rx 5 Ground
3 Test Tx 6-9 Not connected
Remote Control In
A 9-way, D-type male connector can
provide an RS-485 port for remote
control of the MCE.
Table 2.9: REMOTE CONTROL IN Connector

1 Ground 6 RxDB
2 2K pullup to +5V 7 To pin 8
3 TxDA 8 To pin 7
4 RxDA 9 TxDB
5 Ground
ST.TM.E10033.3
Remote Control Out

A 9-way, D-type male connector provides
an RS-232/RS-422 port for remote
control of an external IRD or Modulator.
The Modulator control port may be either
RS-232 or RS-422. To select RS-232,
connect pin 4 to pin 5. This connector is
not normally used in this configuration.
Table 2.10: REMOTE CONTROL OUT Connector

1 Ground 6 MOD_RxDB
2 IRD_RxD (RS-232) 7 MOD_TxDA (RS-422)/MOD_TxD
(RS-232)
3 IRD_TxD (RS-232) 8 MOD_TxDB (RS-422)/MOD_RxD
(RS-232)
4 _SELECT_RS-232 9 MOD_RxDA (RS-422)
5 Ground
2.5.6 Option Module Connections

Analogue Video Input Option (M2/EOM1/VID)
Y/COMP, CB and CR
Composite Analogue
This connector provides a differential
analogue video input for either a 625 line
composite PAL-B/D/G/H/I or 525 line
composite NTSC-M (with or without
pedestal) signal. The composite analogue
video connector doubles as the Y
component connector.
Table 2.11: Composite Analogue Video Input Connector
Item Specification
Connector type: BNC, female 75 Ω
Connector designation: Y/COMP
Pin: Centre  Signal
Shield  Ground/Chassis
ST.TM.E10033.3
Component
These connectors provide a YCBCR
component video input, in either 625 line,
525 line (with or without pedestal), or
525 line (no pedestal, Beta levels)
format. The Y connector doubles as the
composite connector.
Table 2.12: Component Video Input Connectors
Item Specification
Connector type: BNC, female 75 Ω (3 off)
Connector designations: Y/COMP, CB, CR
Pin: Centre  Signal
Shield  Ground/Chassis
Three 75 Ω BNC connectors provide a

high quality analogue video input to the
unit.
Additional Audio Option (M2/EOM1/AUD)
Audio In
A 15-way, D-type male connector
provides an audio channel which may be
used as four channels of analogue audio
for configuration as four mono or two
stereo audio pairs analogue, or by
selecting digital audio can operate as
digital AES/EBU audio on left channel
only.
On channel 1 only, the “right” inputs can be reconfigured to output a
reference AES/EBU signal for an external Dolby AC-3 encoder
The MCE is supplied with a ‘break out cable’ (part number RD.C.MSC1011)
which plugs into this connector, and provides a more convenient means of
connecting the audio inputs via four XLR female connectors.
Audio embedded on the SDI digital input can also be extracted and
encoded (see Table 2.2 for pinout details).
Table 2.13: AUDIO IN Connector

1 L A/AES A (+) 9 L A/AES A (-)
2 L A/AES A screen 10 R A/AES OP A (+)
3 R A/AES OP A (-) 11 R A/AES A screen
4 L B/AES B (+) 12 L B/AES B (-)
ST.TM.E10033.3

5 L B/AES B screen 13 R B (+)
6 R B (-) 14 R B/AES B screen
8 Chassis ground
NOTE…
In analogue mode termination is either 20 kτ or 600 τ.
In AES/EBU mode termination in 110 τ.
RS-232 and RS-422 Data Input Option (M2/EOM1/DAT)
Async
A 9-way, D-type female connector

provides an RS-232 asynchronous, serial
communications data input interface.
Table 2.14: ASYNC Connector

1 Output DCD (Data Carrier Detect) 6 Output DSR (Data Set Ready)
2 Output RxD (Receive Data) 7 Not connected
3 Input TxD (Transmit Data) 8 Output CTS (Clear To Send)
5 Ground
NOTE…
XON/XOFF flow control is implemented on pin 2.
Sync
A 15-way, D-type female connector
provides an RS-422 synchronous, serial
communications data input interface.
Table 2.15: SYNC Connector

1 Protective Ground 9 Input TXD (-) (Transmit Data)
2 Input TXD (+) (Transmit Data) 10 Input DTR (-) (Data Terminal
Ready)
3 Input DTR (+) (Data Terminal Ready) 11 Output RXD (-) (Receive Data)
4 Output RXD (+) (Receive Data) 12 Output DSR (-) (Data Set Ready)
5 Output DSR (+) (Data Set Ready) 13 Output RXC (-) (Receive Clock)
ST.TM.E10033.3

6 Output RXC (+) (Receive Clock) 14 Input TXC (-) (Transmit Clock)
7 Input TXC (+) (Transmit Clock) 15 Not connected
8 Signal Ground
RAS Scrambling Module (M2/EOM1/RAS)
DVB ASI 1, 2 and 3

75 Ω BNC connectors provide outputs
from the unit.
Table 2.16: DVB ASI Connector
Pin Signal
Centre Signal
Screen Ground
Frequency Agile QPSK Modulator Option (M2/EOM1/QPSK2)
IF OUT MAIN
A 75 Ω BNC connector provides the 70
MHz IF output.
Table 2.17: IF OUT MAIN Connector
Pin Signal
Centre Signal
Screen Ground
IF OUT MONITOR
A 75 Ω BNC connector provides an output
for monitoring the IF signal. This output is
always enabled.
Table 2.18: IF OUT MONITOR Connector
Pin Signal
Centre Signal
Screen Ground
ST.TM.E10033.3
Internal Remux Option (M2/EOM1/REMUX)
DVB ASI IN 1, 2 and 3

75 Ω BNC connectors provide inputs to
the unit.
Table 2.19: DVB ASI IN Connector
Pin Signal
Centre Signal
Screen Ground
DVB ASI OUT 1

A 75 Ω BNC connector provides an output
from the unit.
Table 2.20: DVB ASI OUT Connector
Pin Signal
Centre Signal
Screen Ground
2.6 Powering Up/Down

2.6.1 Before Powering Up
Before powering-up the MCE, check that:
1. The unit has been installed in a suitable location.
2. The unit has been connected to external equipment and power supply,
as required.
3. The power supply has been checked and a good earth provided.
4. The correct fuse type and rating has been fitted to both the equipment
and the ac power cable.
2.6.2 Powering Up
To power up the MCE:
1. Turn on the local mains supply to apply power to the equipment.
2. The MCE executes a series of power-up initialisation and self-test
routines.
3. Ensure that all cooling fans are rotating. If they are not, switch off the
equipment immediately.
ST.TM.E10033.3
NOTE...
If the MCE is installed in a position in which the fans cannot be easily checked, check the Fans
parameter on the Status/System/General Menu (see Chapter 3, Operating the Equipment
Locally) to confirm the operation of the fans. This menu also contains a Temperature parameter
which shows the temperature inside the MCE chassis.
4. Confirm that the green Power LED is lit and that the red Alarm LED is
unlit.
5. The MCE has a boot-up period of approximately 30 seconds. Stable
operation within specification is available immediately after the boot
period.
6. The configuration of the MCE after boot-up is the same as when power
was last removed, with the following exceptions:
a) Modulation of the IF carrier is switched off.
b) The IF output is switched off.
c) The IF output power level is set to ‘Low’ (or ‘Normal’, if the low and
normal settings are set to the same level).
If the MCE has been switched off, but it has not been moved and its
external connections have not been changed, the IF output and modulation
must be switched back on and the IF power level set to its previous setting
in order to re-enable transmission. See Chapter 3, Operating the
Equipment Locally.
NOTE…
External equipment such as an up-converter, video source4 etc., may be switched on either before or
after the MCE and will not result in damage, lock-up, or otherwise interfere with the operation of the
MCE.
2.6.3 Powering Down

To power down the MCE, turn off the local mains supply to remove power
from the equipment.
2.7 Setting the Encoder IP Address

2.7.1 Methods of Changing the Encoder IP Address
The MCE IP address is normally set during manufacture. If for any reason
the IP address has to be changed, this can be achieved via the front panel
menus or by using an engineering VT100 (RS-232) terminal, connected to
the Host Status port of the MCE.
2.7.2 From the Front Panel Menus

To access the IP Address option from the front panel menus, press the IP
Address softkey in the Setup/System/General Menu. Edit the IP address
by use of the keypad and then press the Enter softkey.
4
The Alarm LED may be lit if the video source is switched on after MCE has booted to indicate that the video input is
not locked.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Setup/System/General Edit
IP Address Del
172.16.248.91 Case
Update using keypad Enter
(Upper case) Quit
2.7.3 From the VT100 (RS-232) Terminal

Attach a VT100 (RS-232) terminal to the Host Status port of the MCE.
The parameters are:
• 19200 baud
• 8 data bits
• 1 stop bit
• no parity
Having connected the terminal:
1. Press <Return>, then <Y>.
2. Press <B> for Configuration menu.
3. Press <B> for Network.
4. Press <A> for IP Address.
5. Enter required IP Address, and press <Return>.
6. Press <Esc> several times to exit diagnostics.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Chapter 3
3. Operating the Equipment Locally
Contents
3.6.8 IF Frequency Option................................... 3-29
3.1 Introduction................................................................3-5
IF Output Switched On ............................... 3-29
3.2 Navigating the Display Screens.................................3-5 IF Output Switched Off ............................... 3-30
3.2.1 Booting..........................................................3-5
3.7 Config Menu............................................................ 3-30
3.2.2 Moving Through the Menu Screens..............3-6
3.7.1 Menu Options ............................................. 3-30
General .........................................................3-6
Description.................................................. 3-30
Using the Keypad..........................................3-6
Selection..................................................... 3-31
Using the Functions Associated with
Softkeys ........................................................3-7 Load Active Config Option.......................... 3-31
3.2.3 Menu Hierarchy.............................................3-8 Store Active Config Option ......................... 3-31
Load Cfgs From Backup Option ................. 3-32
3.3 Summary Screen.....................................................3-20 Store Cfgs in Backup Option ...................... 3-32
3.4 Quick Configuration .................................................3-21 Factory 525 Dflts Option............................. 3-33
Factory 625 Dflts Option............................. 3-33
3.5 Getting Started ........................................................3-21 Write Protect Cfgs Option........................... 3-33
3.5.1 Introduction .................................................3-21
3.5.2 Choosing Parameters .................................3-21 3.8 Top Level Menu ...................................................... 3-34
3.5.3 Automatic Data Rate Selection ...................3-22 3.9 Setup Menu............................................................. 3-34
3.5.4 Manual Data Rate Selection .......................3-22 3.9.1 Menu Options ............................................. 3-34
3.6 Setup/Operations Menu Options .............................3-23 3.9.2 System Menu.............................................. 3-34
3.6.1 Selection .....................................................3-23 Menu Options ............................................. 3-34
3.6.2 IF Output Option..........................................3-24 Service Info Menu....................................... 3-35
3.6.3 Modulation Option.......................................3-24 General Menu............................................. 3-42
3.6.4 IF Power Option ..........................................3-24 Configurations Menu................................... 3-45
3.6.5 FEC Rate Option.........................................3-25 Remote Control Menu................................. 3-45
Considerations ............................................3-25 Reset Encoder ............................................ 3-47
Modulation and IF Output Switched On ......3-25 3.9.3 Video Menu................................................. 3-48
Modulation and/or IF Output Switched Off..3-26 Introduction................................................. 3-48
3.6.6 Tx Bandwidth Option...................................3-26 Video Source Menu .................................... 3-48
Modulation and IF Output Switched On ......3-26 Video Encoder Menu .................................. 3-54
Modulation and/or IF Output Switched Off..3-27 Vertical Blanking Interval (VBI) Menu......... 3-62
3.6.7 Symbol Rate Option....................................3-27 3.9.4 Audio Menu................................................. 3-67
Modulation and IF Output Switched On ......3-27 Selection..................................................... 3-67
Modulation and/or IF Output Switched Off..3-29 Channels 1A and 1B Menu......................... 3-67
ST.TM.E10033.3
Operating the Equipment Locally
Languages Menu........................................ 3-83 Table 3.2: IF Output Settings .......................................................3-24

3.9.5 Data Menu.................................................. 3-84 Table 3.3: Modulation Settings.....................................................3-24
Selection..................................................... 3-84 Table 3.4: IF Power Settings........................................................3-25
RS232 (Async) Menu ................................. 3-84 Table 3.5: Input Range – Transmission Bandwidth .....................3-26
Table 3.6: Input Range – Symbol Rate........................................3-28
RS422 (Sync) Menu ................................... 3-86
Table 3.7: Input Range – IF Frequency .......................................3-29
Data PID Option ......................................... 3-87
Table 3.8: System Control Options ..............................................3-37
3.9.6 QPSK Modulator Menu............................... 3-87 Table 3.9: Syntax Options............................................................3-37
Selection..................................................... 3-87 Table 3.10: SI Deliv Desc Options ...............................................3-38
3.9.7 Multiplexer (Mux) Menu (RAS Option Table 3.11: Satellite Delivery Frequency Options........................3-38
fitted, Internal Remux Option not fitted).... 3-101 Table 3.12: Modulation Type Options ..........................................3-39
Menu Options ........................................... 3-101 Table 3.13: FEC Rate Options.....................................................3-40
Output Format Option............................... 3-101 Table 3.14: Satellite Orbital Position Options ..............................3-40
Bit-Rate Option ......................................... 3-102 Table 3.15: Satellite West/East Options ......................................3-41
Scramble Option (RAS Option Module Table 3.16: Polarisation Options..................................................3-41
Fitted) ....................................................... 3-102 Table 3.17: UTC Hour Offset Options..........................................3-43
SNG Key Code Option (RAS Option Table 3.18: Display Errors Options ..............................................3-44
Module Fitted)........................................... 3-102 Table 3.19: Display Contrast Options ..........................................3-45
3.9.8 Mux Menu (Internal Remux Option Table 3.20: Control Options .........................................................3-46
Module Fitted)........................................... 3-103 Table 3.21: SAbus Address Options............................................3-46
Selection................................................... 3-103 Table 3.22: Baud Rate Options....................................................3-47
Host Mux .................................................. 3-103 Table 3.23: Port/Protocol Options................................................3-47
Table 3.24: Video Source Options ...............................................3-50
Services.................................................... 3-106
Table 3.25: Frame Rate Options..................................................3-51
3.10 Status Menu.......................................................... 3-109 Table 3.26: O/P Video Loss Options............................................3-51
Table 3.27: Sync Source Options ................................................3-52
3.11 Errors .................................................................. 3-109
Table 3.28: Sync Impedance Options..........................................3-52
3.12 Diagnostics Menu ................................................. 3-109 Table 3.29: Logo Options.............................................................3-53
3.12.1 Menu Options ........................................... 3-109 Table 3.30: Text Color Options ....................................................3-53
Selection................................................... 3-109 Table 3.31: Background Options .................................................3-54
Table 3.32: Profile/Level Options.................................................3-56
All Modules Option ................................... 3-110
Table 3.33: Control Mode Options ...............................................3-57
Individual Modules Menu.......................... 3-110
Table 3.34: Encoding Mode Options............................................3-58
Front Panel Menu..................................... 3-110
Table 3.35: Seamless Mode Bit-rate............................................3-58
3.13 Input Monitor ......................................................... 3-111 Table 3.36: Horizontal Resolution Options ..................................3-60
Table 3.37: Aspect Ratio Options ................................................3-60
List of Illustrations Table 3.38: Group of Pictures Structure Options.........................3-61
Figure 3.1: Keypad and Display Functions.................................... 3-6 Table 3.39: Group of Pictures Length Options.............................3-61
Figure 3.2: How to Access the Inscriptions on the Keypad ........... 3-7 Table 3.40: 3:2 Pulldown Options ................................................3-62
Figure 3.3: Menu Hierarchy – Summary Screen and Top Table 3.41: VBI - Line ‘n’ Options ................................................3-66
Level Menu ................................................................... 3-9
Table 3.42: Source Options .........................................................3-70
Figure 3.4: Menu Hierarchy – Setup/System Menu..................... 3-10
Table 3.43: Audio Bit-rate Options...............................................3-71
Figure 3.5: Menu Hierarchy – Setup/Video Menu........................ 3-11
Table 3.44: Coding Mode Options ...............................................3-72
Figure 3.6: Menu Hierarchy – Setup/Audio Menu........................ 3-12
Table 3.45: Coding Standard Options..........................................3-72
Figure 3.7: Menu Hierarchy – Setup/Data Menu and
Table 3.46: Sampling Rate Options .............................................3-73
Setup/Modulator Menu ............................................... 3-13
Table 3.47: Gain Options .............................................................3-73
Figure 3.8: Menu Hierarchy – Setup/Mux Menu.......................... 3-14
Table 3.48: Impedance Options...................................................3-74
Figure 3.9: Menu Hierarchy – Status/System Menu.................... 3-15
Table 3.49: Bit Stream Mode Options..........................................3-75
Figure 3.10: Menu Hierarchy – Status/Video Menu..................... 3-16
Table 3.50: Dialogue Level Options.............................................3-75
Figure 3.11: Menu Hierarchy – Status/Audio Menu..................... 3-17
Table 3.51: Dolby Srnd Mode Options.........................................3-76
Figure 3.12: Menu Hierarchy – Status/Data Menu and
Status/Modulator Menu .............................................. 3-18 Table 3.52: Mixing Level Options.................................................3-77
Figure 3.13: Menu Hierarchy – Status/Mux Menu ....................... 3-19 Table 3.53: Room Type Options ..................................................3-77
Figure 3.14: Data Rate Automatic Selection................................ 3-22 Table 3.54: Copyright Options .....................................................3-78
Figure 3.15: Data Rate Manual Selection.................................... 3-22 Table 3.55: Original Options ........................................................3-78
Figure 3.16: Maximum Symbol Rate vs IF Frequency Graph ..... 3-28 Table 3.56: Dynamic Range Options ...........................................3-79
Figure 3.17: Configuration Loading and Storage......................... 3-31 Table 3.57: Dynamic Range Options ...........................................3-79
Table 3.58: Deemphasis Options.................................................3-80
List of Tables Table 3.59: DC Filter Options.......................................................3-80
Table 3.1: Keypad Button Assignments......................................... 3-6
ST.TM.E10033.3
Table 3.60: Low Pass Filter Options............................................3-81 Table 3.73: Tx Bandwidth Options ...............................................3-92
Table 3.61: Embedded Src 12 Options........................................3-81 Table 3.74: Symbol Rate Options ................................................3-93
Table 3.62: External Delay Options .............................................3-82 Table 3.75: FEC Rate Options .....................................................3-94
Table 3.63: AES/EBU Output Options .........................................3-83 Table 3.76: Spectrum Inv Options................................................3-96
Table 3.64: Encoding Options......................................................3-85 Table 3.77: Preset Pwr Low Options............................................3-96
Table 3.65: Baud Rate Options....................................................3-85 Table 3.78: Preset Pwr Norm Options .........................................3-97
Table 3.66: Encoding Options......................................................3-86 Table 3.79: Power On State Options ...........................................3-98
Table 3.67: Bit-rate Options .........................................................3-87 Table 3.80: Sat Del Freq Options.................................................3-98
Table 3.68: Output Format Options .............................................3-89 Table 3.81: Sat Orb Pos Options .................................................3-99
Table 3.69: IF Output Options......................................................3-89 Table 3.82: Sat West/East Options ............................................3-100
Table 3.70: IF Power Options ......................................................3-90 Table 3.83: Polarisation Options ................................................3-100
Table 3.71: IF Frequency Options ...............................................3-90 Table 3.84: Output Format Options............................................3-101
Table 3.72: Modulation Options ...................................................3-91 Table 3.85: Scramble Options....................................................3-102
Table 3.86: On Air Options.........................................................3-104
Table 3.87: O/P Rate (204) Option ............................................3-104
Table 3.88: Host Rate (188) and Host Rate (204) Options.......3-105
Table 3.89: Packet Length Options............................................3-106
Table 3.90: O/P Rate (188) Option ............................................3-108
ST.TM.E10033.3
BLANK
ST.TM.E10033.3
3.1 Introduction
The front panel display and keypad are used to configure, control and
monitor the E5500 Mobile Contribution Encoder (MCE). The control
interface is a structured menu through which the user navigates to access
the various options. This chapter describes the menu hierarchy and menu
options in detail. It also includes a ‘getting started’ section (see page 3-21)
which provides advice for new users on configuring the MCE after
power-on.
NOTE…
The configuration of the MCE after booting is the same as when power was last removed, with the
following exceptions:
1) Modulation of the IF carrier is switched off.
2) The IF output is switched off.
3) The IF output power level is set to ‘Low’ (or ‘Normal’, if the low and normal
settings are set to the same level).
If the MCE configuration after power on matches the configuration required, the IF output and
modulation must be switched back on and the IF power level set to its previous setting in order to re-
enable transmission.
3.2 Navigating the Display Screens

3.2.1 Booting
At switch-on the MCE runs through a boot sequence which includes a
series of self-tests. If the self-tests are successfully completed, the
Summary Screen is displayed (this screen is described in detail on
page 3-20).
Summary Screen This gives quick access

to the Setup/Operations
menu
Default Service BER 9.9e-1 Trk
IF Off (-20.0 dBm ) Ops This gives quick access
Mod Off (25.600 MHz) Cfgs to the Configurations
PAL-B/G/H/I Not Locked Help menu
Audio On-Off Menu Press Menu key to
Data RS232/RS422 access the Top Level
Menu
If the tests are not successfully completed the summary screen is still
displayed, followed by the applicable error messages. The display of error
messages may be suppressed using the Display Errors option on the
Setup/System/General Menu – see page 3-42. The error messages may
be removed by pressing the Quit softkey or they time out after a few
seconds.
See Annex C, Error Messages for a list of the possible messages with an
explanation and any relevant remedial action. Unless the errors are of a
serious nature and stop the MCE from working then normal operation may
be resumed after remedial action has been taken.
ST.TM.E10033.3
3.2.2 Moving Through the Menu Screens

General
Each of the menu items on the display has a connection to a softkey (see
Figure 3.1). Press the associated softkey to select the required option and
then use other softkeys or the keypad on the far right of the front panel
(as instructed) to change the options. The last item in the right-hand
corner of each menu is Quit. This causes the display to revert to the
previous menu in the hierarchy.
Note that the screens shown in this manual are only representations -
there might be differences depending on how the equipment has been
previously configured.
Some screens and options vary according to the version of software
installed on the MCE. These variations are noted in the text.
Each softkey at the sides of the display The keypad is used to amend Where a +/- key is associated with a softkey,
is used to access and select the menu the selected option menu. it scrolls through a set of options
item associated with it.
Figure 3.1: Keypad and softkey Functions
Using the Keypad

Each key on the keypad has more than one inscription. For each numbered
key on the keypad, one press of the key makes the number appear on the
display screen, two quick presses makes the first letter appear etc. All
buttons are cyclic, displaying their assigned characters in sequence.
Table 3.1: Keypad Button Assignments
Keypad Button 1 Press 2 Presses 3 Presses 4 Presses

1 1 ( : )
2 2 A B C
3 3 D E F
4 4 G H I
5 5 J K L
6 6 M N 6
7 7 P R S
8 8 T U V
9 9 W X Y
0 0 Space 0 Space
. . O Q Z
+ + / - +
Figure 3.2 gives details of how to access the inscriptions.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Press the key once to

see a 2 on the front
panel display screen.
Press the key four times in
Press the key twice in rapid

2 rapid succession to see a C
on the front panel display
succession to see an A on the ABC screen.
front panel display screen.
Press the key three times in rapid

succession to see a B on the front
panel display screen.
Figure 3.2: How to Access the Inscriptions on the Keypad
Using the Functions Associated with Softkeys

The following display screens show the use of the different functions
associated with the options.
Deletes backwards,
Setup/System/SI Edit one space at a time.
Toggles between upper
Network Name Del and lower case.
Tandberg Television Network Case
Update by using keypad Enter Press for MCE to
(Upper case) Quit accept information.
Press to revert to
previous menu.
Setup/System/General Menu
Press to scroll down
Local Date 16/04/1998 to show more options
Local Time 14:08:38 PgDn in this menu.
UTC Hour Offset 0
Setup Password Off Quit
Press to scroll up to
Change Password show more options in
éPgUp this menu.
Quit
Setup/Operations Edit Answer ‘Yes’ to

question displayed.
IF Frequency Yes
70.000 MHz No
* Answer ‘No’ to
Switch IF Output OFF? Quit
question displayed.
ST.TM.E10033.3
The + and - softkeys have two functions, dependent upon which type of
option they relate to.
Setup/System/General/Edit
Press the + and -
Setup Password + softkeys to alternate
between the On and
Off —
Off function.
Enter
Update using softkeys Quit
Press the + and -
UTC Hour Offset (+ E, - W) + softkeys to increment
1 Hour — and decrement the
offset.
Enter
Update using keypad or softkeys Quit
3.2.3 Menu Hierarchy

The Summary Screen is the point from which all menus are accessed, and
is described on page 3-20.
Due to the number of menus, their hierarchical structure is split across a
number of diagrams. The first level of menus which are accessed from the
Summary Screen are shown in Figure 3.3. The Setup Menus which are
accessed from the Top Level Menu are then detailed in Figure 3.4 to
Figure 3.8. The Status Menus which are also accessed from the Top
Level Menu are detailed in Figure 3.9 to Figure 3.13. Each menu is
described in the text starting on the page indicated.
ST.TM.E10033.3
POWER ON
Page 3-20
Summary
Screen
Ops ...
Cfgs ...
Help ... (Displays on-line help information)
Page 3-31 Page 3-23
Menu ...
Setup/
Config
Operations
Menu
Menu
Load Active Config IF Output

Store Active Config Modulation
Load Cfgs from Backp IF Power
Store Cfgs in Backup FEC Rate
Page 3-34 Factory 525 Dflts Tx Bandwidth
Factory 625 Dflts Symbol Rate
Write Protect Cfgs IF Frequency
Top Level
Menu Quit Quit
Password requested here if

Setup ... Setup Password option
Status ... has been set
Page 3-34
Errors ... (See Page 3-97)
Diagnostics ...
Input Monitor Setup
Menu
Help ... Page 3-103
Quit
System ... See Figure 3.4
Status
Input Monitor Display Menu Video ... See Figure 3.5
(See Page 3-106) Audio ... See Figure 3.6
Data ... See Figure 3.7
System ... See Figure 3.9 Modulator ... See Figure 3.7
Video ... See Figure 3.10 Mux ... See Figure 3.8
Audio ... See Figure 3.11 Quit
Data ... See Figure 3.12
Modulator ... See Figure 3.12
Mux ... See Figure 3.13
Quit
Page 3-104
Diagnostics
Menu
All Modules
Individual Modules ...
Front Panel ...
Quit
Page 3-105 Page 3-104
Diagnostics/ Diagnostics/
Front Panel Modules
Menu Menu
LCD Display Video

Keyboard Audio
Fail Relay Data (2)
Alarm Relay Quit
Alarm LED
Quit
Figure 3.3: Menu Hierarchy – Summary Screen and Top Level Menu
ST.TM.E10033.3
Page 3-34
Setup
Menu
System ...
Page 3-34
Setup/System
Menu
Service Info ...

General ...
Configurations ...
Remote Ctrl...
Reset Encoder
Quit
Page 3-45 Page 3-35
Setup/Serial Setup/System/
Remote Ctrl SI
Menu Menu
Control (menu options depend on Syntax selected)

SAbus Address
Baud Rate = DVB
Port/Protocol
Network Name
Quit
Service Name
System Control
SI Information
Page 3-36 Page 3-42 Syntax
SI Deliv Desc
Setup/System/ Setup/System/
Config General (menu options depend on SI Deliv Desc selected)
Menu Menu
1 1
= Satellite = Cable = Terrestrial
Load Active Config Local Date Sat Deliv Freq Frequency Carrier Freq
Store Active Config Local Time Modulation Type Modulation Bandwidth
Load Cfgs from Backp UTC Hour Offset FEC Rate Inner FEC Rate Modulation Mode
Store Cfgs in Backup IP Address Sat Orb Pos Quit Hierarchy
Factory 525 Dflts Setup Password Sat West/East FEC Rate HP
Factory 625 Dflts Change Password Polarisation FEC Rate LP
Write Protect Cfgs Display Errors Quit Guard Interval
Quit Upgrade Encoder Transmission
(V3.3 and later)
Other Freq
Display Contrast
(V3.3 and later) Quit
Quit
1
= ATSC
Channel Name
Event Name
System Control
SI Information
Syntax
Tsprt Strm Id
Program Number
Major Channel
Minor Channel
Carrier Freq
Modulation Mode
1
Quit These menus are available but not used on the MCE E5500
Figure 3.4: Menu Hierarchy – Setup/System Menu
ST.TM.E10033.3
Page 3-34
Setup
Menu
Video ...
Page 3-48
Setup/Video
Menu
Video Source ...

Video Encoder ...
VBI ...
Quit
Page 3-48
Setup/Video/
Source
Menu
Video Source
(menu options depend on Video Source selected)
= (Any PAL source) = Monochrome = Ident (V3.3 and later)

= (Any NTSC source) = YPrPb = (Any digital source)
= (any test pattern)
Page 3-54
O/P Video Loss Frame Rate Frame Rate
Noise Reduction O/P Video Loss O/P Video Loss
Setup/Video/
Encoder Sync Source Noise Reduction Noise Reduction
Menu Sync Impedance Sync Source Sync Source
Logo Sync Impedance Sync Impedance
1
Text Color Logo Logo
Profile/Level 1 1 1
Background Text Color Text Color
Control Mode 1 1
I/P Termination Background Background
Quit I/P Termination Quit
(menu options depend on Control Mode selected) Quit
= Manual
= Auto
Encoding Mode = Low Delay
Encoding = Very Low Delay
Bit-rate
Horizontal Res Encoding
Page 3-61
Aspect Ratio Bit-rate
Setup/Video/ GOP Structure Horizontal Res
2
VBI GOP Length 3:2 Pulldown
Menu 2 Video PID (V3.3 and later)
3:2 Pulldown
Video PID (V3.3 and later) Quit
3 Quit
VBI in Picture
(menu options depend on video type selected)
525 Line 29.97 Hz 625 Line 25 Hz

VBI Data PID Teletext Encode
Closed Caption VBI Data PID
Serial CC WSS (Line 23)
VBI - Line 10 VPS (Line 16)
VBI - Line 7
VBI - Line 22
VBI - Line 272 VBI - Line 24
VBI - Line 319 1
Only availableif O/P Video Loss option set to + Text.
2
Only availablefor 29.97 Hz inputs.
3
Quit Quit Only displayed if selected Video/Profile level is 422P@ML.
Figure 3.5: Menu Hierarchy – Setup/Video Menu
ST.TM.E10033.3
Page 3-34
Setup
Menu
Audio ...
Page 3-66
Setup/Audio
Menu
Channel 1A ...
Channel 1B ...
Channel 2A ...
Channel 2B ...
Languages ...
Quit
Page 3-66 Page 3-66
Setup/Audio Setup/Audio
(Channel 2A/2B) (Channel 1A/1B)
Menu Menu
(menu options depend on Coding Standard selected)
= Linear PCM = MPEG Layer 2 = Dolby AC3 = Pre-encoded AC3

= Dolby E Source Source Source
Source Audio Bit-rate Audio Bit-rate
show status only

Audio Bit-rate
Coding Mode
These items
Coding Mode Coding Mode Coding Mode
Coding Standard Coding Standard 4
Auto Lip Sync
Coding Standard 4 4
4 Auto Lip Sync Auto Lip Sync Sampling Rate
Auto Lip Sync
1 1
Gain Sampling Rate Bit Stream Mode
Gain 1
1 1
Impedance Gain 2
Impedance 1 Dolby Srnd Mode
Language Impedance Coding Standard
Language
Embedded Src12 Language Language
Embedded Src12
Embedded Src34 Bit Stream Mode External Delay
Embedded Src34 4
4 Audio PID Dialogue Level
Audio PID 2 AES-EBU Output
Quit Dolby Srnd Mode
Quit Audio Prod Info Embedded Src12
3
Mixing Level Embedded Src34
3 4
Room Type Audio PID
Copyright Quit
Original
Page 3-82 Dynamic Range
RF Protection
Setup/Audio/ Deemphasis
Lang DC Filter
Menu
Low Pass Filter
Embedded Src12
Add/Delete Language Embedded Src34
Define User Language 4
Audio PID
Remove User Language Quit
Quit
1
Only displayed for analogue input source.
2
Only displayed if Coding Mode is set to 2/0 (L,R).
3
Only displayed if Audio Prod Info is set to Yes.
4
V3.3 and later.
Figure 3.6: Menu Hierarchy – Setup/Audio Menu
ST.TM.E10033.3
Page 3-34
Setup
Menu
Data ...
Page 3-83
Setup/Data
Menu
RS232 (Async) ...

RS422 (Sync) ...
Quit
Page 3-85 Page 3-83
Setup/Data/ Setup/Data/
RS422 RS232
Menu Menu
Encoding Encoding
Bit-rate Baud Rate
1 1
Data PID Data PID
Quit Quit
Modulator ...
Page 3-86
Setup/Modulator
Menu
Output Format
(menu options depend on Output Format selected)
= IF (204) = Baseband (188)

1
IF Output Power On State
IF Power Quit
IF Frequency
Modulation
Tx Bandwidth
Symbol Rate
FEC Rate
Spectrum Inv
Preset Pwr Low
Preset Pwr Norm
1
Power On State
Sat Del Freq
Sat Orb Pos
Sat West/East
Polarisation 1
Quit V3.3 and later.
Figure 3.7: Menu Hierarchy – Setup/Data Menu and Setup/Modulator Menu
ST.TM.E10033.3
Page 3-34
Setup
Menu
Setup menu, Internal Remux Option module not fitted.
Mux ...
Page 3-100
Setup/Mux
Menu
Output Format
Bit-Rate
1
Scramble
1SNG Key Code
Quit
1
Displayed only when the RAS CA Module is fitted.
Page 3-34
Setup Setup menu with Internal Remux Option module fitted.

Menu
Mux ...
Page 3-102
Setup/Mux
Menu
Host Mux ...

Services ...
Quit
Page 3-105 Page 3-102
Setup/Mux/
Setup/Mux/
Services
Host Menu
Menu
O/P Rate (188) On Air

Spare Bit Rate O/P Rate (188)
Input Bit Rate O/P Rate (204)
Output Bit Rate Host Rate (188)
Default Service (-) Host Rate (204)
Default Service (1) Packet Length
Default Service (1) Scramble1
1
Default Service (1) SNG Key Code
Default Service (1) Quit
Default Service (2)
Default Service (2)
Default Service (2)
Default Service (2)
Default Service (3)
Default Service (3)
Default Service (3)
Default Service (3)
1
Quit Displayed only when the RAS Option is fitted.
Figure 3.8: Menu Hierarchy – Setup/Mux Menu
ST.TM.E10033.3
Status
Menu
System ...
Status/System
Menu
Service Info ...

General ...
Version Info ...
Remote Ctrl...
Quit
Status/Serial Status/System/
Remote Ctrl SI
Menu Menu
Control (menu options depend on Syntax selected)

SAbus Address
Baud Rate = DVB
Port/Protocol
Network Name
Quit Service Name
System Control
SI Information
Syntax
SI Deliv Desc
(menu options depend on SI Deliv Desc selected)
Status/System/ Status/System/
Version General = Satellite = Cable = Terrestrial
Menu Menu
Sat Deliv Freq Frequency Carrier Freq
Modulation Type Modulation Bandwidth
Model Local Date FEC Rate Inner FEC Rate Modulation Mode
H/W Release Local Time Sat Orb Pos Quit Hierarchy
S/W Release UTC Hour Offset Sat West/East
1
FEC Rate HP
Pre-Proc S/W IP Address Polarisation
1
FEC Rate LP
Video Encoder Setup Password Quit Guard Interval
Video Enc S/W Display Errors Transmission
Opt Module 1 Temperature Other Freq
Opt Module 2 Voltage = ATSC
Quit
Opt Module 3 Fans Channel Name
Opt Module 4 Quit
Event Name
Quit
System Control
SI Information
Syntax
Tsprt Strm Id
Program Number
Major Channel
Minor Channel
Carrier Freq
Modulation Mode 1
Only shown if Hierarchy option is NOT set
Quit to non-hierarchical.
Figure 3.9: Menu Hierarchy – Status/System Menu
ST.TM.E10033.3
Status
Menu
Video ...
Status/Video
Menu
Video Source ...

Video Encoder ...
VBI ...
Quit
Status/Video/
Source
Menu
Status/Video/
Encoder
Menu Video Source
(menu options depend on Video Source selected)
Profile/Level
Control Mode = (Any PAL source) = (Any digital source)
= (Any NTSC source) = (any test pattern)
Encoding Mode
= Monochrome
Frame Rate = YPrPb?
Bit-rate Frame Rate
Vertical Resolution Frame Rate Video Locked
Horizontal Res Video Locked O/P Video Loss
Aspect Ratio O/P Video Loss Noise Reduction
GOP Structure Noise Reduction Sync Source
GOP Length Sync Source Sync Impedance
1
3:2 Pulldown Video PID Sync Impedance Timecode
Copyright H/W Release Timecode Pre-Proc H/W
Original S/W Release I/P Termination Pre-Proc S/W
Status/Video/ Quit Pre-Proc H/W Video Input H/W
VBI Pre-Proc S/W Video Input S/W
Menu Video Input H/W Quit
Video Input S/W
Quit
2
VBI in Picture
(menu options depend on video type selected)
525 Line 29.97 Hz 625 Line 25 Hz
VBI Data PID Teletext Encode

3
VBI PID T/text PID
Closed Caption VBI Data PID
Serial CC VBI PID
VBI - Line 10
WSS (Line 23)
VPS (Line 16)
VBI - Line 22
VBI - Line 7
VBI - Line 272
VBI - Line 24
1
Quit Only available for 29.97 MHz.
2
VBI - Line 336 Only displayed if selected Video/Profile level is 422P@ML.
3
Quit Only displayed if Teletext Encode is set to On.
Figure 3.10: Menu Hierarchy – Status/Video Menu
ST.TM.E10033.3
Status
Menu
Audio ...
Status/Audio
Menu
Channel 1A ...
Channel 1B ...
Channel 2A ...
Channel 2B ...
Quit
Status/Audio Status/Audio
(Channel 2A/2B) (Channel 1A/1B )
Menu Menu
(menu options depend on Coding Standard selected)
= Linear PCM = MPEG Layer 2 = Dolby AC3 = Pre-encoded AC3
Source 4
Source Source
Audio Bit-rate 4 Source
Coding Mode Audio Bit-rate 4
Coding Mode Audio Bit-rate
Coding Standard Coding Mode
Coding Standard Coding Standard
1 1 Coding Standard
Gain Gain Sampling Rate
1 1 Impedance Sampling Rate
Impedance 1 Language
Gain
Language Language 1 Bit Stream Mode
Impedance
Embedded Src12 Embedded Src12 External Delay
Language
Embedded Src34 Embedded Src34 AES-EBU Output
Bit Stream Mode
Input Level L Input Level L
Dialogue Level Embedded Src12
Input Level R Input Level R 2
Audio PID Dolby Srnd Mode Embedded Src34
Audio PID
Audio Prod Info Audio PID
H/W Release H/W Release 3
Mixing Level H/W Release
S/W Release S/W Release 3
Room Type
Quit S/W Release
Quit Copyright Quit
Original
Dynamic Range
RF Protection
Deemphasis
DC Filter
Low Pass Filter
Embedded Src12
Embedded Src34
Input Level L
Input Level R
1 Audio PID
Only displayed for analogue input source.
2 H/W Release
Only displayed if Coding Mode is set to 2/0 (L,R).
3 S/W Release
Only displayed if Audio Prod Info is set to Yes.
4
Not displayed if Source is set to Off, Mute or Test Tone. Quit
Figure 3.11: Menu Hierarchy – Status/Audio Menu
ST.TM.E10033.3
Status
Menu
Data ...
Status/Data
Menu
RS232 (Async) ...

RS422 (Sync) ...
Quit
Status/Data/ Status/Data/
RS422 RS232
Menu Menu
Encoding Encoding
Bit-rate Baud Rate
H/W Release H/W Release
S/W Release S/W Release
Quit Quit
Modulator ...
Status/Modulator
Menu
Output Format
(menu options depend on Output Format selected)
= IF (204) = Baseband (188)

IF Output IF Frequency
IF Power H/W Release
IF Frequency S/W Release
Modulation Quit
Modulation Type
Tx Bandwidth
Symbol Rate
FEC Rate
Data Rate (188)
Data Rate (204)
Spectrum Inv
RS Coding
Sat Del Freq
Sat Orb Pos
Sat West/East
Polarisation
H/W Release
S/W Release
Quit
Figure 3.12: Menu Hierarchy – Status/Data Menu and Status/Modulator Menu
ST.TM.E10033.3
Status
Menu Status menu with Remux Option module NOT fitted.
Mux ...
Status/Mux
Menu
Output Format
On Air
Bit-Rate (188)
Bit-Rate (204)
Scramble
Packet Length
PCR PID
Clock
Mux F/W
1
ASI O/P H/W
1 1
ASI O/P F/W Options displayed depend
Quit on module fitted (RAS or ASI).
Status
Menu Status menu WITH Remux Option module fitted.
Mux ...
Status/Mux
Menu
Mux ...
Services ...
Quit
Status/Mux/ Status/Mux/
Services Menu Host Menu
O/P Rate (188) Output Mode

Spare Bit Rate On Air
Input Bit Rate O/P Rate (188)
Output Bit Rate O/P Rate (204)
Default Service (-) Host Rate (188)
Default Service (1) Host Rate (204)
Default Service (1) Packet Length
Default Service (1) Scramble
Default Service (1) SNG Key Code
Default Service (2) PCR PID
Default Service (2) Clock
Default Service (2) Mux F/W
2
Default Service (2) ASI O/P H/W
2
Default Service (3) ASI O/P F/W
Default Service (3) Quit
Default Service (3)
Default Service (3)
Remux S/W
2
Remux F/W Options displayed depend
Quit on module fitted (RAS or ASI).
Figure 3.13: Menu Hierarchy – Status/Mux Menu
ST.TM.E10033.3
3.3 Summary Screen

The Summary Screen is the normal screen displayed when the MCE is
operational. If the MCE controls are not touched for 10 minutes or so the
summary screen is replaced by a ‘screen saver’ screen showing only the
service name in large letters, but the summary screen is redisplayed as
soon as a key is pressed or an error occurs.
The summary screen displays the basic operating parameters and enables
access to the main menus.
Displays the
Summary Screen Setup/Operations menu
Default Service BER 9.9e-1 Trk Displays the

IF Off (-20.0 dBm ) Ops Configurations menu
Mod Off (25.600 MHz) Cfgs
Displays the help menu
PAL-B/G/H/I Not Locked Help
Audio On-Off Menu
Displays the Top Level
Data RS232/RS422 Menu
The operating parameters displayed are as follows:
Service/Channel/ Summary Screen Receiver bit error ratio (BER) and operating mode
Event name
Default Service BER 1.0e-7 Trk IF output power level (shown in brackets if IF
Status of IF output output is off)
IF On 0.0 dBm
Status of modulation Mod On 25.600 MHz Tx bandwidth (shown in brackets if modulation is off)
PAL-B/G/H/I Not Locked
Video input standard Video input status or video bit-rate
Audio On-Off
(title only)
Data RS232/RS422 On Status of audio channels A and B
Data channels enabled
The main menus are accessed by pressing the softkeys on the right-hand
side of the display. The menus that can be accessed are as follows:
• The Ops softkey displays the Setup/Operations Menu. This menu
enables rapid changes to key operating parameters such as the state
of the IF output, IF power level and symbol rate. This menu is
described in detail starting on page 3-23
• The Cfgs softkey displays the Config Menu. This menu provides
options for loading and storing predefined configurations and updating
and restoring backup configurations. This menu is described in detail
starting on page 3-30.
• The Help softkey displays the Help Menu. This menu provides on-line
help information, which is divided into General, Setup, Status, Errors
and Diagnostics topics which are accessed using the related softkey
• The Menu softkey displays the Top Level Menu. This menu provides
options for configuring all the MCE operating parameters, and for
testing the MCE. This menu is described in detail starting on
page 3-34
ST.TM.E10033.3
3.4 Quick Configuration

There are sixteen predefined user configurations. These are a quick and
easy way to configure the MCE without having to enter individual
parameters. From the summary screen press the Cfgs softkey. Then select
the Load Config option (see Load Active Config Option on page
3-31). A list of 16 configurations are shown (refer to Annex D for details of
individual configurations). Select the required one by pressing the
associated softkey. Nothing more need be done. The MCE is now
configured. To go ‘on air’ enable modulation, turn IF on and turn up the
output power in the Setup/Operations Menu.
Summary Screen
Default Service BER 9.9e-1 Trk Press the Cfgs

IF Off (-20.0 dBm ) Ops
softkey for quick
access to the
Mod Off (25.600 MHz) Cfgs
Configurations menu
PAL-B/G/H/I Not Locked Help
Audio On-Off Menu
Data RS232/RS422
3.5 Getting Started

3.5.1 Introduction
This ‘getting started’ section provides advice for new users on configuring
the MCE after power on. Power on (and power off) instructions are
provided in Chapter 2, Installing the Equipment.
3.5.2 Choosing Parameters

Refer to Section 3.2, Navigating the Display Screens for information on
how to use the front panel softkeys and keypad in order to move through
the menu and option screens.
Step 1: Check configuration
Check the Status Menu screens to confirm whether the currently set
parameters for each functional area (System, Video, Audio, Data,
Modulator and Mux) meet with requirements. If they do, then the
equipment is ready for operation. The equipment begins generating a valid
transport stream.
If parameters need to be changed, proceed to the next step.
Step 2: Change configuration
If the required parameters are saved as a configuration file, then load the
relevant file.
If the required parameters are not saved as a configuration file:
Set all audio parameters. Enable audio channels, set the coding mode
and standard, bit-rate and all other parameters as required.
Set all data parameters. Enable the data channels and set the
baud-rate/bit-rate as required.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Set the required multiplex rate.

Check video bit-rate and resolution. These parameters have been set
automatically according to the selections made above. Check that the
values set are correct for the required application. If not, manual
adjustments can be made to reduce the audio and data requirements,
freeing up more bandwidth to allow higher resolution video to be
processed.
3.5.3 Automatic Data Rate Selection

The MCE is normally allowed to automatically select the video bit-rate and
resolution. The starting point is usually to enter the bandwidth that has
been allocated for use on the satellite transponder. Normally, the output
symbol rate and the video bit-rate are calculated automatically based on
the entry of bandwidth and FEC rate parameters. In this way, the MCE is
optimised and system capacity is not exceeded. This automated process
takes into account the data rates which have been manually allocated to
audio and data services. From the permissible bit-rate, the pixel resolution
is selected automatically to maximise the quality of the video channel.
Enter
Automatically
Tx Bandwidth (or
calculates
Symbol Rate) Automatically selects
FEC Rate Symbol Rate (or
Pixel Resolution
Audio Services Tx Bandwidth)
Data Services Video Bit-rate
Figure 3.14: Data Rate Automatic Selection
3.5.4 Manual Data Rate Selection

Automatic selections may, if required, be overridden to suit particular
requirements. The block diagram below illustrates the general principles
and functions which are used in order to calculate the useful data rate
which may then be allocated to the video, audio and data services.
1 Video
1.5 – 45 Mbit/s
Multiplexer Modulator
Up to 4 Audio
32 – 640 kbit/s
Convolutional Modulation Pulse Shaping
RS-422 Data (Sync) RS FEC QPSK Filter
56 – 2048 kbit/s Encoding Rates of 1/2, 2/3, Scaling factor of IF Output
3/4, 5/6, 7/8 Each symbol Scale factor of 1 approx. 1.28
RS-232 Data (Async) Coding expands (QPSK) may be represents
1200 – 38400 Baud every 188 bytes used 2 bits (QPSK)
to 204
CA/PSI & Overhead
approx. 400 kbit/s
(not selectable)
Figure 3.15: Data Rate Manual Selection
The ratio used for transponder bandwidth over symbol rate is

approximately 1.28.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Given the above information, the Tx bandwidth, FEC rate, symbol rate and
bit-rate are related according to the following equations:
Given bandwidth and FEC rate:
Bandwidth
Symbol Rate =
1.28
Packet Length (204 bytes)

Bit - rate = Symbol Rate × m × × FEC Rate
204
where: m = 2 for QPSK
Given symbol rate and FEC:

Bandwidth = Symbol Rate × 1.28

Bit - rate = Symbol Rate × m × × FEC Rate
204
Given maximum bit-rate:

Bandwidth = Symbol Rate × 1.28
1
Symbol Rate = (bit − rate) ×
m× × FEC Rate
204
3.6 Setup/Operations Menu Options

3.6.1 Selection
The Setup/Operations Menu is selected from the Summary Screen (see
page 3-20) by pressing the Ops softkey.
This menu enables rapid changes to key operating parameters.
The options available are shown in the following screens, and described in
the following paragraphs. The Mon and Load softkeys provide shortcuts to
the Input Monitor display screen (see page 3-111) and the
Setup/System/Config/Load screen (see page 3-31).
Setup/Operations Menu
IF Output On Mon
Modulation On PgDn
IF Power Normal (0.0 dBm) Load
FEC Rate 3/4 (Fixed) Quit
ST.TM.E10033.3
Setup/Operations Menu
Tx Bandwidth 25.6000 MHz éPgUp

Symbol Rate 20.0000 Msym/s *
IF Frequency 70.0000 MHz Load
* Quit
3.6.2 IF Output Option

Pressing the IF Output softkey toggles the IF output between the on and
off states.
Table 3.2: IF Output Settings
Available Settings Description and Notes

On IF output switched on.
Off IF output switched off. When the IF output is switched off, modulation is
automatically set to off and the IF power level is set to the ‘low’ setting (or
the ‘normal’ setting, if the low and normal settings are set to the same level).
The original settings are not restored when the IF output is switched back
on.
3.6.3 Modulation Option

Pressing the Modulation softkey toggles modulation of the IF carrier
between the on and off states.
Table 3.3: Modulation Settings

On Modulation switched on.
Off Modulation switched off. Modulation is automatically set to off if the IF output
is switched off, but it is not automatically switched back on when the IF
output is switched back on.
3.6.4 IF Power Option

Pressing the IF Power softkey toggles the IF power option between the
normal, low and user settings, depending on the conditions detailed below.
The power levels (dBm) that relate to the normal and low settings are
defined on the Setup/Modulator Menu (see page 3-87). The user setting
is only available if the IF Power option on the Setup/Modulator Menu is
set to a level different to the low and normal settings.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Table 3.4: IF Power Settings

Normal Normal IF power level. If the low and user settings are the same as the
normal setting, then only the normal setting is available.
Low Low IF power level. This setting is not available if it is equal to the normal
setting.
The IF power is automatically set to the low setting (or the normal setting, if
the low and normal settings are set to the same level) if the IF output is
switched off, but it is not automatically set back to its previous setting when
the IF output is switched back on.
User User-defined IF power level. This setting is only available if the IF Power
option is set to a level different to the normal or low settings.
3.6.5 FEC Rate Option

Considerations
Changing the modulator convolutional FEC rate affects the automatic
symbol rate, video bit-rate and video resolution calculations as shown by
the equations on page 3-23. The available settings are: 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6,
7/8 and 8/9.
Pressing the FEC Rate softkey cycles the FEC rate through the available
settings.
The FEC rate is locked (fixed) when both the IF Output and Modulation
options are set to On. One (or both) of these options must be set to Off in
order to change the FEC rate.
Modulation and IF Output Switched On

The screen shown below is displayed. In order to change the FEC rate,
modulation must first be switched off. Press the Yes softkey to do this
automatically (and proceed to the next screen), or press the No (or Quit)
softkey to return to the menu.
Setup/Operations Edit
FEC Rate Yes

3/4 No
Enter
Switch Modulation OFF? Quit
When modulation is switched off, the screen shown below is displayed. Use
the + and – softkeys to cycle through the available settings, or enter a
new value using the keypad. Press the Enter softkey to accept the new
value.
FEC Rate +
5/6 -
Enter
ST.TM.E10033.3
The following screen is displayed. Press the Yes softkey to switch

modulation back on and return to the menu, or press the No softkey to
return to the menu and leave modulation switched off.
Yes
No
*
Switch Modulation Back ON? Quit
Modulation and/or IF Output Switched Off

If modulation and/or the IF output are switched off, pressing the FEC Rate
softkey cycles the FEC rate through the available settings.
3.6.6 Tx Bandwidth Option

The screen shown below is displayed. In order to change the Tx
bandwidth, modulation must first be switched off. Press the Yes softkey to
do this automatically (and proceed to the next screen), or press the No (or
Quit) softkey to return to the menu.
Tx Bandwidth Yes
25.6000 MHz No
*
the + and – softkeys to increment or decrement the bandwidth, or enter a
value.
Table 3.5: Input Range – Transmission Bandwidth
Valid Input Range Description and Notes

The absolute range of the unit is Tx bandwidth.
described in symbols and Changing the Tx bandwidth affects the automatic symbol rate, video bit-
detailed in Table 3.6 and Figure rate and video resolution calculations as shown by the equations on
3.16 that follow. page 3-23.
Tx Bandwidth +
25.6000 MHz -
Enter
ST.TM.E10033.3

Tx Bandwidth Yes
25.7000 MHz No
*
If the specified bandwidth is outside the valid input range, a confirmation

screen similar to the following is displayed which shows the maximum/
minimum value allowed. Press the Enter softkey to accept the new value
shown, or press the Quit softkey to leave the original bandwidth
unchanged (modulation remains switched off).
Confirmation Screen
Tx Bandwidth
Specified Value Too High
Select <Enter> to Set to Enter
Maximum : 38.4000 MHz Quit

If modulation and/or the IF output are switched off, the option is used in
the same way as described above, except that the screens to switch
modulation off and then back on are not displayed.
3.6.7 Symbol Rate Option

The screen shown below is displayed. In order to change the symbol rate,
Symbol Rate Yes

20.0000 Msym/s No
*
the + and – softkeys to increment or decrement the symbol rate, or enter
a new value using the keypad. Press the Enter softkey to accept the new
value.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Table 3.6: Input Range – Symbol Rate

Min: 1.0000 Msym/s Symbol rate.
Max: 30.0000 Msym/s Changing the symbol rate affects the automatic Tx bandwidth, video bit-rate
Step Size: 0.0001 Msym/s and video resolution calculations as shown by the equations on page 3-23.
The relationship between maximum symbol rate and IF frequency is shown in
Figure 3.16. The graph shows that for a 50 - 60 MHz bandwidth, the symbol
rate increases linearly from 20 Msym/s up to a maximum of 30 Msym/s. It
then stays constant at 30 Msym/s from 60 MHz through to 80 MHz. Between
80-90 MHz bandwidth the symbol rate decreases from 30 Msym/s back to 20
Msym/s.
30 Msym/s
20 Msym/s
50 60 70 80 90
(MHz) (MHz) (MHz) (MHz) (MHz)
Figure 3.16: Maximum Symbol Rate vs IF Frequency Graph
Symbol Rate +
20.0000 Msym/s -
Enter

Symbol Rate Yes

20.1000 Msym/s No
*
If the specified symbol rate is outside the valid input range, a confirmation
screen similar to the following is displayed which shows the maximum/
minimum value allowed. Press the Enter softkey to accept the new value
shown, or press the Quit softkey to leave the original symbol rate
unchanged (modulation remains switched off).
ST.TM.E10033.3
Confirmation Screen
Symbol Rate
Maximum : 30.0000 Msym/s Quit

If modulation and/or the IF output are switched off, the option is used in
the same way as described above, except that the screens to switch
3.6.8 IF Frequency Option

IF Output Switched On
The screen shown below is displayed. In order to change the IF frequency,
the IF output must first be switched off. Press the Yes softkey to do this
IF Frequency Yes
70.0000 MHz No
*
Switch IF Output OFF? Quit
When the IF output is switched off, the screen shown below is displayed.
Use the + and – softkeys to increment or decrement the IF frequency, or
enter a new value using the keypad. Press the Enter softkey to accept the
new value.
Table 3.7: Input Range – IF Frequency

Min: 50.0000 MHz IF frequency.
Max: 90.0000 MHz The IF frequency is shown to 3 decimal
Step Size: 0.125 MHz places.
IF Frequency +
70.0000 MHz -
Enter
ST.TM.E10033.3
The following screen is displayed. Press the Yes softkey to switch the IF
output back on (the IF power will be set to ‘low’, or ‘normal’ if the low and
normal settings are set to the same level) and return to the menu, or
press the No softkey to return to the menu and leave the IF output
switched off (modulation will also be switched off and the IF power set to
the ‘low’ (or ‘normal’) setting).
IF Frequency Yes
70.0050 MHz No
*
Switch IF Output Back ON? Quit
If the specified IF frequency is outside the valid input range, a

confirmation screen similar to the following is displayed which shows the
maximum/ minimum value allowed. Press the Enter softkey to accept the
new value shown, or press the Quit softkey to leave the original IF
frequency unchanged.
Confirmation Screen
IF Frequency
IF Output Switched Off

If the IF output is switched off, the option is used in the same way as
described above, except that the screens to switch the IF output off and
then back on are not displayed.
3.7 Config Menu

3.7.1 Menu Options
Description
The MCE holds (DVB) user configurations which provide a quick and easy
way to configure all the MCE operating parameters for common set-ups
without having to enter the parameters individually. There are 16
predefined user configurations and also 525/625 factory default set-ups.
The 16 predefined user configurations can be edited and overwritten, but
not the 525/625 factory default set-ups. The 16 user configurations can be
protected against overwriting on an individual basis.
The user configurations can be copied to a password-protected backup
(the password is set using the Change Password option in the
Setup/System/General Menu, see page 3-42). On the MCE the default
password is normally 123456789.
ST.TM.E10033.3
If the user configurations are then inadvertently modified, the protected

backup configurations can be restored to return all the user configurations
to a known state. The user configurations can also be returned to the 525
line or 625 line factory default settings.
Current Configurations
Storage is
password Load Restore defaults
protected (load into Flash)
Backup Configurations Editable Configurations Original Configurations
16 Predefined and/or Useable / 525/625 Factory

Customer Specific Editable Configurations Default Configurations
Configurations (16 Predefined and 16 Predefined
Configurations) Configurations
Figure 3.17: Configuration Loading and Storage
Selection
The Config Menu is selected from the Summary Screen (see page3-20) by
pressing the Cfgs softkey. (Configurations Menu can also be selected
from the Setup/System Menu by pressing the Configurations softkey).
This menu provides options for loading and storing predefined
configurations and updating and restoring backup configurations.
Config Menu
Load A c t i v e Config Factory 525 Defaults

Store A c t i v e Config Factory 625 Defaults
L o a d C f g s f r o m Backup Write Protect Cfgs
Store C f g s i n Backup Quit
Load Active Config Option

To access the Load Active Config option, press the Load Active Config
softkey in the Config Menu. Use the softkeys to select the required
configuration to be loaded. See Annex D for details of predefined
configurations.
Setup/System/Config/Load
Select Config to Load Scrolls down to show

1: Auto 2 Mbit/s * default configurations
2: Auto 4 Mbit/s PgDn 1 to 16.
3: Auto 6 Mbit/s
4: Auto 8 Mbit/s Quit
Store Active Config Option

To access the Store Active Config option, press the Store Active Config
softkey in the Config Menu. Use the softkeys to select the position where
the configuration is to be stored.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Setup/System/Config/Store
Over-write which Config? Scrolls down to show

1: Auto 2 Mbit/s *
default configurations
2: Auto 4 Mbit/s PgDn 1 to 16.
3: Auto 6 Mbit/s
4: Auto 8 Mbit/s Quit
Load Cfgs From Backup Option

This option enables the 16 user configurations to be overwritten with the
protected backup configurations. To update a backup configuration, press
the Load Cfgs From Backup softkey in the Config Menu and enter the
password to allow access. (On the MCE the default password is normally
123456789)
Press the Yes softkey to restore the backup configurations, or the No
softkey to return to the menu and keep the current configurations.
NOTE…
The current MCE configuration remains unchanged.
Setup/System/Config/RstrBack
This will erase all current Yes

configs. No
Are you sure? Quit
Store Cfgs in Backup Option

This enables the 16 user configurations to be stored in the backup, and is
password protected. Press the Store Cfgs in Backup softkey in the
Config Menu, enter the password and then press the Enter softkey.
Setup/System/Config/UpdDefs
Enter password using keypad Del

Case
Enter
(Upper case) Quit
As the configurations are being saved to the backup (this takes only a
second or two), the following screen is displayed.
Setup/System/Config/UpdDefs
Storing Configs in Backup
Please wait .....
ST.TM.E10033.3
Factory 525 Dflts Option

This screen enables the 16 user configurations to be overwritten with the
factory default settings for 525 line/29.97 Hz video operation. Press the
Factory 525 Dflts softkey in the Config Menu to display the
Setup/System/Config/RstrBack screen. The factory default settings are
not listed in this manual as they may change from customer to customer.
To find out the factory defaults for a particular MCE, contact Customer
Services – see Preliminary Pages.
Press the Yes softkey to restore the factory default settings, or the No
softkey to return to the menu and keep the current configurations.
NOTE…
The current MCE configuration remains unchanged.
Setup/System/Config/RstrBack
This will erase all current Yes

configs. No
Are you sure? Quit
Factory 625 Dflts Option

The Factory 625 Dflts option is very similar to the Factory 525 Dflts
option, except that it overwrites the 16 user configurations with the
factory default settings for 625 line/25 Hz video operation. See the
Factory 525 Dflts option for further details.
Write Protect Cfgs Option

This screen enables the user configurations to be ‘write protected’ and not
overwritten unless the correct password is entered. Press the Write
Protect Cfgs softkey in the Config Menu to display the
Setup/System/Config/Write Protect Cfgs screen.
Enter the password and then press the Enter softkey.
Setup/System/Config/Write Protect
Enter password using keypad Del

Case
Enter
(Upper case) Quit
ST.TM.E10033.3
3.8 Top Level Menu

The Top Level Menu provides options for configuring and testing the MCE.
Press the Menu softkey in the Summary Screen to access the Top Level
Menu. The menu options available are shown in the following screen and all
menus generally conform to the format shown below.
Top Level Menu
Setup Input Monitor

Status *
Errors Help
Diagnostics Quit
This menu provides access to further sub-menus which are used to set up
the MCE operating parameters, view the operating parameters, display
error information, perform diagnostics on the MCE, and view the input
monitor display.
Press the softkey relating to the sub-menu required. Each sub-menu is
described in detail in the following paragraphs.
3.9 Setup Menu

3.9.1 Menu Options
The Setup Menu is selected from the Top Level Menu by pressing the
Setup softkey. A password may be asked for if the password option has
been set.
This menu provides options for selecting configuration and operating
features.
Setup Menu
SystemModulator
Video Mux
Audio *
Data Quit
3.9.2 System Menu

Menu Options
The System Menu is selected from the Setup Menu by pressing the System
softkey.
This menu permits the selection of system information and predefined
configurations. Press the softkey relating to the sub-menu required.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Setup/System Menu
Service Info Reset Encoder

General *
Configurations *
Remote Ctrl Quit
Service Info Menu
Selection
The Service Info Menu is selected from the System Menu by pressing the
Service Info softkey.
This menu provides options for configuring the Service Information (SI)
parameters transmitted in the output transport stream and an option for
switching inclusion of the SI in the transport stream on or off. The screens
vary according to the SI delivery descriptor selected.
NOTE…
If the SI delivery descriptor is set to Cable or Terrestrial, the menus for these options are available but
not used on the MCE E5500.
Menus Shown When Syntax = DVB

The following menus are shown if the syntax option in the SI Menu has
been set to DVB.
NOTE…
On the E5500 MCE, DVB should normally be selected at the Syntax option. ATSC menus are
available, however, although not used.
Setup/System/SI Menu
Network Name Tandberg Television Network *

Service Name 1080i29 @ 15 MB PgDn
System Control SCPC *
SI Information On Quit
SI Delivery Descriptor = Satellite
Syntax DVB éPgUp

SI Deliv Desc Satellite PgDn
Sat Deliv Freq 0.0000 GHz *
Modulation Type QPSK Quit
ST.TM.E10033.3
FEC Rate 5/6 éPgUp

Sat Orb Pos 1.5° PgDn
Sat West/East West *
Polarisation Linear Horizontal Quit
Network Name Option

To access the Network Name option, press the Network Name softkey in
the Service Info Menu. This option allows the network name to be
changed.
Deletes backwards,
Setup/System/SI Edit one space at a time.
Toggles between
Network Name Del upper and lower
Tandberg Television Network Case case.
Update by using keypad Enter Press for Encoder to
(Upper case) Quit accept new name.
Press to revert to
previous menu.
Service Name Option
To access the Service Name option press the Service Name softkey in the
Service Info Menu. This option allows the service name to be changed.
Setup/System/SI Edit
Service Name Del

Default Service Case
Update by using keypad Enter
(Upper case) Quit
System Control Option
To access the System Control option press the System Control softkey in
the Service Info Menu. This option enables the type of system control
specified in the Service Information (SI) to be set.
System Control +
SCPC —
Update by using softkeys Enter
Quit
NOTE…
The SCPC option MUST be selected for the MCE.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Table 3.8: System Control Options
Selected Option Description

SCPC Single Channel Per Carrier.
MCPC Multiple Channels Per Carrier.
SI Information Option
To access the SI Information option, press the SI Information softkey in
the Service Info Menu. This enables the inclusion of Program System
Information Protocol (PSIP) in the output transport stream to be switched
on or off. Use the + and – softkeys to alternate between On and Off and
then press the Enter softkey after selecting one of them.
Setup Information +
On —
Enter
Syntax Option
To access the Syntax option, press the Syntax softkey in the Service
Info Menu. This enables the syntax to be specified. Use the + and –
softkeys to scroll through the options and then press the Enter softkey
after selecting one of them.
Syntax +
DVB —
Enter
NOTE…
On the E5500 MCE, DVB should normally be selected at the Syntax option. ATSC menus are
available, however, although not used.
Table 3.9: Syntax Options

ATSC Advanced Television Standards Committee.
DVB Digital Video Broadcasting.
SI Deliv Desc Option

To access the SI Deliv Desc option, press the SI Deliv Desc softkey in the
Service Info Menu. This enables the SI delivery descriptor to be
specified.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Use the + and – softkeys to scroll through the various options and then
press the Enter softkey after selecting one of them.
NOTE…
On the MCE E5500, the SI Delivery Descriptor will default to Satellite.
SI Delivery Descriptor +
Satellite —
Enter
Table 3.10: SI Deliv Desc Options

Satellite SI delivery descriptor set to ‘Satellite’. The type of delivery descriptor
selected affects the remaining
Terrestrial SI delivery descriptor set to ‘Terrestrial’.
options shown on the SI Menu.
None (non-DVB) This setting is only available if the
Output Format option on the Setup/
Modulator Menu is set to
Baseband (188).
Cable SI delivery descriptor set to ‘Cable’.
Satellite - Sat Deliv Freq Option

To access the Sat Deliv Freq option, press the Sat Deliv Freq softkey in
the Service Info Menu. This enables the receive frequency of the
satellite transponder to be specified. This is included in the Service
Information/Network Information Table (SI/NIT) if the Modulator output
format is set to baseband (see the Output Format option on the
Setup/Modulator Menu).
If the Modulator output format is set to IF, then this option setting is
ignored and the satellite delivery frequency included in the NIT is that
specified by the Sat Del Freq option on the Setup/Modulator Menu.
Satellite Delivery Frequency +

3525.1635 GHz —
Enter
Table 3.11: Satellite Delivery Frequency Options

Min: 0.0000 GHz Receive frequency of satellite transponder.
Max: 999.9999 GHz
Step Size: 0.0001 GHz
ST.TM.E10033.3
Satellite – Modulation Type Option

To access the Modulation Type option, press the Modulation Type softkey
in the Service Info Menu. This enables the type of modulation used by
the satellite transponder to be specified. This is included in the SI/NIT if
the Modulator output format is set to baseband (see the Output Format
option on the Setup/Modulator Menu).
ignored and the modulation type included in the NIT is that specified by
the Modulation option on the Setup/Modulator Menu.
Use the + and –softkeys to scroll through the various options and then
Modulation Type +
QPSK —
Enter
Table 3.12: Modulation Type Options

BPSK Satellite transponder uses BPSK modulation. (Available but not used on E5500)
QPSK Satellite transponder uses QPSK modulation. (Default setting)
8PSK Satellite transponder uses 8PSK modulation. (Available but not used on E5500)
16QAM Satellite transponder uses 16QAM modulation. (Available but not used on E5500)
Satellite – FEC Rate Option

To access the FEC Rate option, press the FEC Rate softkey in the Service
Info Menu. This enables the FEC rate used by the satellite transponder to
be specified. This is included in the SI/NIT if the Modulator output format
is set to baseband (see the Output Format option on the
ignored and the FEC rate included in the NIT is that specified by the FEC
Rate option on the Setup/Modulator Menu.
FEC Rate +
5/6 —
Enter
ST.TM.E10033.3
Table 3.13: FEC Rate Options

None Satellite transponder does not use FEC rate.
1/1 Satellite transponder uses FEC rate of 1/1.
Satellite – Sat Orb Pos Option

To access the Sat Orb Pos option, press the Sat Orb Pos softkey in the
Service Info Menu. This enables the orbital position of the satellite to be
specified. This is included in the SI/NIT if the Modulator output format is
set to baseband (see the Output Format option on the Setup/Modulator
Menu).
ignored and the satellite orbital position included in the NIT is that
specified by the Sat Orb Pos option on the Setup/Modulator Menu.
Use the keypad or the + and – softkeys to increment or decrement the
satellite orbital position, and then press the Enter softkey to accept the
new value.
Satellite Orbital Position +

0.0° —
Enter
Table 3.14: Satellite Orbital Position Options

Min: 0.0° Orbital position of satellite.
Max: 360.0°
Step Size: 0.1°
Satellite – Sat West/East Option

To access the Sat West/East option, press the Sat West/East softkey in
the Service Info Menu. This enables the satellite west/east flag to be
specified to indicate whether the satellite position is in the western or
eastern part of the orbit. This is included in the SI/NIT if the Modulator
output format is set to baseband (see the Output Format option on the
ignored and the sat west/east flag included in the NIT is that specified by
the Sat West/East option on the Setup/Modulator Menu.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Satellite West/East Flag +

West —
Enter
Table 3.15: Satellite West/East Options

West Satellite position is in western part of the orbit.
East Satellite position is in the eastern part of the orbit.
Satellite – Polarisation Option

To access the Polarisation option, press the Polarisation softkey in the
Service Info Menu. This enables the polarisation of the satellite
transponder to be specified. This is included in the SI/NIT if the Modulator
output format is set to baseband (see the Output Format option on the
ignored and the polarisation setting included in the NIT is that specified by
the Polarisation option on the Setup/Modulator Menu.
Polarisation +
Linear Horizontal —
Enter
Table 3.16: Polarisation Options

Linear Horizontal Satellite transponder uses linear horizontal
polarisation.
Linear Vertical Satellite transponder uses linear vertical polarisation.
Circular Left Satellite transponder uses circular left polarisation.
Circular Right Satellite transponder uses circular right polarisation.
ST.TM.E10033.3
General Menu
Selection
The General Menu is selected from the System Menu by pressing the
General softkey.
This menu provides options for amending the time, date and password.
Press this softkey to
Local Date 16/04/1998 * show more options in
Local Time 14:08:38 PgDn this menu.
UTC Hour Offset 0 Hours *
IP Address 172.16.248.91 Quit
Press this softkey to
revert to previous
Setup Password Off éPgUp
display screen.
Change Password PgDn
Display Errors Off *
Upgrade Encoder Quit
Disp. Contrast Medium éPgUp

*
*
Quit
Local Date Option

To access the Local Date option, press the Local Date softkey in the
General Menu. Edit the date by use of the keypad and then press the
Enter softkey.
Current Date Del

27/9/1999
Enter
Update using keypad Quit
Local Time Option

To access the Local Time option, press the Local Time softkey in the
General Menu. Edit the time by use of the keypad and then press the
Enter softkey.
Current Time Del

14:08:38
Enter
ST.TM.E10033.3
UTC Hour Offset Option

The Universal Time Co-ordinate (UTC) is effectively the same as Greenwich
Mean Time (GMT). When including SI in the output transport stream the
MCE is required to output a Time and Date Table (TDT). This uses UTC.
Therefore, as the local time is input on the front panel a UTC offset is
needed so that the UTC time for the TDT table is generated.
To access the UTC Hour Offset option, press the UTC Hour Offset softkey
in the General Menu. Edit the offset by use of the softkeys or the keypad
and then press the Enter softkey.
Press the + and -
UTC Hour Offset (+ E, - W) + softkeys to increment
and decrement the
0 —
offset.
Enter
Table 3.17: UTC Hour Offset Options

Min: –12 Hours UTC hour offset. A positive value indicates East of
Max: 12 Hours Greenwich, and a negative value indicates West of
Step Size: 1 Hour Greenwich.
If the specified UTC offset is outside the valid input range, a confirmation
screen is displayed which shows the maximum/minimum value allowed.
Press the Enter softkey to accept the new value shown, or press the Quit
softkey to leave the original UTC offset unchanged.
Confirmation Screen
UTC Hour Offset (+ E, - W)

Maximum : 12 Hour Quit
IP Address Option
To access the IP Address option, press the IP Address softkey in the
General Menu. Edit the IP address by use of the keypad and then press
the Enter softkey.
IP Address Del
172.16.248.91 Case
Update using keypad Enter
(Upper case) Quit
ST.TM.E10033.3
Setup Password Option

There is no password originally required to enter the Setup Menu so if one
is needed then it must be set. To access the Setup Password option, press
the Setup Password softkey in the General Menu. (On the MCE the
default password is normally 123456789) The password can be either on
or off. Change the password by use of the softkeys and then press the
Enter softkey.
Press the + and -
softkeys to alternate
Setup Password +
between the On and
Off — Off function.
Enter
Change Password Option

To access the Change Password option, press the Change Password
softkey in the General Menu. Edit the password by use of the keypad and
then press the Enter softkey.
Change Password Del

Off Case
Enter
(Upper case)
Display Errors Option

To access the Display Errors option, press the Display Errors softkey in
the General Menu. Edit the password by use of the keypad and then press
the Enter softkey.
Display Errors Del

Off Case
Enter
Table 3.18: Display Errors Options

On Any relevant error messages are displayed when booting
or if they occur during normal operation.
Off Any relevant error messages are not displayed when
booting.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Upgrade Option (V3.3 on)

There are two options in v3.3 that are not enabled by default, they are:
• A purchasable upgrade allowing 4:2:2 video encoding
• An upgrade allowing Dolby Digital (AC-3) audio encoding
To enable these features, go to setup>system>general>upgrade Encoder.
This presents you with a 4 digit number.
Contact TANDBERG Customer Services with this number who will then
arrange for a 12 digit key to be returned. This is entered via the front
panel to enable the required feature.
Display Contrast Option (V3.3 on)

This option allows the contrast ratio of the LCD display to be set. To access
the Display Contrast option, press the Displ. Contrast softkey in the
General Menu. Use the + and – softkeys to scroll through the various
options and then press the Enter softkey after selecting one of them.
If the background is set to very dark, the text may not be visible. In this
instance, view the display at an acute angle, this should enable the text to
be seen enough to change the contrast.
Display Contrast +
Dark —
Enter
Table 3.19: Display Contrast Options
Selected Option Selected Option

Light Dark
Medium Very Dark
Medium Dark
Configurations Menu
The Configurations Menu is selected from the System Menu by pressing
the Configurations softkey. This menu is identical to the one described in
Section 3.7, Config Menu.
Remote Control Menu
Selection
The Remote Ctrl Menu is selected from the System Menu by pressing the
Remote Ctrl softkey.
This menu provides options for amending the remote control options.
NOTE…
The protocol for remote control of the unit is available on request.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Setup/Serial Remote Ctrl Menu This option is only shown if the

MCE is already in Remote
Control Local * control, to allow it to be set to
SAbus Address 102 * Local control. It cannot be set to
change from Local to Remote
Baud Rate 4800 *
control via the front panel
Port/Protocol SCC3/RS232 Quit menus.
Control Option
To access the Control option, press the Control softkey in the Remote
Ctrl Menu. Use the + and – softkeys to scroll through the various options
and then press the Enter softkey after selecting one of them.
Setup/Serial Remote Ctrl Edit
Control +
Local —
Enter
Table 3.20: Control Options

Local The MCE is controlled locally.
Remote The MCE is controlled by the RS-232/485 protocol via
the Control Remote port.
SAbus Address Option

The SAbus protocol is multi-drop, and has an address byte for
differentiating between the devices on the SAbus - the address option.
To access the SAbus Address option, press the SAbus Address softkey in
the Remote Ctrl Menu. This is used for remote control of the MCE.
SAbus address, and then press the Enter softkey to accept the new value.
SAbus Address +
102 —
Enter
Table 3.21: SAbus Address Options

Min: 49 SAbus address.
Max: 127
Step Size: 1
ST.TM.E10033.3
Baud Rate Option

To access the Baud Rate option, press the Baud Rate softkey in the
Remote Ctrl Menu. Use the + and – softkeys to scroll through the various
Baud Rate +
4800 —
Enter
Table 3.22: Baud Rate Options

1200 1200 Baud rate.
19200 19200 Baud rate.
38400 38400 Baud rate.
Port/Protocol Option
To access the Port/Protocol option, press the Port/Protocol softkey in the
Remote Ctrl Menu. Use the + and – softkeys to scroll through the various
Port/Protocol +
SCC3/RS232 —
Enter
Table 3.23: Port/Protocol Options

SCC3/RS232 SCC3 port, RS232 protocol.
SCC4/RS485 SCC4 port, RS485 protocol.
Reset Encoder
The MCE can be reset by pressing the Reset Encoder softkey, accessed
from the System Menu. The MCE reboots, keeping the current
configuration.
ST.TM.E10033.3
3.9.3 Video Menu

Introduction
The Video Menu is selected from the Setup Menu by pressing the Video
softkey.
This menu permits the selection of video parameters.
Setup/Video Menu
Video Source *
Video Encoder *
VBI *
* Quit
Video Source Menu
Selection
The Video Source Menu is selected from the Video Menu by pressing the
Video Source softkey.
This menu permits the selection of video source parameters. The screens
vary according to the type of video source selected.
PAL and NTSC Analogue Composite Video Sources and Analogue

Component Video Sources
Setup/Video/Source Menu
Video Source PAL – B/G/H/I *

O/P Video Loss Freeze Frame PgDn
Noise Reduction Off *
Sync Source Internal Quit
Sync Impedance High éPgUp

Logo Disable PgDn
Text Color Black *
Background White Quit
I/P Termination On éPgUp

*
*
Quit
ST.TM.E10033.3
Monochrome Analogue and YPRPB Video Source
Video Source Monochrome *

Frame Rate 29.97 Hz PgDn
O/P Video Loss Freeze Frame *
Noise Reduction Off Quit
Sync Source Internal éPgUp

Sync Impedance High PgDn
Logo Disable *
Text Color Black Quit
Background White éPgUp

I/P Termination On *
* *
* Quit
Ident (V3.3 on), Digital and Internal Test Pattern Video Sources
Video Source Serial Digital *

Frame Rate 25 Hz PgDn
O/P Video Loss Freeze Frame *
Noise Reduction Off Quit
Sync Source Internal éPgUp

Sync Impedance High PgDn
Logo Disable *
Text Color Black Quit
BackgroundWhite éPgUp
*
*
* Quit
ST.TM.E10033.3
Video Source Option

To access the Video Source option, press the Video Source softkey from
the Video Source Menu. Use the + and – softkeys to scroll through the
various sources and then press the Enter softkey after selecting one of
them.
Setup/Video/Source Edit
Video Source +
Serial Digital —
Enter
Table 3.24: Video Source Options

Off Video input switched off.
Serial Digital Serial digital video input on SDI connector.
Parallel Digital Parallel digital video input on PARALLEL connector.
PAL-B/G/H/I PAL-B/G/H/I composite video input on Y/COMP connector.
PAL-M PAL-M composite video input on Y/COMP connector.
PAL-D PAL-D composite video input on Y/COMP connector.
NTSC with Pedestal NTSC-M composite video input (with Pedestal) on Y/COMP
connector.
NTSC no Pedestal NTSC-M composite video input (with no Pedestal) on Y/COMP
connector.
Monochrome The video input on the Y/COMP connector is encoded using only
the luminance information. The frame rate selected indicates
whether this input is a PAL or NTSC signal.
YPRPB 525/625 line component video input on the Y, CR and CB
connectors.
Bars & Red Colour bars and red internal test pattern.
Moving Pattern Moving internal test pattern.
Ident Video source which allows the user to superimpose identification
(V3.3 on) text on the video signal, as required. Mainly used for test purposes.
Frame Rate Option
NOTE…
The frame rate can only be set for SDI, monochrome or YPRPB video inputs.
To access the Frame Rate option, press the Frame Rate softkey from the
Video Source Menu. Use the + and – softkeys to scroll through the
choices and then press the Enter softkey after selecting one of them.
Frame Rate +
29.97 Hz —
Enter
ST.TM.E10033.3
Table 3.25: Frame Rate Options

29.97 Hz Used in 525 lines (NTSC + PAL-M).
25 Hz Used in 625 lines (PAL).
O/P Video Loss Option

This option gives the choice of what is displayed on the television screen in
the event of losing video output. To access the O/P Video Loss option,
press the O/P Video Loss softkey from the Video Source Menu. Use the
+ and – softkeys to scroll through the various choices and then press the
Enter softkey after selecting one of them.
Output Video Loss +

Freeze Frame —
Enter
Table 3.26: O/P Video Loss Options

Freeze Frame The last video frame received is encoded if the
video input is lost.
Black Black image is encoded if the video input is lost.
Bars & Red Bars and red test pattern is encoded if the video
input is lost.
Freeze Frame + text The last video frame received is encoded if the
video input is lost. Text message is
superimposed.
Black + text Black image is encoded if the video input is lost.
Text message is superimposed.
Bars & Red + text Bars and red test pattern is encoded if the video
input is lost. Text message is superimposed.
Noise Reduction Option

This option enables the noise reduction feature to be switched on or off.
The feature can be used when the incoming picture material is corrupted
by high frequency noise (such as ‘white’ noise). When noise reduction is
enabled, the MCE applies sophisticated edge preserving filters on the
incoming material which removes the noise and can reduce the encoding
difficulty considerably.
To access the Noise Reduction option, press the Noise Reduction softkey
from the Video Source Menu. Use the + and – softkeys to alternate
between On and Off and then press the Enter softkey after selecting one
of them.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Noise Reduction +
Off —
Enter
Sync Source Option

This option enables the Sync Source to be set.
To access the Sync Source option, press the Sync Source softkey from
the Video Source Menu. Use the + and – softkeys to scroll through the
various choices and then press the Enter softkey after selecting one of
them.
Sync Source +
External —
Enter
Table 3.27: Sync Source Options

Internal From Internal 27 MHz clock. (The MCE should
default to this option)
External From External 27 MHz Clock Reference
Sync Impedance Option

This option enables the Sync Impedance to be set.
To access the Sync Impedance option, press the Sync Impedance
softkey from the Video Source Menu. Use the + and – softkeys to scroll
through the various choices and then press the Enter softkey after
selecting one of them.
Sync Impedance +
75 Ω —
Enter
Table 3.28: Sync Impedance Options

75 Ω
High
ST.TM.E10033.3
Logo Option
To access the Logo option, press the Logo softkey from the Video Source
Menu. This gives the choice of overlaying the video with the broadcaster’s
logo.
NOTE…
This option only appears if the logo has previously been downloaded into the equipment.
Use the + and – softkeys to scroll through the various choices and then
Logo +
Disable —
Enter
Table 3.29: Logo Options

Enable The logo is superimposed on the video.
Disable The logo is not superimposed on the video.
Text Color Option

To access the Text Color option, press the Text Color softkey from the
Video Source Menu. This gives a choice of colours for the text which is
displayed when the video output is lost (if that option has been selected).
NOTE…
This option only appears if one of the “and text” O/P Video Loss options has been selected.
Text Color +
Black —
Enter
Table 3.30: Text Color Options

White Green
Black Cyan
Blue Orange
Red Yellow
Magenta Grey
ST.TM.E10033.3
Background Option
To access the Background option, press the Background softkey from the
Video Source Menu. This gives a choice of colours for the background to
the text which is displayed when the video output is lost (if that option has
been selected).
NOTES…
1. This option only appears if one of the “+ text” O/P Video Loss options has been selected.
2. Make the background colour a contrast to the text otherwise the text will not be seen!
Background Color +
White —
Enter
Table 3.31: Background Options

White Green
Black Cyan
Blue Orange
Red Yellow
Magenta Grey
I/P Termination Option

To access the I/P Termination option, press the I/P Termination softkey
from the Video Source Menu. This enables the termination of the
analogue video input to be switched on or off. Use the + and – softkeys to
alternate between On and Off and then press the Enter softkey after
Input Termination +
On —
Enter
Video Encoder Menu
Selection
The Video Encoder Menu is selected from the Video Menu by pressing the
Video Encoder softkey.
ST.TM.E10033.3
This menu permits the selection of video encoding parameters. The

screens vary according to the control mode selected.
Control Mode = Manual
Setup/Video/Encoder Menu
Profile/Level 420MP@ML * This option is only shown if

Control Mode Manual PgDn Control Mode is set to Manual.
Encoding Mode Standard *
Encoding On Quit
Bit-rate 10.000 Mbit/s éPgUp

Horizontal Res 544 PgDn
Aspect Ratio 4:3 *
GOP Structure IBBP Quit
GOP Length 15 éPgUp

3:2 Pulldown Off *
Video PID 35 *
Quit
Control Mode = Auto, Low Delay or Very Low Delay
Profile/Level MP @ ML *
Control Mode Auto PgDn
Encoding On *
Bitrate 8.000 Mbit/s Quit
Horizontal Res Auto (720) éPgUp

3:2 Pulldown Off *
Video 33 *
Quit
ST.TM.E10033.3
Profile/Level Option
To access the Profile/Level option, press the Profile/Level softkey in the
Video Encoder Menu. Use the + and – softkeys to scroll through the
Setup/Video/Encoder Edit
Profile/Level +
420MP@ML —
Enter
Table 3.32: Profile/Level Options

4:2:0 (MP@ML) Main Profile @ Main Level. Used in 4:2:0 direct
to home.
422P@ML 4:2:2 Profile @ Main Level. Used in 4:2:2
contribution feed. (See note that follows)
NOTE…
422P@ML is only available if the upgrade has been purchased.
Control Mode Option

To access the Control Mode option, press the Control Mode softkey in the
Video Encoder Menu. This enables various control modes to be selected in
which some encoding parameters are automatically controlled (and
therefore not shown on the menu), or manual control of all parameters.
Use the + and – softkeys to scroll through the choices and then press the
Control Mode +
Manual —
Enter
ST.TM.E10033.3
Table 3.33: Control Mode Options

Manual All encoding parameters can be controlled manually.
Auto Pan Scan, Aspect Ratio, GOP Structure and GOP Length parameters
controlled automatically. Uses IBBP GOP.
Low Delay Low delay in encoding video signal achieved by trading-off video quality.
Pan Scan, Aspect Ratio, GOP Structure and GOP Length parameters
controlled automatically. Uses IP GOP.
Very Low Delay Very low delay in encoding video signal achieved by trading-off video
quality. Horizontal Res, Pan Scan, Aspect Ratio, GOP Structure and
GOP Length parameters controlled automatically. Uses IP GOP.
Encoding Mode Option

To access the Encoding Mode1 option, press the Encoding Mode softkey
in the Video Encoder Menu. This enables various encoding modes to be
selected in which some encoding parameters are automatically controlled
depending on the selected encoding delay. Use the + and – softkeys to
scroll through the choices and then press the Enter softkey after selecting
one of them.
Encoding Mode +
Standard —
Enter
Seamless 1 mode can use video bit rates from 0.8 Mbit/s to 10 Mbit/s,
with the actual limits depending on video standard and resolution. This
would be used for 4:2:0 DTH statistical multiplexing applications. Latency2
is approximately 2.5 seconds.
Seamless 2 mode emulates System 3000 Encoders. Video bit-rate can be
between 1.5 Mbit/s and 10 Mbit/s. Actual minimum and maximum rates
depend on video standard and resolution.
Seamless 3 mode operates between 5 Mbit/s and 33 Mbit/s, with the
actual limits depending on video standard and resolution. It would usually
be used in 4:2:2 statistical multiplexing applications. Latency is
approximately 1.1 seconds.
1
Only displayed if the Control Mode has been set to Manual.
2
Latency is the end-to-end delay.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Table 3.34: Encoding Mode Options

Seamless 1
This gives a fixed delay which allows
Seamless 2 the bit-rate to be changed without a
Seamless 3 break in transmission.
Mega Low Dly

The delay is a function of the bit-rate
selected. If the bit-rate is changed
Very Low Dly there is a break in transmission.
Low Delay
Standard
Table 3.35: Seamless Mode Bit-rate
Profile Seamless 1 Seamless 2 Seamless 3

(Mbit/s) (Mbit/s) (Mbit/s)
4:2:0 0.8 - 10 1.5 - 10 2 - 15
4:2:2 1.5 - 13 3 - 27 5 - 33
Rate Buffer 2.5 1.2 1
delay (seconds)
Encoding Option
To access the Encoding option, press the Encoding softkey in the Video
Encoder Menu. This enables encoding to be turned on or off. Use the + and
– softkeys to alternate between On and Off and then press the Enter
softkey after selecting one of them.
Video Encoding +
On —
Enter
Bit-rate Option
To access the Bit-rate option, press the Bit-rate softkey in the Video
Encoder Menu. Use the keypad or the + and – softkeys to increment or
decrement the bit-rate, and then press the Enter softkey to accept the
new value. Alternatively, enter the bit-rate directly from the keypad and
then press Enter. An error message is shown with the correct range of
bit-rates if the wrong rate is entered.
Video Bit-rate +
10.000 Mbit/s —
Enter
ST.TM.E10033.3
Horizontal Resolution Option

To access the Horizontal Resolution option, press the Horizontal Res
softkey in the Video Encoder Menu. Use the + and – softkeys to scroll
through the choices and then press the Enter softkey after selecting one
of them.
Horizontal Resolution +
544 —
Enter
ST.TM.E10033.3
Table 3.36: Horizontal Resolution Options

Number in brackets
varies according to Auto (720) Relates to the number of pixels across the
the bit-rate that is set.
320 screen.
352 Used with video bit-rates of < 2.5 Mbit/s3.
368
384
480 Used with video bit-rates of >= 2.5 Mbit/s3.
544 Used with video bit-rates of >= 4 Mbit/s3.
640
704
720 Used with video bit-rates of >= 6 Mbit/s3.
Aspect Ratio Option

To access the Aspect Ratio option, press the Aspect Ratio softkey in the
Video Encoder Menu. Use the + and – softkeys to scroll through the
Aspect Ratio +
4:3 —
Enter
Table 3.37: Aspect Ratio Options

1:1 Video image is encoded at 1:1 aspect ratio. Not currently used.
4:3 Video image is encoded at 4:3 aspect ratio. Default.
16:9 Video image is encoded at 16:9 aspect ratio. Used for digital transmissions.
2.21:1 Video image is encoded at 2.21:1 aspect ratio. Not currently used.
Group of Pictures Structure Option

To access the Group of Pictures (GOP) Structure option, press the GOP
Structure softkey in the Video Encoder Menu.
GOP Structure +
IBBP —
Enter
ST.TM.E10033.3
Table 3.38: Group of Pictures Structure Options

IBBP for successive B frames (IBBPBBPBBPBBPI) – default.
IBP for operation with B frames (IBPBPBPBPBPI).
IP for non-B frame operation (IPPPPPPPPPPI) - default for low delay mode.
IBB IBBIBBIBBIBBIBBIBBI) - professional editing standard.
IB (IBIBIBIBIBIBIBIBIB) - a superior professional editing standard.
I-Frame (IIIIIIIIIIIIIII) - for precise editing and compression.
Group of Pictures Length Option

To access the Group of Pictures (GOP) Length option, press the GOP
Length softkey in the Video Encoder Menu.
This enables the video GOP (Group Of Pictures) structure length to be set.
The structure length determines how regularly an I frame is transmitted.
The I frame provides a regular reference from which predicted frames can
be generated, thereby ensuring that predictions do not become wildly
inaccurate.
NOTE
Some of the settings may not be available if they are not valid for use with other current encoding
parameters. Also, changing the GOP structure automatically changes the GOP length if the current
GOP length is not compatible with the selected structure.

GOP length, and then press the Enter softkey to accept the new value.
GOP Length +
15 —
Enter
Table 3.39: Group of Pictures Length Options
Valid Input Range Description

Min: 1 GOP lengths available depend on GOP
Max: 15 structure selected.
3:2 Pulldown Option

To access the 3:2 Pulldown option, press the 3:2 Pulldown softkey in the
Video Encoder Menu. This enables 3:2 pulldown (film) mode to be
switched on and off.
NOTE…
This option is only available if a 525 line 29.97 Hz (NTSC) video source is selected.
3
Horizontal resolutions of 352, 480, 544 and 720 are only used if auto setting is selected.
ST.TM.E10033.3
The option should be switched on if the video material originated on film

and has been converted from the 24 frames per second film rate to the 30
frames per second NTSC rate. This enables the encoder to increase the
video compression by only including a flag in the transport stream to
represent the repeated fields, rather than compressing the repeated
frames.
3:2 Pulldown +
Off —
Enter
Table 3.40: 3:2 Pulldown Options

On 3:2 pulldown (film) mode is switched on.
Off 3:2 pulldown (film) mode is switched off.
Video PID Option (V3.3 on)

The Video PID option is selected from the Channel 1A Menu by pressing
the Video PID softkey. The option is used for entering or updating video
PIDs, as required. Enter a two to four digit code using the keypad, then
press the Enter softkey to enter the PID.
NOTE…
Allocating PIDs - to be DVB compliant, PIDs below 32 are reserved. Therefore PIDs 32 to 8191 are
available for use. In the event of a clash, one of the PIDs will be changed by the MCE’s internal
checking algorithm.
Setup/Audio 1A Edit
Video PID +
35 —
Enter
Vertical Blanking Interval (VBI) Menu

Selection
The VBI Menu is selected from the Video Menu by pressing the VBI
softkey. This menu permits the selection of VBI parameters.
The VBI lines vary, according to whether the video source is 525 lines,
29.97 Hz or 625 lines, 25 Hz.
If 525, the options are VBI Lines 10-22 and 272-285; if 625, the options
are VBI Lines 7-24 and 319-336. These have the same options as
VBI - Line 7 and are changed in the same way.
ST.TM.E10033.3
525 Line 29.97 Hz Input
Setup/Video/VBI Menu
VBI in Picture Off *

VBI Data PID Off PgDn
Closed Caption On *
Serial CC Off Quit
VBI – Line 10 Off éPgUp

VBI – Line 11 Off êPgDn
VBI – Line 12 Off *
VBI – Line 13 Off Quit
More screens present options for VBI lines 15 to 22 and 272 to 285
625 Line 25 Hz Input
VBI in Picture Off *

Teletext Encode On êPgDn
VBI Data PID Off *
WSS (Line 23) On Quit
VPS (Line 16) Off éPgUp

VBI - Line 7 Off êPgDn
VBI – Line 8 Off *
VBI – Line 9 Off Quit
More screens present options for VBI lines 11 to 24 and 319 to 336.
VBI In Picture Option
NOTE…
The VBI in Picture option is only accessible if the selected video profile/level is 422P@ML.
To access the VBI In Picture option, press the VBI In Picture softkey in
the VBI Menu. This enables the extended picture format available in the
MPEG 4:2:2 specification to be selected. When selected, the encoder
compresses and transmits the VBI data as part of the active picture. This
mode requires up to 3 Mbit/s of extra bit-rate, depending on the amount
and complexity of the VBI present. When this option is not selected (or
when 4:2:0 format video is used), VBI data is transmitted in its original
digital form either in an independent data stream (in the case of Teletext)
or in user data fields within the MPEG video transport stream.
Use the + and – softkeys to alternate between On and Off and then press
the Enter softkey after selecting one of them.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Setup/Video/VBI Edit
VBI in Picture *
Off *
*
Value cannot be updated Quit
VBI Data PID Option

To access the VBI Data PID option, press the VBI Data PID softkey in the
VBI Menu. This enables the VBI Data PID to be turned On or Off.
VBI on separate PID +

On —
Enter
Closed Caption/Serial CC Option

To access the Closed Caption option, press the Closed Caption softkey in
the VBI Menu. This enables the extraction of closed captioning data from
line 21 of the video input.
To access the Serial CC (Closed Caption) option, press the Serial CC
softkey in the VBI Menu. This inserts the closed captions as user data in
the video stream.
NOTE…
This parameter is only shown if the video source is set to NTSC.
Closed Caption +
Off —
Enter
Teletext Encode Option

To access the Teletext Encode option, press the Teletext Encode softkey
in the VBI Menu. This enables extraction of Teletext System B data from
lines 7 to 22 and 320 to 335 of the video input. Use the + and – softkeys
to alternate between On and Off and then press the Enter softkey after
ST.TM.E10033.3
Teletext Encode +
On —
Enter
WSS (Line 23) Option

To access the WSS (Line 23) option, press the WSS (Line 23) softkey in
the VBI Menu. This enables the extraction of WSS (Wide Screen Signalling)
data from line 23 of the video input. Use the + and – softkeys to alternate
between On and Off and then press the Enter softkey after selecting one
of them.
NOTE…
This parameter is only shown if the video source is set to PAL.
WSS (Line 23) +

WSS is only On —
applicable to Enter
line 23 Update using softkeys Quit
VPS (Line 16) Option

To access the VPS (Line 16) option, press the VPS (Line 16) softkey in
the VBI Menu. This enables the extraction of VPS (Video Programming
System) data from line 16 of the video input. Use the + and – softkeys to
alternate between On and Off and then press the Enter softkey after
VPS (Line 16) +

On —
VPS is only
Enter
applicable to
line 16 Update using softkeys Quit
ST.TM.E10033.3
VBI - Line ‘n’ Option

To access the VBI - Line ‘n’ option, press the VBI - Line ‘n’ softkey in the
VBI Menu (the line number shown changes according to the line option
selected). This enables extraction of VBI data from the selected line, and
specifies the type of VBI data that the line contains. Use the + and –
softkeys to scroll through the choices and then press the Enter softkey
VBI Data Code for Line 7 +

VBI data is T/text System B —
applicable to Enter
various lines Update using softkeys Quit
Table 3.41: VBI - Line ‘n’ Options

525 Line 29.97 Hz Video
Off VBI data is not extracted from the line.
VITC VITC (Vertical Interval Time Code) data extracted from the line.
[Closed Caption] This setting applies to Line 21 only. The setting cannot be selected on this
screen, but is set by setting the Closed Caption option to On. It indicates
that closed captioning data is extracted from the line. Setting Line 21 back to
Off or VITC resets the Closed Caption option back to Off.
Neilsen AMOL 1 This setting applies to Lines 20 and 285 only. Neilsen AMOL 1 data is
extracted from the line.
Neilsen AMOL 11 This setting applies to Lines 20, 22, 283 and 285 only. Neilsen AMOL 11
data is extracted from the line.
625 Line 25 Hz Video
Off VBI data is not extracted from the line.
VITC VITC (Vertical Interval Time Code) data extracted from the line.
Video Index Associated with AFD. Lines 11 and 324 must be set to Video Index for AFD
to be be able to function.
Teletext System B Teletext System B data extracted from the line.
[WSS] This setting applies to Line 23 only. The setting cannot be selected on this
screen, but is set by setting the WSS (Line 23) option to On. It indicates that
WSS (Wide Screen Signalling) data is extracted from the line. Setting Line
23 back to Off, VITC or Teletext System B resets the WSS (Line 23) option
back to Off.
[VPS] This setting applies to Line 16 only. The setting cannot be selected on this
screen, but is set by setting the VPS (Line 16) option to On. It indicates that
VPS (Video Programming System) data is extracted from the line. Setting
Line 16 back to Off, VITC or Teletext System B resets the VPS (Line 16)
option back to Off.
ST.TM.E10033.3
3.9.4 Audio Menu

Selection
The Audio Menu is selected from the Setup Menu by pressing the Audio
softkey.
This menu permits the selection of audio parameters.
Setup/Audio Menu
Channel 1A Languages
Channel 1B *
*
Quit
Channels 1A and 1B Menu

Introduction
Channels 1A and 1B have the same menu options, depending upon the
Coding Standard selected. Channel 1A menus are shown as examples. The
Channel 1A Menu is selected from the Audio Menu by pressing the
Channel 1A softkey.
This menu permits the selection of individual channel audio parameters.
Coding Standard = Dolby AC3
Setup/Audio 1A Menu
Source Analogue *
Audio Bit-rate 384 kbit/s êPgDn
Coding Mode Stereo *
Coding Standard Dolby AC3 Quit
Setup/Audio 1A Menu
Auto Lip Sync Off éPgUp

Sampling Rate 48 kHz êPgDn
Gain 18 dB *
Impedance 600 ohms Quit
Setup/Audio 1A Menu
Language English éPgUp

Bit Stream Mode Complete Main êPgDn
Dialogue Level -27 dB *
Dolby Srnd Mode Not Indicated Quit
ST.TM.E10033.3
Setup/Audio 1A Menu
Audio Prod Info Yes éPgUp

Mixing Level 25 dB êPgDn
Room Type Small, Flat Mon *
Copyright On Quit
Setup/Audio 1A Menu
Original On éPgUp
Dynamic Range Film Standard êPgDn
RF Protection Off *
Deemphasis Off Quit
Setup/Audio 1A Menu
DC Filter On éPgUp
Low Pass Filter On êPgDn
Embedded Src 12 Auto (2048) *
Embedded Src 34 Auto (2048) Quit
Setup/Audio 1A Menu
Audio PID 45 éPgUp

*
*
Quit
Coding Standard = Pre-encoded AC3
Setup/Audio 1A Menu
Source Digital 1 *
Coding Standard Pre-encoded AC3 êPgDn
Auto Lip Sync Off *
Language English Quit
Setup/Audio 1A Menu
External Delay 179ms éPgUp

AES-EBU Output Off êPgDn
Setup/Audio 1A Menu
Audio PID 45 éPgUp

*
*
Quit
ST.TM.E10033.3
Coding Standard = MPEG Layer 2
Setup/Audio 1A Menu
Source Analogue *
Audio Bit-rate 384 kbit/s êPgDn
Coding Mode Stereo *
Coding Standard MPEG Layer 2 Quit
Setup/Audio 1A Menu
Auto Lip Sync Off éPgUp

Gain 18 dB êPgDn
Impedance 600 ohms *
Language English Quit
Setup/Audio 1A Menu
Embedded Src 12 Auto (2048) éPgUp

Audio PID 45 *
Quit
Coding Standard = Linear PCM and Dolby E
Setup/Audio 1A Menu
Source Analogue *
Coding Mode Stereo êPgDn
Coding Standard Linear PCM *
Auto Lip Sync Off Quit
NOTE…
SMPTE 302M-2000 is still undergoing change. Please contact Customer Services for compliance of
the Linear PCM option.
Setup/Audio 1A Menu
Gain 18 dB éPgUp
Impedance 600 ohms êPgDn
Language English *
Setup/Audio 1A Menu
Embedded Src 34 Auto (2048) éPgUp

Audio PID 45 *
*
Quit
ST.TM.E10033.3
Source Option
To access the Source option, press the Source softkey in the Channel 1A
Menu. Use the + and – softkeys to scroll through the choices and then
Setup/Audio 1A Edit
Audio Source +
Analogue —
Enter
Table 3.42: Source Options

Off No audio packets are sent in the transport stream and audio is removed from
the Service Information (SI).
Mute Empty audio packets are sent in the transport stream.
Test Tone The internal test tone is used as the audio source.
Analogue Analogue audio input on AUDIO IN connector.
Digital 1 Digital audio input 1 on AUDIO IN connector.
Digital 2 Digital audio input 2 on AUDIO IN connector.
Embedded 1 Digital audio de-embedded from digital video input using DID 0x2FF.
Embedded 2 Digital audio de-embedded from digital video input using DID 0x1FD.
Embedded 3 Digital audio de-embedded from digital video input using DID 0x1FB.
Embedded 4 Digital audio de-embedded from digital video input using DID 0x2F9.
Audio Bit-rate Option

To access the Audio Bit-rate option, press the Audio Bit-rate softkey in
the Channel 1A Menu. Use the + and – softkeys to scroll through the
Setup/Audio 1A Edit
Audio Bit-rate +
384 kbit/s —
Enter
ST.TM.E10033.3
Table 3.43: Audio Bit-rate Options
Available Settings MPEG Layer 2 Coding Dolby Digital
Dual Mono
2/0(L,R)
Stereo
Stereo
1/0(C)
Mono
Joint
32 kbit/s ✔
48 kbit/s ✔
56 kbit/s ✔ ✔
64 kbit/s ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
80 kbit/s ✔ ✔
96 kbit/s ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
112 kbit/s ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
128 kbit/s ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
160 kbit/s ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
192 kbit/s ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
224 kbit/s ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
256 kbit/s ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
320 kbit/s ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
384 kbit/s ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
448 kbit/s ✔ ✔
512 kbit/s ✔ ✔
576 kbit/s ✔ ✔
640 kbit/s ✔ ✔
Coding Mode Option

To access the Coding Mode option, press the Coding Mode softkey in the
Channel 1A Menu. If the current audio bit-rate is outside the bit-rate
range supported by the new coding mode, the bit-rate is changed
automatically to the lowest value within the supported range.
Setup/Audio 1A Edit
Audio Coding Mode +

Stereo
—
Enter
ST.TM.E10033.3
Table 3.44: Coding Mode Options

MPEG Layer 2 Coding
Standard
Mono Single channel mono audio coding.
Stereo Dual channel stereo audio coding.
Joint Stereo Dual channel joint (intensity) stereo audio coding.
Dual Mono Dual channel mono audio coding.
Dolby Digital Coding
Standard
1/0(C) Single channel mono audio coding.
2/0(L,R) Dual channel stereo audio coding.
Coding Standard Option

To access the Coding Standard option, press the Coding Standard
softkey in the Channel 1A Menu. Use the + and – softkeys to scroll
of them.
Setup/Audio 1A Edit
Audio Coding Standard +

MPEG Layer 2 —
Enter
Table 3.45: Coding Standard Options

MPEG Layer 2 MPEG Layer 2 audio coding standard.
Dolby AC3 Dolby Digital AC3 audio coding standard.
Dolby E Dolby E audio coding standard.
Pre-encoded AC3 Pre-encoded AC3 audio coding standard.
Linear PCM Linear PCM audio coding standard.
Auto Lip Sync (V3.3 on)

To access the Auto Lip Sync option, press the Auto Lip Sync softkey in
the Channel 1A Menu and select either ON or OFF as required.
Setup/Audio 1A Edit
Auto Lip Sync +

On —
Enter
ST.TM.E10033.3
Sampling Rate Option

To access the Sampling Rate option4, press the Sampling Rate softkey in
the Channel 1A Menu. This enables the required sampling frequency. Use
the + and – softkeys to scroll through the choices and then press the
Setup/Audio 1A Edit
Sampling Rate +
44.1 kHz —
Enter
Table 3.46: Sampling Rate Options

32 kHz
44.1 kHz Only used in Dolby AC3.
48 kHz
Gain Option
To access the Gain option, press the Gain softkey in the Channel 1A
Menu. This screen enables the audio clipping level to be set. Use the + and
– softkeys to scroll through the choices and then press the Enter softkey
Setup/Audio 1A Edit
Audio Gain +
12 dB —
Enter
Table 3.47: Gain Options

12 dB 12 dB audio clipping level.
18 dB 18 dB audio clipping level.
4
Dolby Digital (AC-3) only.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Impedance Option
To access the Impedance option, press the Impedance softkey in the
Channel 1A Menu. This screen enables the impedance of the audio input to
be set. Use the + and – softkeys to scroll through the choices and then
Setup/Audio 1A Edit
Audio Impedance +
600 Ohms —
Enter
Table 3.48: Impedance Options

600 Ohms Used in analogue mode.
20K Ohms
Language Option
To access the Language option, press the Language softkey in the
Channel 1A Menu. This enables the language of the audio channel to be
indicated. Use the + and – softkeys to scroll through the choices and then
Setup/Audio 1A Edit
Audio Language +
English —
Enter
Bit Stream Mode Option

To access the Bit Stream Mode option5, press the Bit Stream Mode
softkey in the Channel 1A Menu. This indicates the type of service the
bit-stream conveys. Use the + and – softkeys to scroll through the choices
Setup/Audio 1A Edit
Audio Bit Stream Mode +

Complete Main —
Enter
5
ST.TM.E10033.3
Table 3.49: Bit Stream Mode Options

Complete Main
Music and Effects
Visually Impaired
Hearing Impaired
Dialogue
Commentary
Emergency
Voice Over/Karaoke In Dolby Digital when the coding mode is
1/0 this option appears as “Voice Over”
otherwise as “Karaoke”.
Dialogue Level Option

To access the Dialogue Level option6, press the Dialogue Level softkey in
the Channel 1A Menu. The value of the Dialogue Level affects the sound
reproduction level and indicates how far the average dialogue level of the
encoded program is below digital 100%.
dialogue level, and then press the Enter softkey to accept the new value.
Setup/Audio 1A Edit
Dialogue Level +
-27 dB —
Enter
Table 3.50: Dialogue Level Options

–1 dB to –31 dB Dialogue levels between –1 dB to –31 dB.
Dolby Srnd Mode Option

To access the Dolby Srnd Mode option6, press the Dolby Srnd Mode
softkey in the Channel 1A Menu. This indicates whether a two-channel
Dolby Digital (AC-3) bit-stream is conveying a Dolby Surround encoded
program.
NOTE…
This parameter appears in the bit-stream only when operating in the two channel mode (Audio Coding
Mode = 2/0).
6
ST.TM.E10033.3
Setup/Audio 1A Edit
Dolby Surround Mode +

Not Indicated —
Enter
Table 3.51: Dolby Srnd Mode Options
Options Available
Not Indicated
Not Dolby Surround
Dolby Surround
Audio Prod Info Option

To access the Audio Prod Info option7, press the Audio Prod Info softkey
in the Channel 1A Menu. This indicates whether the Mixing Level and
Room Type parameters exist within the bit-stream.
Use the + and – softkeys to scroll through the choice of Yes and No then
Setup/Audio 1A Edit
Audio Production Info +

Yes —
Enter
Mixing Level Option

To access the Mixing Level option7, press the Mixing Level softkey in the
Channel 1A Menu. This parameter indicates the acoustic sound pressure
level of the dialog level during the final audio mixing session.
NOTE…
This parameter appears in the bit-stream only when the Audio Production Information parameter is set
to On.

mixing level, and then press the Enter softkey to accept the new value.
Setup/Audio 1A Edit
Mixing Level +
25 dB —
Enter
7
ST.TM.E10033.3
Table 3.52: Mixing Level Options

0 dB to 31 dB Mixing levels between 0 dB to 31 dB.
Room Type Option

To access the Room Type option7, press the Room Type softkey in the
Channel 1A Menu. This parameter indicates the type and calibration of the
mixing room used for the final audio mixing session.
NOTE…
This parameter appears in the bit-stream only when the Audio Production Information parameter is set
to Yes.
Setup/Audio 1A Edit
Room Type +
Not Indicated —
Enter
Table 3.53: Room Type Options

Not Indicated
Small, Flat Mon Type and calibration of the mixing room used
Large, X Curve Mon for the final audio mixing session.
Copyright Option
To access the Copyright option8, press the Copyright softkey in the
Channel 1A Menu. This indicates whether the information in the bit-stream
is shown to be protected by copyright.
Setup/Audio 1A Edit
Copyright +
On —
Enter
8
ST.TM.E10033.3
Table 3.54: Copyright Options

On The information in the bit-stream is
indicated to be protected by copyright.
Off The information in the bit-stream is
indicated not to be protected by copyright.
Original Option
To access the Original option8, press the Original softkey in the Channel
1A Menu. This indicates whether the bit-stream is an original or a copy of
an original bit-stream.
Setup/Audio 1A Edit
Original +
On —
Enter
Table 3.55: Original Options

On The bit-stream is an original.
Off The bit-stream is a copy of an original
bit-stream.
Dynamic Range Option

To access the Dynamic Range option9, press the Dynamic Range softkey
in the Channel 1A Menu. This determines the characteristic curve of the
dynamic range compression algorithm.
Setup/Audio 1A Edit
Dynamic Range Compression +

Film Light —
Enter
9
ST.TM.E10033.3
Table 3.56: Dynamic Range Options

None/Custom Program reproduction with the original
dynamic range.
Film Standard
Film Light
Music Standard
Music Light
Speech
RF Protection Option
To access the RF Protection option, press the RF Protection softkey in the
Channel 1A Menu.
RF Overmodulation Protection is used in situations where the audio signal
of a decoded AC-3 bit-stream is delivered via a link with very restricted
dynamic range. One example is the case of a television broadcast, where
sound is modulated onto an RF channel and delivered to a low cost
television receiver.
In this situation it is necessary to restrict the maximum peak output level
to a known value with respect to dialogue level, in order to prevent
overmodulation.
Setup/Audio 1A Edit
RF Overmodulation Protection +
Off —
Enter
Table 3.57: Dynamic Range Options

On RF Overmodulation Protection enabled.
Off RF Overmodulation Protection disabled.
Deemphasis Option
To access the Deemphasis option10, press the Deemphasis softkey in the
Channel 1A Menu. This parameter is used to de-emphasise the
pre-emphasised audio.
10
ST.TM.E10033.3
Setup/Audio 1A Edit
Digital Deemphasis +
Off —
Enter
Table 3.58: Deemphasis Options

On Deemphasis is on.
Off Deemphasis is off.
DC Filter Option
To access the DC Filter option11, press the DC Filter softkey in the
Channel 1A Menu. This parameter is used to activate a dc highpass filter
for all input channels.
Setup/Audio 1A Edit
DC High Pass Filter +

On —
Enter
Table 3.59: DC Filter Options

On A dc highpass filter is activated for all input
channels.
Off A dc highpass filter is not activated.
Low Pass Filter Option

To access the Low Pass Filter option11, press the Low Pass Filter softkey
in the Channel 1A Menu. This parameter is used to activate a low pass
filter with a cut-off near the specified audio bandwidth that is applied to
the main input channels.
11
ST.TM.E10033.3
Setup/Audio 1A Edit
Low Pass Filter +

On —
Enter
Table 3.60: Low Pass Filter Options

On A low pass filter is selected.
Off A low pass filter is not selected.
Embedded Src 12 Option

To access the Embedded Src 12 option, press the Embedded Src 12
softkey in the Channel 1A Menu. Use the + and – softkeys to scroll
of them.
Setup/Audio 1A Edit
Embedded Audio Source 1 - 2 +

Auto (2048) —
Enter
Table 3.61: Embedded Src 12 Options

Auto (2048)
Embedded Src 34 Option

The Embedded Src 34 option is selected from the Channel 1A Menu by
pressing the Embedded Src 34 softkey. The Embedded Src 34 option has
the same choices as the Embedded Src 12 option.
Audio PID Option (V3.3 on)

The Audio PID option is selected from the Channel 1A Menu by pressing
the Audio PID softkey. The option is used for entering or updating audio
PIDs, as required. Enter a two to four digit code using the keypad, then
press the Enter softkey to enter the PID.
NOTE…
checking algorithm.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Setup/Audio 1A Edit
Audio PID +
45 —
Enter
External Delay Option

To access the External Delay option12, press the External Delay softkey in
the Channel 1A Menu. This parameter is used to compensate for external
delays.
external delay, and then press the Enter softkey to accept the new value.
Setup/Audio 1A Edit
External Delay +
179ms —
Enter
Table 3.62: External Delay Options

Min: 111 ms
Max: 3000 ms
AES-EBU Output Option

To access the AES/EBU Output option, press the AES/EBU Output
softkey in the Channel 1A Menu. This parameter allows the MCE to
generate an AES/EBU (48 kHz) output signal to enable an external audio
Encoder to genlock to the MCE.
Setup/Audio 1A Edit
AES/EBU Output +
Off —
Enter
12
ST.TM.E10033.3
Table 3.63: AES/EBU Output Options

On Permits the generation of an AES/EBU (48 kHz) output signal.
Off Does not permit the generation of an AES/EBU (48 kHz) output
signal.
Languages Menu
Selection
The Languages Menu is selected from the Audio Menu by pressing the
Languages softkey.
This menu permits the selection of languages used in the MPEG broadcast.
Setup/Audio/Lang Menu
Add/Delete Language *
Define User Language *
Remove User Language *
* Quit
Add/Delete Language Option

To add/delete a language press the Add/Delete Language softkey in the
Languages Menu. There are over forty languages to choose from.
Setup/Audio/Lang/AddDel
* English (eng)
* French (fre) êPgDn
* German (ger)
* Dutch (dut) Quit
Define User Language Option

To define a user language press the Define User Language softkey in
the Languages Menu.
Setup/Audio/Lang/Define
New User Defined Language Del

Name: Case
Enter
(Upper case) Quit
ST.TM.E10033.3
Remove User Language Option

To remove a language press the Remove Language softkey in the
Languages Menu.
Setup/Audio/Lang/Remove
Remove User Language
Quit
If there are no user defined languages to remove then an error screen

appears with the message ‘No user defined languages’.
3.9.5 Data Menu

Selection
The Data Menu is selected from the Setup Menu by pressing the Data
softkey.
This menu provides access to further sub-menus for setting the RS-232
asynchronous and RS-422 synchronous data channel parameters.
Setup/Data Menu
RS232 (Async) *
RS422 (Sync) *
* *
* Quit
RS232 (Async) Menu
Selection
The RS232 (Async) Menu is selected from the Data Menu by pressing the
RS232 (Async) softkey.
This menu provides options for setting the RS-232 asynchronous data
channel parameters.
Setup/Data/RS232 Menu
Encoding On *
Baud Rate 38400 *
Data PID 65 *
* Quit
ST.TM.E10033.3
Encoding Option
To access the Encoding option, press the Encoding softkey in the RS232
(Async) Menu. This enables the RS-232 asynchronous data channel to be
switched on or off. Use the + and – softkeys to scroll through the choices
Setup/Data/RS232 Edit
RS232 Data Encoding +

On —
Enter
Table 3.64: Encoding Options

On The RS-232 asynchronous data channel is switched on.
Off The RS-232 asynchronous data channel is switched off.
Baud Rate Option

To access the Baud Rate option, press the Baud Rate softkey in the RS232
(Async) Menu. This enables the Baud rate of the RS-232 asynchronous
data channel to be set. Use the + and – softkeys to scroll through the
RS232 Data Baud Rate +

38400 —
Enter
Table 3.65: Baud Rate Options

19200 19200 Baud rate.
38400 38400 Baud rate.
Data PID Option (V3.3 on)

The Data PID option is selected from the Channel 1A Menu by pressing the
Data PID softkey. The option is used for entering or updating data PIDs,
as required. Enter a two digit code using the keypad, then press the Enter
softkey to enter the PID.
ST.TM.E10033.3
NOTE…
checking algorithm.
Setup/Audio 1A Edit
Data PID +
65 —
Enter
RS422 (Sync) Menu

Selection
The RS422 (Sync) Menu is selected from the Data Menu by pressing the
RS422 (Sync) softkey.
This menu provides options for setting the RS-4222 synchronous data
channel parameters.
Setup/Data/RS422 Menu
Encoding On *
Bit-rate 56 kbit/s *
Data PID 65 *
* Quit
Encoding Option
To access the Encoding option, press the Encoding softkey in the RS422
(Sync) Menu. This enables the RS-422 synchronous data channel to be
switched on or off. Use the + and – softkeys to scroll through the choices
RS422 Data Encoding +

On —
Enter
Table 3.66: Encoding Options

On The RS-422 synchronous data channel is switched on.
Off The RS-422 synchronous data channel is switched off.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Bit-rate Option
To access the Bit-rate option, press the Bit-rate softkey in the RS422
(Sync) Menu. This enables the bit-rate of the RS-422 synchronous data
channel to be set. Use the + and – softkeys to scroll through the choices
RS422 Data Bit-rate +

56 —
Enter
Table 3.67: Bit-rate Options

Settings cycle from 56 to RS-422 synchronous data channel bit-rate.
1792 in steps of 56 then
from 64 to 2048 in steps of
64, then back to 56
Data PID Option

See Data PID Option on page 3-85.
3.9.6 QPSK Modulator Menu

Selection
The Modulator Menu is selected from the Setup Menu by pressing the
Modulator softkey.
This menu provides options for configuring the operating parameters for
the Modulator.
The screens vary according to the Modulator output format selected. Two
output options are normally available. In this configuration, (for
transmission over a satellite link), only the IF output is used. The
Baseband option, (for transmission over a telecommunications link), is not
used and is therefore not covered in this manual.
IF (204) Output Format
Setup/Modulator Menu
Output Format IF (204) *

IF Output Off êPgDn
IF Power 0.0 dBm *
IF Frequency 60.000 MHz Quit
ST.TM.E10033.3
Modulation Off éPgUp

Tx Bandwidth 25.6000 MHz êPgDn
Symbol Rate 20.0000 Msym/s *
FEC Rate 3/4 Quit
Spectrum Inv Off éPgUp

Preset Pwr Low -20.0 dBm êPgDn
Preset Pwr Norm 0.0 dBm *
Power On State IF off Quit
Sat Del Freq 1.000000 GHz éPgUp

Sat Orb Pos 36.8° êPgDn
Sat West/East West *
Polarisation Linear Horizontal Quit
Baseband (188) Output Format
Output Format B a s e b a n d (188) éPgUp

Power On State IF off *
*
Quit
Output Format Option

To access the Output Format option, press the Output Format softkey in
the Modulator Menu. This enables the output format of the MCE to be set.
Setup/Modulator Edit
Output Format +
IF (204) —
Enter
NOTE…
This option is the same as the Output Format Option on the Setup/Mux Menu (see Page 3-101).
ST.TM.E10033.3
Table 3.68: Output Format Options

IF (204) IF output using 204 byte packets. Used for transmission
over a satellite link.
Baseband (188) Baseband output using 188 byte packets. Used for
transmission over a telecommunications link.
IF Output Option
To access the IF Output option, press the IF Output softkey in the
Modulator Menu. This enables the IF output to be switched on or off. Use
the + and – softkeys to scroll through the choices and then press the
IF Output +
On —
Enter
Table 3.69: IF Output Options

On IF output switched on.
Off IF output switched off. When the IF output is switched off,
modulation is automatically set to off and the IF power
level is set to the low setting. The original settings are not
restored when the IF output is switched back on.
IF Power Option
To access the IF Power option, press the IF Power softkey in the
Modulator Menu. This screen enables the power level of the IF output to
be set.
Use the + and – softkeys to increment or decrement the power level, or
enter a new value using the keypad. Note that if the + and – softkeys are
used, the power level is actually changed as the value changes on the
screen (for example, keeping the + softkey pressed will result in the actual
IF power level stepping up). Press the Enter softkey to accept the new
value.
IF Power +
0.0 dBm —
Enter
Update using keypad or Quit
softkeys for immediate changes
ST.TM.E10033.3
Table 3.70: IF Power Options

Min: –20.0 dBm IF output power level.
Max: 5.0 dBm
Step Size: 0.1 dBm
If the specified IF power level entered using the keypad is outside the valid
input range, a confirmation screen is displayed which shows the
maximum/minimum value allowed. Press the Enter softkey to accept the
new value shown, or press the Quit softkey to leave the original IF power
level unchanged.
Confirmation Screen
IF Power
Maximum : 5.0 dBm Quit
IF Frequency Option
To access the IF Frequency option, press the IF Frequency softkey in the
Modulator Menu. This screen enables the IF frequency to be set.
Use the + and – softkeys to increment or decrement the frequency level,
or enter a new value using the keypad. Press the Enter softkey to accept
the new value.
IF Frequency +
60.000 MHz —
Enter
Table 3.71: IF Frequency Options

Min: 60.000 MHz IF Frequency.
Max: 80.000 MHz
Step Size: 0.0025 MHz
If the specified IF Frequency entered using the keypad is outside the valid
input range, a confirmation screen is displayed which shows the
new value shown, or press the Quit softkey to leave the original IF
frequency unchanged.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Modulation Option
To access the Modulation option, press the Modulation softkey in the
Modulator Menu. This enables modulation of the IF carrier to be switched
on or off.
Modulation +
On —
Enter
Table 3.72: Modulation Options

On Modulation switched on.
Off Modulation switched off. Modulation is automatically set
to off if the IF output is switched off, but it is not
automatically switched back on when the IF output is
switched back on.
Tx Bandwidth Option
To access the Tx Bandwidth option, press the Tx Bandwidth softkey in
the Modulator Menu.
Pressing the Tx Bandwidth softkey displays one of two screens,
depending on whether modulation is switched on or off when the softkey is
pressed.
Modulation Switched On
The following screen is displayed. In order to change the Tx bandwidth,
Tx Bandwidth Yes
25.6000 MHz No
*
When modulation is switched off, the following screen is displayed. Use the
+ and – softkeys to increment or decrement the bandwidth, or enter a
value.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Table 3.73: Tx Bandwidth Options

The absolute range of the Tx bandwidth.
unit is described in symbols Changing the Tx bandwidth affects the automatic symbol
and detailed in Table 3.6 and rate, video bit-rate and video resolution calculations as
Figure 3.16. shown by the equations on page 3-23.
Tx Bandwidth Yes
25.6000 MHz No
Enter

Tx Bandwidth Yes
25.7000 MHz No
*
If the specified bandwidth is outside the valid input range, a confirmation

screen similar to the following is displayed which shows the
new value shown, or press the Quit softkey to leave the original
bandwidth unchanged (modulation remains switched off).
Confirmation Screen
Tx Bandwidth
Modulation Switched Off

If modulation is switched off, the option is used in the same way as
described for the modulation switched on, except that the screens to
switch modulation off and then back on are not displayed.
Symbol Rate Option

To access the Symbol Rate option, press the Symbol Rate softkey in the
Modulator Menu.
Pressing the Symbol Rate softkey displays one of two screens, depending
on whether modulation is switched on or off when the softkey is pressed.
ST.TM.E10033.3
The following screen is displayed. In order to change the symbol rate,
Symbol Rate Yes

20.0000 Msym/s No
*
+ and – softkeys to increment or decrement the symbol rate, or enter a
value.
Table 3.74: Symbol Rate Options

Min: 1.0000 Msym/s Symbol rate.
Max: 30.0000 Msym/s Changing the symbol rate affects the automatic Tx
Step Size: 0.0001 Msym/s bandwidth, video bit-rate and video resolution calculations as
shown by the equations on page 3-23. The relationship
between symbol rate and bandwidth is shown in Figure 3.16.
Symbol Rate +
20.0000 Msym/s —
Enter

Symbol Rate Yes

20.1000 Msym/s No
*
Switch Modulation ON? Quit
If the specified symbol rate is outside the valid input range, a confirmation
screen similar to the following is displayed which shows the
new value shown, or press the Quit softkey to leave the original symbol
rate unchanged (modulation remains switched off).
ST.TM.E10033.3
Confirmation Screen
Symbol Rate
Maximum : 37.500 Msym/s Quit

described for modulation switched on, except that the screens to switch
FEC Rate Option

To access the FEC Rate option, press the FEC Rate softkey in the
Modulator Menu.
Pressing the FEC Rate softkey displays one of two screens, depending on
whether modulation is switched on or off when the softkey is pressed.
The following screen is displayed. In order to change the FEC rate,
FEC Rate Yes

3/4 No
*
the + and – softkeys to cycle through the available settings, then press
the Enter softkey to accept the new value. Changing the FEC rate affects
the automatic symbol rate, video bit-rate and video resolution calculations.
Table 3.75: FEC Rate Options

1/2 FEC rate of 1/2.
ST.TM.E10033.3
FEC Rate +
3/4 —
Enter

FEC Rate Yes

3/4 No
*

Spectrum Inv Option

To access the Spectrum Inv option, press the Spectrum Inv softkey in
the Modulator Menu.
Pressing the Spectrum Inv softkey displays one of two screens,
depending on whether modulation is switched on or off when the softkey is
pressed.
The following screen is displayed. In order to change the spectrum
inversion, modulation must first be switched off. Press the Yes softkey to
do this automatically (and proceed to the next screen), or press the No (or
Quit) softkey to return to the menu.
Spectrum Inversion Yes

Off No
*
+ and – softkeys to cycle through the available settings, then press the
Enter softkey to accept the new value.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Table 3.76: Spectrum Inv Options

Off Spectrum inversion switched off.
On Spectrum inversion switched on.
Spectrum Inversion +
Off —
Enter

Spectrum Inversion Yes

Off No
*

Preset Pwr Low Option
To access the Preset Pwr Low option, press the Preset Pwr Low softkey
in the Modulator Menu.
This enables the ‘low’ IF output preset power level (one of settings for the
Setup/Operations Menu IF Power option) to be set. Use the + and –
softkeys to increment or decrement the preset power level, or enter a new
value using the keypad. Press the Enter softkey to accept the new value.
Table 3.77: Preset Pwr Low Options

Min: –20.0 dBm ‘Low’ IF output preset power level.
Max: 5.0 dBm
Step Size: 0.1 dBm
(Must also be less than the ‘normal’ preset power level)
IF Preset Power – Low +

-20.0 dBm —
Enter
Update using k e y p a d o r softkeys Quit
ST.TM.E10033.3
If the specified ‘low’ preset power level entered using the keypad is
outside the valid input range, or is greater than the ‘normal’ preset power
level, a confirmation screen similar to the following is displayed which
shows the maximum/minimum value allowed. Press the Enter softkey to
accept the new value shown, or press the Quit softkey to leave the
original preset power level unchanged.
Confirmation Screen
IF Preset Power – Low

Specified Value Too Low
Minimum : -20.0 dBm Quit
Preset Pwr Norm Option

To access the Preset Pwr Norm option, press the Preset Pwr Norm
softkey in the Modulator Menu.
This enables the ‘normal’ IF output preset power level (one of settings for
the Setup/Operations Menu IF Power option) to be set. Use the + and –
softkeys to increment or decrement the preset power level, or enter a new
value using the keypad. Press the Enter softkey to accept the new value.
Table 3.78: Preset Pwr Norm Options

Min: –20.0 dBm ‘Normal’ IF output preset power level.
Max: 5.0 dBm
Step Size: 0.1 dBm
(Must also be greater than
the ‘low’ preset power level)
IF Preset Power – Normal +

0.0 dBm —
Enter
If the specified ‘normal’ preset power level entered using the keypad is
outside the valid input range, or is less than the ‘low’ preset power level, a
new value shown, or press the Quit softkey to leave the original preset
power level unchanged.
Confirmation Screen
IF Preset Power – Normal

Maximum : 5.0 dBm Quit
ST.TM.E10033.3
Power On State (V3.3 on)

To access the Power On State option, press the Power On State softkey
in the Modulator Menu. This menu defines the Power On.
Powered On State +
As Powered Down -
Enter
Update usoing softkey Quit
Table 3.79: Power On State Options
Options
As Powered Down
IF Off
NOTE…
With the M2/EOM1/QPSK2 Frequency Agile QPSK Modulator module fitted, the MCE maintains the
output settings if a short power interruption (brown out) occurs. [V3.3 and later]
Sat Del Freq Option

To access the Sat Del Freq option, press the Sat Del Freq softkey in the
Modulator Menu.
This enables the receive frequency of the satellite transponder to be
specified. This is included in the SI/NIT if the Modulator output format is
set to IF (see the Output Format option on the Setup/Modulator Menu).
If the Modulator output format is set to baseband, then this option setting
is ignored and the descriptors included in the NIT are those specified by
the options on the Setup/System/SI Menu.
Use the + and – softkeys to increment or decrement the frequency, or
enter a new value using the keypad. Press the Enter softkey to accept the
new value.
Satellite Delivery Frequency +

1.0000 GHz —
Enter
Table 3.80: Sat Del Freq Options

Min: 0.0000 GHz Satellite delivery frequency.
Max: 999.9999 GHz
Step Size: 0.00001 GHz
ST.TM.E10033.3
Sat Orb Pos Option

To access the Sat Orb Pos option, press the Sat Orb Pos softkey in the
Modulator Menu.
This enables the orbital position of the satellite to be specified. This is
included in the SI/NIT if the Modulator output format is set to IF (see the
Output Format option on the Setup/Modulator Menu). If the Modulator
output format is set to baseband, then this option setting is ignored and
the descriptors included in the NIT are those specified by the options on
the Setup/System/SI Menu.
Use the + and – softkeys to increment or decrement the orbital position,
or enter a new value using the keypad. Press the Enter softkey to accept
the new value.
Satellite Orbital Position +

36.8° —
Enter
Table 3.81: Sat Orb Pos Options

Min: 0.0° Orbital position of satellite.
Max: 360.0°
Step Size: 0.1°
If the specified orbital position is outside the valid input range, a

new value shown, or press the Quit softkey to leave the original orbital
position unchanged.
Confirmation Screen
Satellite Orbital Position

Maximum : 360.0° Quit
Sat West/East Option

To access the Sat West/East option, press the Sat West/East softkey in
the Modulator Menu.
This enables the satellite west/east flag to be specified to indicate whether
the satellite position is in the western or eastern part of the orbit. This is
included in the SI/NIT if the Modulator output format is set to IF (see the
Output Format option on the Setup/Modulator Menu).
If the Modulator output format is set to baseband, then this option setting
is ignored and the descriptors included in the NIT are those specified by
the options on the Setup/System/SI Menu.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Use the + and – softkeys to cycle through the available settings, then
press the Enter softkey to select the required setting.
Satellite West/East Flag +

West —
Enter
Table 3.82: Sat West/East Options

West Satellite position is in western part of the orbit.
East Satellite position is in the eastern part of the orbit.
Polarisation Option
To access the Polarisation option, press the Polarisation softkey in the
Modulator Menu.
This enables the polarisation of the satellite transponder to be specified.
This is included in the SI/NIT if the Modulator output format is set to IF
(see the Output Format option on the Setup/Modulator Menu). If the
Modulator output format is set to baseband, then this option setting is
ignored and the descriptors included in the NIT are those specified by the
options on the Setup/System/SI Menu.
Use the + and – softkeys to cycle through the available settings, then
press the Enter softkey to select the required setting.
Polarisation +
Linear Horizontal —
Enter
Table 3.83: Polarisation Options

Linear Horizontal Satellite transponder uses linear horizontal polarisation.
Linear Vertical Satellite transponder uses linear vertical polarisation.
Circular Left Satellite transponder uses circular left polarisation.
Circular Right Satellite transponder uses circular right polarisation.
ST.TM.E10033.3
3.9.7 Multiplexer (Mux) Menu (RAS Option fitted, Internal

Remux Option not fitted)
Menu Options
The Mux Menu is selected from the Setup Menu by pressing the Mux
softkey.
This menu permits the selection of multiplexer output parameters and RAS
options, if the module is fitted. Two output options are normally available.
In this configuration, (for transmission over a satellite link), only the IF
output is used. The Baseband option, (for transmission over a
telecommunications link), is not used and is therefore not covered in this
manual.
Setup/Mux Menu
Output Format IF (204) *

Bit-Rate 41.4705 Mbit/s *
Scramble ff *
SNG Key Code 0000000 Quit
Scramble and SNG Key Code are shown only when the RAS Option Module is fitted.
Output Format Option
To access the Output Format option, press the Output Format softkey in
the Modulator Menu. This enables the output format of the MCE to be set.
Output Format +
IF (204) —
Enter
NOTE…
This option is the same as the Output Format Option on the Setup/Modulator Menu (see Page 3-87).
Table 3.84: Output Format Options

IF (204) IF output using 204 byte packets. Used for transmission
over a satellite link.
Baseband (188) Baseband output using 188 byte packets. Used for
transmission over a telecommunications link.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Bit-Rate Option
This option is only displayed if Output Format is set to Baseband (188),
therefore this option is not used on this equipment.
Set the required symbol rate using the Symbol Rate option on the
Setup/Operations Menu (see page 3-23) or the Setup/Modulator Menu
(see page 3-87), and allow the MCE to calculate the required bit-rate
automatically (see Page 3-21, Getting Started).
Scramble Option (RAS Option Module Fitted)

To access the scramble option13, press the Scramble softkey in the Mux
Menu. This enables security scrambling of the MCE transmission to be
switched on or off.
NOTE…
See Chapter 4, Equipment Description for details of the RAS Scrambling Module and scrambling
modes, including a list of the PIDs that are scrambled when scrambling is enabled.
Setup/Mux Edit
Scrambling +
Off —
Enter
Table 3.85: Scramble Options

On (SNG Key) MCE output is scrambled. Scrambling key used is entered using the SNG
Key Code option.
On (Fixed Key) MCE output is scrambled. Scrambling key used in assigned by TANDBERG
Television and pre-programmed into the MCE.
Off MCE output is not scrambled.
SNG Key Code Option (RAS Option Module Fitted)

To access the SNG Key Code option13, press the SNG Key Code softkey in
the Mux Menu. This enables the scrambling key used in SNG Key
scrambling mode to be set (see the Scramble option). The same
scrambling code must be used at the receive end to unscramble the
transmission.
Enter up to seven digits using the keypad, then press the Enter softkey to
enter the scrambling code. Note that if less then seven digits are entered,
they are prefixed with 0’s (zero) to give a seven digit code.
13
Only shown if the RAS CA module is fitted.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Setup/Mux Edit
SNG Key Code Del

0012345 Case
Enter
3.9.8 Mux Menu (Internal Remux Option Module Fitted)

Selection
NOTE…
These menus are only shown when the Remux option module is fitted.
The Mux Menu is selected from the Setup Menu by pressing the Mux
softkey.
This menu permits the selection of remultiplexing parameters.
Setup/Mux Menu
Host Mux *
Services *
* *
* Quit
Host Mux
Selection
The Host Mux Menu is selected from the Mux Menu by pressing the Host
Mux softkey.
This menu provides options for setting the Host Mux parameters.
Setup/Mux/Host Menu
On Air On *
O/P Rate (188) 41.4706 Mbit/s êPgDn
O/P Rate (204) 45.0000 Mbit/s *
Host Rate (188) 41.4706 Mbit/s Quit
Setup/Mux/Host Menu
Host Rate (204) 45.0000 Mbit/s éPgUp

Packet Length 204 bytes *
*
Quit
ST.TM.E10033.3
On Air Option
This option determines whether the output of the Multiplexer is active. To
change the On Air option, press the On Air softkey in the Host Menu.
Setup/Mux/Host Edit
On Air +
On —
Enter
Table 3.86: On Air Options

On Multiplexer output is switched on.
Off Multiplexer output is switched off.
O/P Rate (188) and O/P Rate (204) Option

To change either of the output bit-rates, press the O/P Rate (188) or the
O/P Rate (204) softkey in the Host Menu.
NOTE…
It would be inappropriate to use the ‘O/P Rate (188)’ setting in this configuration, even though it
appears on the menu. Information and references to O/P Rate (188) have therefore been excluded
from this section.
The O/P Rate (204) can be in the range of 0 Mbit/s to 60.0000 Mbit/s.
Use the keypad or the + and – softkeys to select O/P Rate (204) and then
press the Enter softkey after selecting it.
Setup/Mux/Host Edit
Output Bit-rate (204) +

40.000 Mbit/s —
Enter
Table 3.87: O/P Rate (204) Option

204 Multiplexer output bit-rate, in 204 byte packets.
Min: 0.000 Mbit/s Changing the bit-rate affects the automatic video bit-rate and video
Max: 45.500 Mbit/s resolution calculations.
Step Size: 0.0001 Mbit/s
ST.TM.E10033.3
NOTE…
For optimum performance the bit-rate given in Table 3.87 is highly recommended as the maximum to
be set. Although it is possible to have higher bit-rates (55.2941 Mbit/s and 60.000 Mbit/s) these may
cause erratic operation.
If the specified bit-rate is outside the valid input range, a confirmation

softkey to leave the original bit-rate unchanged.
Confirmation Screen
Output Bit-rate (204)

Maximum : 60.0000 Mbit/s Quit
Host Rate (188) and Host Rate (204) Option

These options refer to the multiplex in the local (host) Encoder.
To change either of the Host bit-rates, press the Host Rate (188) or the
Host Rate (204) softkey in the Host Menu.
NOTE…
It would be inappropriate to use the ‘Host Rate (188)’ setting in this configuration, even though it
appears on the menu. Information and references to Host Rate (188) have therefore been excluded
from this section.
The Host Rate (204) can be in the range of 0 Mbit/s to 59.9999 Mbit/s.
Use the keypad or the + and – softkeys to select Host Rate (204) and
then press the Enter softkey after selecting it.
Setup/Mux/Host Edit
Host Bit-rate (204) +

40.000 Mbit/s —
Enter
NOTE…
The host rate cannot exceed the output rate (see page 3-104, O/P Rate (188) and O/P Rate (204)
Option).
Table 3.88: Host Rate (188) and Host Rate (204) Options

204 Multiplexer output bit-rate, in 204 byte packets.
ST.TM.E10033.3

Confirmation Screen
Host Bit-rate (204)

Packet Length Option

To change the packet length, press the Packet Length softkey in the
Host Menu.
Setup/Mux/Host Edit
Packet Length +
188 bytes —
Enter
Table 3.89: Packet Length Options

188 bytes Uses 188 bytes packet format.
204 bytes Uses 204 bytes packet format.
Services
Selection
The Services Menu is selected from the Mux Menu by pressing the
Services softkey.
This menu provides options for setting the Services parameters.
Setup/Mux/Services Menu
O/P Rate (188) 28.9209 Mbit/s *

Spare Bit Rate 41.4706 Mbit/s êPgDn
Input Bit Rate *
Output Bit Rate Quit
These options cannot be changed.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Service Name (-) On éPgUp

Default Service (1) On êPgDn
Default Service (1) On *
Default Service (1) On Quit
The names can be changed to something more meaningful.
Default Service (1) On éPgUp



*
*
Quit
O/P Rate (188) Option

This is the remultiplexing of the service before output.
To change the output bit-rate, press the O/P Rate (188) softkey in the
Services Menu. The O/P Rate (188) can be in the range of 0 Mbit/s to
41.9314 Mbit/s.
Use the keypad or the + and – softkeys to scroll through the choices and
then press the Enter softkey after selecting one of them.
Setup/Mux/Services Edit
O/P Rate (188) +

40.000 Mbit/s —
Enter
ST.TM.E10033.3
Table 3.90: O/P Rate (188) Option

188 Multiplexer output bit-rate when in baseband output format.

Confirmation Screen
Output Bit-rate (188)

Spare Bit Rate Option

The Spare Bit Rate Option cannot be changed, but it does indicate how
much bit-rate is available for remultiplexing.
Input Bit Rate Option
The Input Bit Rate Option cannot be changed, but it does indicate how
much bit-rate is used by all input services.
Output Bit Rate Option
The Output Bit Rate Option cannot be changed, but it does indicate how
much output bit-rate is available.
Service Name (-) Option
Depending upon the number of inputs to the Remux card there will be
between one and thirteen service identifiers shown on the MCE display.
The service from the local Encoder (host) is identified as <Service Name>
(-) and the others are related to the input on the Remux card. <Service
Name> (1) indicates a service on input 1 etc. All services can be edited to
include or remove the servce from the output.
To change the Service Name (-) option, press the Service Name (-)
softkey in the Services Menu.
Service Name +
(-) On —
Enter
ST.TM.E10033.3
Default Service Option

To change the Default Service option, press the appropriate Default
Service softkey in the Services Menu.
Default Service +
(1) On —
Enter
The number changes according to the default service.
3.10 Status Menu

The Status Menu shows the current parameter settings of the MCE. Refer
to Figures 3.9 to 3.13 for the structure of the Status Menu. The screens
can only be viewed, data cannot be changed.
3.11 Errors
There is no formal menu structure associated with this option but if there
are errors associated with the equipment then a screen is shown which
indicates the error category (alarm/fail), the module affected and text
describing the error. Refer to Annex C for further details of error
messages. When there are no errors, the words ‘There are no errors’ are
shown.
3.12 Diagnostics Menu

3.12.1 Menu Options
Selection
The Diagnostics Menu is selected from the Top Level Menu by pressing
the Diagnostics softkey.
This menu has a selection of diagnostic tests which allow the operator to
test the equipment, either as a whole or by the individual component
parts.
Diagnostics
All Modules
Individual Modules
Front Panel
Quit
ST.TM.E10033.3
All Modules Option

Press the All Modules softkey in the Diagnostics Menu to test the unit as
a whole. If everything passes then a message ‘All Modules Passed’ is
displayed on the screen. If not, the problem area is indicated by a
message on the screen.
Individual Modules Menu
Selection
The Individual Modules Menu is selected from the Diagnostics Menu by
pressing the Individual Modules softkey.
This menu permits the testing of the individual modules of the MCE.
Diagnostics/Individual Modules Menu
Video
Audio
Data (2)
Any option Quit
modules are
indicated here.
Video/Audio/ Data (2) Option

Press the appropriate softkey in the Individual Modules Menu to test the
appropriate module. If everything passes then a message ‘Module Passed’
is displayed on the screen. If not, the message ‘Module Failed’ is
displayed, together with an indication of the problem area.
The video and audio options are always displayed but other selections
refer to any option modules, which may be fitted.
Front Panel Menu

The Front Panel Menu is selected from the Diagnostics Menu by pressing
the Front Panel softkey. Press the softkey in the Front Panel Menu
corresponding to the area to test.
Diagnostics/Front Panel Menu
LCD Display Alarm LED

Keyboard *
Fail Relay *
Alarm Relay Quit
Proceed as follows:
LCD Display Test Press a key to clear the LCD display, then press a key
again to fill the LCD display with black, then again to
return to the menu.
Keyboard Test Press each softkey and keypad key in turn. The display
shows the last key pressed. Press the Quit softkey
twice to return to the menu.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Fail Relay Test Press any key (except the Quit softkey) to toggle the
fail relay on and off. Press the Quit softkey to return to
the menu. The relay can usually be heard clicking as it
changes state. The relay is connected to the rear panel
ALARM connector – see Chapter 2, Installing the
Equipment for the connector pin-out details.
Alarm Relay Test Press any key (except the Quit softkey) to toggle the
alarm relay on and off. Press the Quit softkey to return
to the menu. The relay can usually be heard clicking as
it changes state. The relay is connected to the rear
panel ALARM connector – see Chapter 2, Installing the
Equipment for the connector pin-out details.
Alarm LED Press any key (except the Quit softkey) to toggle the
front panel Alarm LED on and off. Press the Quit
3.13 Input Monitor

The Input Monitor display is selected from the Top Level Menu (see page
3-34) by pressing the Input Monitor softkey, or from the Setup/
Operations Menu (see page 3-23) by pressing the Mon softkey.
The display shows the picture on the currently selected video source, the
audio A and B channel audio levels in the form of bargraphs, the SI service
name, and the video bit-rate. The status of the IF output and modulation
are also shown.
Press the Quit softkey to return to the Top Level Menu.
Service name.
Auto 13.5 MHz Status of IF output
and Modulation.
IF Off Mod Off
Video bit-rate.
Vid: 25.4MBit/s
A B Quit
Audio A and B channel audio levels.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Chapter 4
4. Equipment Description
Contents
Video Switch............................................... 4-11
4.1 Introduction................................................................4-3
Preprocessor .............................................. 4-11
4.2 Overview of Video Coding .........................................4-3 Audio Input and Switch............................... 4-12
4.2.1 Information Redundancy...............................4-3 Audio Encoders .......................................... 4-12
4.2.2 Frame Types.................................................4-3 Multiplexer .................................................. 4-12
4.2.3 Frame Sequence...........................................4-4 4.7.8 E4 Video Compression Module (S8652) .... 4-12
4.3 Noise Reduction ........................................................4-5 Microprocessor ........................................... 4-12
E4 Compression Chips............................... 4-12
4.4 Logo Overlay .............................................................4-5 Rate Buffer.................................................. 4-12
4.5 Overview of Audio Coding .........................................4-5 4.7.9 Frequency Agile QPSK Modulator
(S10949)..................................................... 4-13
4.5.1 MPEG-1 Layer 2 ...........................................4-5
4.5.2 Dolby Digital (AC-3) ......................................4-6 4.8 Slot 4 Options.......................................................... 4-13
4.5.3 Pre-encoded AC-3 ........................................4-6 4.8.1 Internal Remux Module (S10655)............... 4-13
Introduction................................................. 4-13
4.6 Overview of Data Handling........................................4-6
Overview..................................................... 4-13
4.7 MCE Functional Description ......................................4-6 Function of Remultiplexer ........................... 4-15
4.7.1 Diagram Locations ........................................4-6 Using the Remultiplexer.............................. 4-15
4.7.2 Enclosure ......................................................4-7 Setting Bit-rates and Avoiding Overflow ..... 4-16
4.7.3 Power Supply Unit.........................................4-7 What to do if Overflow Occurs.................... 4-16
4.7.4 Backplane (S10162)......................................4-7 4.8.2 RAS Scrambling Module S8489 ................. 4-17
4.7.5 Host Processor..............................................4-7
List of Illustrations
4.7.6 Overview of Functions and Modules.............4-8
Figure 4.1: Coding Scheme Block Diagram...................................4-3
Functional Block Diagram .............................4-8
Figure 4.2: Functional Block Diagram ............................................4-8
Module Position Diagram..............................4-9 Figure 4.3: Module Positions..........................................................4-9
Video Encoding Functions ............................4-9 Figure 4.4: Single Stage Remultiplexing......................................4-14
Audio Encoding Functions ............................4-9 Figure 4.5: Two Stage Remultiplexing .........................................4-14
Data Handling Functions...............................4-9 Figure 4.6: Remultiplexer Block Diagram.....................................4-15
Serial Digital Video Input Error Detection
List of Tables
and Handling...............................................4-10
Table 4.1: PID Scrambling ...........................................................4-11
Multiplexing and Scrambling Functions.......4-10
4.7.7 Base Board 3ASI (Motherboard) S8475 .....4-11
Functions.....................................................4-11
Host Processor............................................4-11
ST.TM.E10033.3
Equipment Description
BLANK
ST.TM.E10033.3
4.1 Introduction
This chapter provides a simplified overview of the E5500 Mobile
Contribution Encoder (MCE) and explains the functions of its component
parts.
4.2 Overview of Video Coding

4.2.1 Information Redundancy
The fundamental objective of the coding scheme is to exploit information
redundancy in the input video signal to minimise the amount of data
required for successful transmission. To achieve this, the MCE uses a
number of uniquely designed interactive processes. The resultant
compressed bit-stream syntax conforms to the ISO 13818 MPEG-2
standard. An explanation of the overall coding strategy follows.
4.2.2 Frame Types

Coding operates on a frame (or picture) based principle. There are three
frame types:
• I (intra-coded frames)
• P (predicted frames)
• B (bi-directionally predicted frames).
P and B frames are known as inter-coded frames. Coding of I frames occurs
without reference to any other frames. P frames use motion compensation
from a previous I or P frame. B frames are coded using motion
compensation from a previous and/or a future I or P frame. Thus, a coding
scheme may contain a mix of I, B and P. Figure 4.1 illustrates the coding
process.
I Frames →
Intra
Digital/
Analogue Preprocessing
Video In B or P Frames → Common Path
Processing Functions
Inter (DCT coding, Compressed
Quantisation, Video Out
Error VLC encoding)
Predicted Frame and
Difference Signal
Generation
Motion
Vectors
Figure 4.1: Coding Scheme Block Diagram
Preprocessing of the digital or analogue video input signal adapts it to the

requirements of the main processing circuits in the Encoder. This
preprocessing includes down-sampling of the chrominance and, optionally,
down-sampling of the luminance depending on the required degree of
compression. The output of the preprocessor is digital 656 video.
ST.TM.E10033.3
The 656 video feeds into the Video Compression Module where the MPEG
video processing takes place. This processing produces I frames; this
mode of operation is known as intra-frame coding.
A feedback path is fed to the motion-compensated Predicted Frame and
Difference Signal Generation function which subtracts a predicted frame
from the current frame to produce a frame difference or prediction-error
value. This prediction-error value is coded instead of the complete frame
information, thus affording a considerable saving in bit-rate; this mode of
operation is known as inter-frame coding. The prediction-error
information is augmented by motion vector information which is also
coded and enables recovery of the current complete frame information by
a Decoder.
The I frames and prediction-error values are processed in blocks of 8x8
pixels which are first transformed by a Discrete Cosine Transform
(DCT).For typical images, the distribution of the coefficients is not uniform
due to spatial redundancy, and the energy tends to be concentrated into
the low frequency coefficients. The number of bits required for a block is
reduced by not transmitting the near-zero coefficients and by quantising
the remaining ones. Quantisation results in a reduction of the number of
possible values to be transmitted. These values are then entropy-coded
using a Variable Length Code (VLC). The VLC allocates codes which have
different lengths depending upon the probability with which they are
expected to occur.
4.2.3 Frame Sequence

Depending on the predicted frame production method, P or B frames are
produced for inter-coding.
The regular transmission of an I frame, at user selectable intervals
(usually every 12 frames), provides a regular reference from which
predicted frames can be generated, thereby ensuring that predictions do
not become wildly inaccurate.
The run of frames from the start of an I frame to the start of the next I
frame is known as a group of pictures (GOP). Each GOP is identified by a
unique header.
The Encoder GOP structure may be selected to be:
• IP, for non-B frame operation (IPPPPPPPPPPI);
• IBP, for operation with B frames (IBPBPBPBPBPI);
• IBBP, for successive B frames (IBBPBBPBBPBBPI).
• IBB, (IBBIBBIBBIBBIBBIBBI) - a professional editing standard;
• IB, (IBIBIBIBIBIBIBIBIB) - a superior professional editing standard;
• I Frame, (IIIIIIIIIIIIIII) - for professional editing and compression.
ST.TM.E10033.3
4.3 Noise Reduction

A noise reduction process can be enabled by the operator when the
incoming picture material is corrupted by high frequency noise (such as
‘white’ noise). When the noise reduction process is enabled, the Encoder
applies sophisticated edge preserving filters on the incoming material
which removes the noise and can reduce the encoding difficulty
considerably.
4.4 Logo Overlay

A logo image can be downloaded into the MCE using the Ethernet TFTP
protocol. The logo can be overlayed on the video image (under operator
control) to brand the material.
Contact Customer Services (see Preliminary Pages) for the required
software package and further details if the logo overlay facility is to be
used.
4.5 Overview of Audio Coding

4.5.1 MPEG-1 Layer 2
Audio is encoded is to the MPEG-2 encoding standard ISO/IEC 13818-3
(layer 2) at a sampling rate of 32 kHz or 48 kHz.
The spectrum of the received broad-band audio signal is divided into
sub-bands of equal bandwidth by filtering. Each of these sub-bands is
separately sampled and quantised to convert the input analogue signal
into a sequence of discrete sample values. The samples associated with
each sub-band are separately coded according to the psychoacoustic
properties of the human auditory system. Critical regions are coded more
accurately, with less bits being assigned to frequencies at which the ear is
less sensitive. Coding is also dependent on dynamic information such as
audio masking, in which a loud sound at one frequency dominates over
any quieter sounds at adjacent frequencies.
Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation (ADPCM) techniques are used
to reduce the bit-rate by coding the difference values between successive
samples rather than absolute values. Quantisation step size is adjusted
depending on the magnitude of the difference value: a rapid change
produces a coarse approximation followed by smaller, more precise
successive samples.
For all coding modes (stereo, mono, dual mono and joint stereo) the
digitally coded bits are formatted into distinct frames, each of which
contains a header which defines the frame in detail (coding scheme, mode,
bit-rate, etc.). Since the number of useful bits varies depending on the
psychoacoustic properties of the corresponding sound samples, the frame
can be padded. The resultant encoded audio output bit-rate is software
selectable in the range 32 kbit/s to 384 kbit/s, depending on the mode
selected (see Chapter 1, Introduction for table of supported bit-rates).
ST.TM.E10033.3
4.5.2 Dolby Digital (AC-3)

Dolby Digital (AC-3) has been designed to take maximum advantage of
human auditory masking. It divides the audio spectrum of each channel
into narrow frequency bands of different sizes optimised with respect to
the frequency selectivity of human hearing. This makes it possible to
sharply filter coding noise so that it is forced to stay very close in
frequency to the frequency components of the audio signal being coded.
By reducing or eliminating coding noise wherever there are no audio
signals to mask it, the sound quality of the original signal can be
subjectively preserved.
In Dolby Digital (AC-3), bits are distributed among the filter bands as
needed by the particular frequency spectrum or dynamic nature of the
program. A built-in model of auditory masking allows the encoder to alter
its frequency selectivity (as well as time resolution) to make sure that a
sufficient number of bits are used to describe the audio signal in each
band, thus ensuring noise is fully masked.
Dolby Digital (AC-3) also decides how the bits are distributed among the
various channels from a common bit pool. This technique allows channels
with greater frequency content to demand more data than sparsely
occupied channels, or strong sound in one channel to provide masking for
noise in other channels.
4.5.3 Pre-encoded AC-3

The MCE supports pre-encoded AC-3 to the standard IEC 61937,
‘Interfaces for Non-linear PCM Encoded Audio Bitstreams applying
IEC 60958’.
4.6 Overview of Data Handling

The RS-422 synchronous and RS-232 asynchronous data channels
supported by the MCE are simple bit-pipes and are not coded in any way.
This is due to the fact that the nature of the data to be transmitted is
expected to be different for individual customers, and therefore a suitable
coding scheme cannot be provided with any guarantee of performance.
4.7 MCE Functional Description

4.7.1 Diagram Locations
A functional block diagram of the MCE is shown in Figure 4.2 on Page 4-8.
The physical position of the modules mentioned in this section is shown in
Figure 4.3 on Page 4-9.
ST.TM.E10033.3
4.7.2 Enclosure
The MCE is constructed in a 2U enclosure. Access to the various modules
can be gained by removing the module tray retaining screws and pulling
the modules, together with their mounting trays, out from the back of the
enclosure. The enclosure has five dc fans for general cooling. At low
temperature, the fans are disabled to allow the unit to warm up to
operating temperature
4.7.3 Power Supply Unit

The power supply unit used in this equipment is capable of supplying a
maximum of 300 Watts. The equipment uses a nominal
100-120/220-240 Vac input at 60/50 Hz to provide the regulated voltage
supplies required by the modules in the MCE (see Annex B, Technical
Specification, for details).
The primary power circuit is protected by a fuse which must be selected
according to the local mains voltage.
4.7.4 Backplane (S10162)

The Backplane is mounted toward the front of the Enclosure. It provides
three slots for connection to the plug-in modules. All modules mate with
the Backplane to allow inter-module communications and power supply
distribution.
4.7.5 Host Processor

The MCE is under the overall control of the Host Processor. The Processor
responds to user inputs on the front panel controls, and monitors the
health of the equipment. The Processor controls an alarm/fail output which
can indicate equipment health to external monitoring equipment. The Host
Processor also supports an Ethernet interface which enables remote
control from a control workstation and through which the logo overlay (see
Section 4.4) is loaded into the equipment.
ST.TM.E10033.3
4.7.6 Overview of Functions and Modules

Functional Block Diagram
S8475 Base Board 3ASI (Motherboard)
Studio Timing 27 MHz 27 MHz

Reference signal Phase Local
HSYNC IN Locked Oscillator
Loop
Digital Parallel 656 Video

Serial S8652
Video Pre- Video
Switch processor Teletext Compression
Analogue Composite
S8481 Module
Video Input
Video Compressed
Input Video
Analogue Component De-embedded
Module
Video Input
ASI Out 1
ASI Out 2
Audio
Audio ASI Out 3
Encoder 1
Analogue Audio Input Switch
Audio S8489 DVB-ASI 1
Digital Audio Input Encoder 2 RAS
DVB-ASI
DVB-ASI 21
Scramble
RS-422 Data Input S8477 Module DVB-ASI 3
Data Input
RS-232 Data Input Module Mux
Packet Streams
S10949 IF Main
QPSK
Modulator
Module IF Monitor
Host Processor SI
Ethernet
Text
DVB-ASI In 1
S10655
Alarm/Fail DVB-ASI In 2
Remux
Option DVB-ASI In 3
Module DVB-ASI Out 1
Figure 4.2: Functional Block Diagram
NOTE…
The RAS module or the Remux module can be fitted in option slot 4, but only one at a time (see
Chapter 1, Introduction, Table 1.7).
ST.TM.E10033.3
Module Position Diagram
S8475 S8652 OPTION SLOT 4

BASE BOARD 3ASI VIDEO COMPRESSION (Blank Module)
(MOTHERBOARD) MODULE
S8481 S8477 S10949

VIDEO INPUT MODULE DATA INPUT MODULE QPSK MODULATOR MODULE
Figure 4.3: Module Positions
Video Encoding Functions

The PAL/NTSC composite video and YPrPb component video signals are
input to the S8481 Video Input Module where one input is selected,
converted to parallel 656 video, and fed to the Video Switch on the S8475
Base Board 3ASI (Motherboard). The unit also offers an SDI input, which is
de-serialised and fed into the same video switch.
One video feed is selected by the Switch and fed to the Preprocessor stage
which carries out functions such as down-sampling, frame resynchronising,
noise reduction, embedded audio extraction, Teletext/VBI extraction and
forward analysis (look ahead to detect scene cuts etc.). The Preprocessor
also contains a test pattern generator.
The output of the preprocessing block is still parallel TTL 656 and this is
passed to the Video Compression Module (S8652). The Video Compression
Module performs the MPEG compression process and its output is a stream
of MPEG video transport packets at the desired video bit-rate.
Audio Encoding Functions

Audio is handled on the Base Board 3ASI (Motherboard) where it is input
as either analogue or digital AES/EBU, or de-embedded audio from a
digital video input. The selected input generates audio samples suitable for
compression. Audio compression is performed by a Digital Signal Processor
(DSP) which converts the audio samples to the MPEG-1 (layer 2), Dolby
Digital, or pre-encoded AC-3.
Data Handling Functions

The RS-422 and RS-232 data feeds are input to the S8477 Data Input
Module. The data inputs are converted directly to packet streams – they
are not compressed.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Serial Digital Video Input Error Detection and Handling

The serial digital video input supports error detection and handling (EDH),
which is an error checking method for serial transmitters and receivers.
EDH is fully defined in the specification SMPTE RP 165-1994, ‘Error

Detection Checkwords and Status Flags for Use in Bit Serial Digital
Interfaces for Television’.
To check the serial link, three sets of flags are generated at the
transmitter and subsequently regenerated at the receiver (i.e. the
Encoder) to confirm the link is error free. The sets of flags generated are:
• Full field flags, which are based on the regeneration of a cyclic
redundancy check (CRC) checkword calculated over the full field of
samples
• Active picture flags, which are based on the regeneration of a CRC
checkword calculated over the active picture
• Ancillary data checksum flags, which are based on calculating a
checksum for all the ancillary data packets within a field.
Errors detected by the MCE in the serial digital interface are reported as
‘SDI …’ errors on the front panel display. Refer to Annex C, Error
Messages, for a list and description of these error messages.
Multiplexing and Scrambling Functions

The Multiplexer receives packet streams from the Video Compression
Module, Audio Encoders and Data Input Module. In addition, the Host
Processor generates Service Information (SI) packets which are also fed to
the Multiplexer. The Multiplexer generates a transport stream from these
packet sources, and inserts NULL packets in the transport stream if no
data is available.
The transport stream is fed to the S8489 RAS Scrambling Module which
implements the proprietary Remote Authorisation System (RAS 1). This
provides an elementary form of security designed simply to prevent open
access to the transmitted service. RAS 1 supports two methods of key
entry: SNG key mode and fixed link mode.
In SNG key mode, a seven digit key is entered via the front panel controls.
If the receiver is in tracking mode, one key is entered which is
programmed into both the encoder and the receiver. If the receiver is in
independent mode, two keys have to be entered, one for the encoder and
one for the receiver.
In fixed link mode, an eight digit key is assigned by TANDBERG Television
and pre-programmed into the encoder and the receiver.
Scrambling is implemented on the PIDs listed in Table 4.1, and can be
switched on and off under user control
ST.TM.E10033.3
Table 4.1: PID Scrambling
PIDs Scrambled PIDs NOT Scrambled
Packet Type PID (Hex) Packet Type PID (Hex)

Video 0x0134 NULL 0x1FFF
Audio A 0x0100 PCR 0x1FFE
Audio B 0x0101 CA 0x00C0
RS-232 Data 0x0102 PAT 0x0000
RS-422 Data 0x0104 CAT 0x0001
Teletext 0x0111 PMT 0x0020
NIT 0x0010
SDT 0x0011
EIT 0x0012
TDT 0x0014
The output from the RAS Scrambling Module is fed to the Modulator. This
is as a synchronous parallel interface using a 204-byte packet format over
the Backplane to the internal Modulator Module.
4.7.7 Base Board 3ASI (Motherboard) S8475

Functions
The S8475 Base Board 3ASI (Motherboard) is responsible for all the
non-video compression functions of the MCE. It has the following main
functions.
Host Processor
The host is the main control processor in the MCE. It is a Motorola 68360
processor running at 33 MHz with external DRAM on SIM and flash for
storing code. It communicates with the outside world via an Ethernet, Host
Status port or the front panel and keypad. At power on, the host boots
from the flash, copying its code into DRAM to run. It can be reset if the
voltage is too low, or if the switch is pressed, or if it detects a bus error.
The host takes instructions from the rest of the world via its interfaces and
uses these to control the other elements of the unit. It passes instructions
to the other elements through its dual port RAM interfaces. Another task of
the host is to generate SI.
Video Switch
The video switch selects between the two possible sources of video; SDI,
or analogue video.
Preprocessor
The preprocessor operates on the 656 video stream selected by the video
switch. It carries out such functions as Teletext extraction, noise
reduction, filtering, VBI extraction, test pattern generation and forward
prediction (3/2 pull down detection etc.) and embedded audio extraction.
The output of the preprocessor is still 656 video ready for encoding, and
any extracted AES/EBU audio. The preprocessor communicates with the
host via a dual port RAM.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Audio Input and Switch

The audio input consists of two channels, A and B, each capable of
AES/EBU digital audio and analogue audio. The analogue input stage
performs termination, gain control and Analogue to Digital (A/D)
conversion. The output of the A/D converter is I2S audio.
The digital input is received by an AES/EBU receive chip which converts
the input to I2S which is then passed through an Asynchronous Sample
Rate converter. The audio switch chooses from the sources and selects one
for compression.
Audio Encoders
The audio encoders are DSP circuits. The DSP has its own RAM and
communicates to the host via a dual port RAM. The input to the DSP is I2S
digital audio samples, the output is transport packets written into a First
In, First Out (FIFO) buffer.
Multiplexer
The function of the multiplexer is to take all of the individual sources of
packets within the unit and form them into a transport stream (video,
audio, SI, Teletext and data) which is output to the QPSK Modulator
Module.
4.7.8 E4 Video Compression Module (S8652)

Microprocessor
The S8652 E4 Video Compression Module is controlled by a
microprocessor. The microprocessor boots from the flash memory chips.
Associated with the microprocessor are an address decoder and local RAM.
The microprocessor communicates with the Base Board 3ASI
(Motherboard) via the dual port RAM. The interface is used to pass
information such as bit-rate and line standard between the Base Board
3ASI (Motherboard) microprocessor and the local microprocessor.
E4 Compression Chips
The E4 compression chips take video from the Base Board 3ASI
(Motherboard) via a 96-way edge connector. The two E4s (if both are
fitted) communicate with each other via a four-bit wide IPC interface. The
compressed video data is passed to the rate buffer.
Rate Buffer
The XILINX IC, (which controls the Video Compression Module), reads the
data from the rate buffer in single eight-bit wide words from each of the
eight field stores in turn. The data is packetised by the XILINX IC and the
resulting packets are written to the output FIFO where the multiplexer can
access them.
ST.TM.E10033.3
4.7.9 Frequency Agile QPSK Modulator (S10949)

The S10949 Modulator Module plugs into the MCE chassis and receives the
transport stream from the multiplexer on the Base Board 3ASI
(Motherboard) over a synchronous parallel interface in 204-byte packet
format on the Backplane. The Modulator performs energy-dispersal
scrambling, Reed-Solomon encoding, convolutional interleaving,
convolutional encoding, symbol mapping, baseband shaping and
modulation in accordance with the EN 300 421 specification.
The Modulator Module provides a main and monitoring IF output. The main
IF output forms the IF output from the MCE system, and the monitoring IF
output is fed to external monitoring equipment if required. The Modulator
Module includes a facility for switching off both the IF outputs, either
under user control or automatically in response to an internal fault
condition being detected. Note that the IF outputs cannot be switched
individually. Modulation may also be switched off to facilitate measurement
of the output power level.
The Modulator Module is controlled and monitored by the Host Processor.
4.8 Slot 4 Options

4.8.1 Internal Remux Module (S10655)
Introduction
This section should be used as a practical guide to using the Internal
Remux Module (S10655). Error! Bookmark not defined.A top-level
overview of the design is presented as this is the simplest way to clarify all
the specific points.
Overview
The Remultiplexer is capable of combining four inputs. Three inputs are in
the form of ASI feeds to the rear panel, the fourth input is fed from the
host encoder (or primary encoder). This basic configuration, using a single
stage of remultiplexing, means that four encoder services (or streams) can
be combined together in the IF Output, see Figure 4.4.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Up-link equipment
(including
Up-converter and
High Power
Contributing Amplifier)
Encoders Tx
VIDEO (ANALOGUE) Primary (Master)
VIDEO (DIGITAL) Encoder E5500
AUDIO Service 2
SYNC DATA with Remux
ASYNC DATA
DVB ASI
VIDEO (ANALOGUE)
VIDEO (DIGITAL) DVB ASI
AUDIO Service 3
SYNC DATA *IF Output
ASYNC DATA DVB ASI Service 1
VIDEO (ANALOGUE)
VIDEO (ANALOGUE)
VIDEO (DIGITAL)
VIDEO (DIGITAL)
AUDIO
AUDIO Service 4 SYNC DATA *NOTE…
SYNC DATA
ASYNC DATA
ASYNC DATA IF Output contains 4 services:
Service 1 + Service 2 + Service 3 + Service 4.
Figure 4.4: Single Stage Remultiplexing
Similarly, if two stages of remultiplexing are introduced, thirteen encoders

can be combined, providing up to thirteen services in the remultiplexed IF
output. This is the maximum number of services that can be provided
using this system, see Figure 4.5.
Contributing Up-link equipment

E5500 Encoder
Encoders (including
with Remux Up-converter and
Service 2
ASI (x3) High Power
ASI (x4) Amplifier)
Service 3 Service 1 Tx
Service 4
E5500 Encoder
with Remux
Contributing
E5500 Encoder
Encoders
with Remux
Service 6
ASI (x3)
ASI (x4) *IF Output
Service 7 Service 5 Service 13
Service 8
*NOTE…
Contributing E5500 Encoder IF Output contains 13 services.
Encoders with Remux
Service 10
ASI (x3)
ASI (x4)
Service 11 Service 9
Service 12
Figure 4.5: Two Stage Remultiplexing
ST.TM.E10033.3
Function of Remultiplexer
It is the function of the Remultiplexer to combine the locally generated
host services with the externally supplied input services, connected via ASI
to the rear of the unit. By doing so the Remultiplexer will automatically
remap PIDs if they clash. Service names that clash will also be
automatically remapped and timestamps adjusted if necessary.
A block diagram is provided, see Figure 4.6.
Host Mux
Video
Video
Encoder
Audio Host
Audio Encoder Mux
Rate
Dual Port
Remux Ram
ASI
Remultiplexer
Input Output
Bit-rate Modulator
Remux IF Output
QPSK
ASI
Input
Remux
ASI
Input
Figure 4.6: Remultiplexer Block Diagram
Using the Remultiplexer

The user should connect DVB transport streams that are to be combined
(remultiplexed) to the ASI inputs on the rear of the unit (DVB ASI IN 1, 2
and 3).
NOTE…
At the time of publication, only transport streams generated by TANDBERG Television equipment are
guaranteed to work when fed to the Remultiplexing Module.
The equipment will automatically detect the services on these inputs and
combine them into the output stream. The service names of the detected
and combined services will then appear in the service list. (This can be
viewed using the Setup/Mux/Services menu).
ST.TM.E10033.3
Each new service automatically defaults to ‘On’ and is enabled through to

the output. The user can select the desired service, (by manually selecting
it), and choose to have the service either ‘On’ or ‘Off’. (If the RAS card is
fitted, the choice will be ‘On’, ‘On and Scrambled’ or ‘Off’). If the service is
set to ‘Off’ then all trace of the service is removed from the output stream.
Setting Bit-rates and Avoiding Overflow

Overflow is the condition in which the total of the contributing service bit-
rates, (including the host mux), exceeds the output bit-rate of the primary
remultiplexing unit.
NOTE…
Only useful packets (e.g video, audio and data, etc) count towards the bit-rate of the contributing
service bit-rates, not null packets.
The easiest way to configure the bit-rates to avoid overflow, is as follows:

1) Divide the 188 byte output bit-rate of the primary (master)
remultiplexing unit, (this can be found in the Setup/Mux/Host
Menu/O/P Rate (188) menu), by the number of contributing services
(including the primary service). Such that:
O/P Rate (188) / N = Host Rate (188)
[Where N = number of services to be combined including primary]
2) Then set the Host Rates (188) of each contributing unit and the master
unit to equal the calculated Host Rate.
NOTE…
Use the Setup/Mux/Host Menu/Host Rate (188) menu.
If the above procedure is followed, an equal bit-rate is allocated to each

contributing unit. By setting the host rates, the video and audio bit-rates
will be automatically adjusted to suit.
The amount of spare bit-rate and input bit-rate that has been used in the
Remultiplexer can be monitored using the bar graph indicators in the
Setup/Mux/Services menu.
What to do if Overflow Occurs

If an ‘Overflow Error’ is indicated on the equipment, then the incoming
contributing bit-rate exceeds the outgoing bit-rate. To avoid corruption the
user must reduce the incoming bit-rate by either removing services, (turn
the service ‘Off’ or remove the ASI input), or reducing the bit-rate of the
incoming service.
ST.TM.E10033.3
4.8.2 RAS Scrambling Module S8489

The RAS Module (M2/EOM1/RAS) is used to scramble the services in a
transport stream so that unauthorised users are denied access. It uses
TANDBERG Television’s proprietary Remote Authorisation System (RAS 1)
which supports two methods of key entry: SNG Key mode or Fixed Link
operation.
In SNG Key mode, a seven digit key is entered via the front panel on the
Encoder. In Fixed Link mode, an 8 digit key is assigned by TANDBERG
Television and pre-programmed into the Encoder and Receiver. Scrambling
can be switched on and off under user control.
The input to the module is the Motherboard Multiplexer output via the
backplane. The output is presented on the backplane as well as three
dedicated ASI outputs. The backplane output is used when further
processing is to be performed on the scrambled transport stream.
Examples of the backplane output being used would be when a RAS
Module is used in conjunction with an Internal QPSK Module or an ATM
Network Interface Module. Three ASI outputs are provided, so that in
addition to the output, both monitor and redundancy connections can be
catered for.
ST.TM.E10033.3
BLANK
ST.TM.E10033.3
Chapter 5
5. Preventive Maintenance
and Fault-finding
Contents
Parameters Cannot be Adjusted................... 5-9
5.1 Introduction................................................................5-3
Commands are not Carried Out.................. 5-10
5.2 Preventive Maintenance ............................................5-3 5.4.7 Video Channel Problems ............................ 5-10
5.2.1 Routine Inspection ........................................5-3 5.4.8 Audio Channel Problems ............................ 5-11
Cooling Fans.................................................5-3 5.4.9 Data Channel Problems.............................. 5-11
5.2.2 Cleaning........................................................5-3 5.4.10 Alarm(s) Indicated but Signals are Good.... 5-12
5.2.3 Servicing .......................................................5-4 5.4.11 Power Supply Problems/LED Unlit ............. 5-13
Damage Requiring Service ...........................5-4 Introduction................................................. 5-13
Replacement Parts........................................5-4 Power LED Unlit ......................................... 5-13
Checks on Completion of Servicing ..............5-4 Fan(s) Not Working/Overheating................ 5-13
5.3 Maintenance and Support Services...........................5-4 5.5 Rate Buffer Setting.................................................. 5-14
5.3.1 Warranty........................................................5-4
5.6 Disposing of this Equipment.................................... 5-14
5.3.2 Levels of Continuing TANDBERG
Television Service Support ...........................5-5 5.6.1 General....................................................... 5-14
5.6.2 Lithium Batteries......................................... 5-14
5.4 Fault-finding...............................................................5-6
5.4.1 Fault-finding Philosophy................................5-6
List of Tables
Table 5.1: Fuse Information ...........................................................5-7
5.4.2 Preliminary Checks .......................................5-6
Table 5.2: Video Channel Fault-finding........................................5-10
5.4.3 Fuse Replacement........................................5-7
Table 5.3: Audio Channel Fault-finding........................................5-11
5.4.4 Error Reporting..............................................5-8 Table 5.4: Data Channel Fault-finding..........................................5-12
Categories of Error........................................5-8 Table 5.5: Power LED Unlit Fault-finding .....................................5-13
Alarm and Fail Relays ...................................5-8 Table 5.6: Fans Not Working/Overheating...................................5-13
5.4.5 Error Messages.............................................5-8 Table 5.7: Rate Buffer Settings ....................................................5-14
5.4.6 Front Panel Problems ...................................5-9
Introduction ...................................................5-9
Screen is Blank .............................................5-9
Area of the Screen is Permanently Blank
or Lit ..............................................................5-9
Softkeys or Keypad Keys are Not
Functioning....................................................5-9
Password Does Not Work / Forgotten...........5-9
ST.TM.E10033.3
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
BLANK
ST.TM.E10033.3
5.1 Introduction
This chapter provides the schedules and instructions, where applicable, for
routine inspection, cleaning and maintenance of the E5500 Mobile
Contribution Encoder (MCE) which should be performed by an operator.
There are also some basic fault-finding procedures to follow in the event of
a suspected MCE failure.
5.2 Preventive Maintenance

5.2.1 Routine Inspection
Cooling Fans
This equipment must never be operated unless all the cooling fans are
working. They should be checked whenever the MCE is switched on and
periodically thereafter.
NOTES...
1. Failure to ensure a free flow of air around the unit may cause overheating. This condition is
detected by a temperature sensor on the Base Board 3ASI (Motherboard), which causes the
alarm relay to be energised.
2. If the MCE is installed in a position in which the fans cannot be easily checked, check the Fans
parameter on the Status/System/General Menu (see Chapter 3, Operating the Equipment
Locally) to confirm the operation of the fans. This menu also contains a Temperature parameter
which shows the temperature inside the MCE chassis.
5.2.2 Cleaning
Unplug the MCE from the wall outlet before cleaning the exterior with a
damp cloth. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.
NOTE…
Only the exterior of the case should be cleaned.
ST.TM.E10033.3
5.2.3 Servicing
Damage Requiring Service
WARNING…
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THIS PRODUCT AS OPENING OR REMOVING COVERS MAY
EXPOSE DANGEROUS VOLTAGES OR OTHER HAZARDS. REFER ALL SERVICING TO SERVICE
PERSONNEL WHO HAVE BEEN AUTHORISED BY TANDBERG TELEVISION
DO NOT REMOVE ANY MODULES FROM THIS EQUIPMENT AS DOING SO MAY INVALIDATE ANY
WARRANTIES AND/OR AFFECT THE EMC PERFORMANCE. ENERGY HAZARDS1 EXIST ON THE
BACKPLANE AT THE FRONT OF THE CARD COMPARTMENT.
Unplug the equipment from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified
service personnel under the following conditions:
1. When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged.
2. If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the product.
3. If the product has been exposed to rain or water.
4. If the product does not operate normally by following the operating
instructions.
5. If the product has been dropped or the case has been damaged.
6. When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance.
Replacement Parts
When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has
used parts specified by the manufacturer or which have the same
characteristics as the original part. Unauthorised substitutions may result
in fire, electric shock or other hazards.
Checks on Completion of Servicing

Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product, ask the service
technician to perform safety checks to determine that the product is in a
safe operating condition. Also, performance and EMC checks may be
required.
5.3 Maintenance and Support Services

5.3.1 Warranty
The equipment is covered by a standard TANDBERG Television warranty
service for a period of 12 months from delivery.
The warranty covers the following:
• All material defects in the equipment for a period of 12 months;
• All parts and labour charges;
• All returned items will be repaired within 30 working days from receipt
at the customer care centre;
• Return of the repaired item to the customer, postage paid;
1
‘Energy hazard’ is defined in IEC 950 / EN60950 para 1.2.8.7.
ST.TM.E10033.3
• Provide assistance to the customer through the Customer Help Line

number (see the Customer Services information at the front of this
manual).
The warranty does not cover any engineering visit(s) to the customer’s
premises.
5.3.2 Levels of Continuing TANDBERG Television Service

Support
TANDBERG Television offers three levels of continuing support. These
include Bronze Support, designed to provide extended warranty cover at
low cost, plus two additional enhanced levels of support. A brief overview
is given as follows:
• Gold Support Contract
24 hr x 7 days telephone support;
Remote diagnostics
Advanced exchange facility for repair (24 hour dispatch)
Unlimited on-site support visits Account focused engineer
Quarterly service performance reviews
TANDBERG Television on-site installation of software enhancements
Software maintenance releases
Discounted software enhancements
Two preventive maintenance visits per year
Discount on pre-designed training courses
• Silver Support Contract
Remote diagnostics
Six on-site support visits
Half Yearly service performance reviews
15 working day turnaround for repair
Two preventive maintenance visits per year
Discount on predesigned training courses
• Bronze Support Contract
Remote diagnostics;
30 day turnaround for repair
Firmware revision control at a repair centre
Yearly service performance review.
Silver and Bronze contracts can be further enhanced with the inclusion of a
Software Contract. Gold Support Contracts are all inclusive.
More information can be obtained from TANDBERG Television Customer
Services; contact information is given in the preliminary pages of this
manual.
ST.TM.E10033.3
5.4 Fault-finding
5.4.1 Fault-finding Philosophy
It is the objective of this chapter to provide sufficient information to enable
the operator to rectify apparent faults or else to identify the suspect
module, where possible. Some basic procedures are given to follow in the
event of a suspected MCE failure. It is assumed that fault-finding has
already been performed at a system level and that other equipment units
have been eliminated as the possible cause of the failure (If the MCE is
part of a system supplied by TANDBERG Television, see the relevant
System Manual).
WARNING…
DO NOT REMOVE THE COVERS OF THIS EQUIPMENT. HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT
WITHIN THIS EQUIPMENT AND MAY BE EXPOSED IF THE COVERS ARE REMOVED. ONLY
TANDBERG TELEVISION TRAINED AND APPROVED SERVICE ENGINEERS ARE PERMITTED TO
SERVICE THIS EQUIPMENT.
CAUTION…
Do not remove the covers of this equipment. Unauthorised maintenance or the use of non-approved
replacements may affect the equipment specification and invalidate any warranties.
This manual does not include any maintenance information or procedures,

which would require the removal of covers.
If the following information fails to clear the abnormal condition, call a
Service Engineer or contact Customer Services using the information given
in the preliminary pages of this manual.
5.4.2 Preliminary Checks

Always investigate the failure symptoms fully, prior to taking remedial
action. Fault diagnosis for the equipment operator is limited to the
following tasks, since the operator should NOT remove the covers of the
equipment:
1. Monitor the equipment status using the display screen error messages.
2. Check the front panel Power LED. If this is not lit:
a) Replace the fuse in the power connector at the rear panel (see
Chapter 2, Section 2.4.2 User Accessible Fuse Replacement).
NOTE…
Only replace the fuse once. If it blows again contact Customer Services.
b) Replace external equipment, power source and cables by

substitution to check their performance.
3. Check that the MCE Base Board 3ASI (Motherboard) and modules are
all firmly seated in the chassis. See Chapter 4, Figure 4.3 for the
position of the Base Board 3ASI (Motherboard) and modules.
4. Check that the equipment has been correctly installed (see Chapter 2,
Installing the Equipment).
ST.TM.E10033.3
5. Check that the equipment configuration is correct for the types of input
signals and for the required output (see Chapter 3, Operating the
Equipment Locally).
6. Perform the self-tests using the built-in facilities provided by the
Diagnostics Menu as necessary (see Chapter 3, Operating the
Equipment Locally).
7. Confirm that inappropriate operator action is not causing the problem,
and that the equipment software set-up is capable of performing the
task being asked of it. If the validity of the configuration, set-up or
operation is in doubt, check it (see Chapter 3, Operating the Encoder
Locally).
8. Check that the fans are unobstructed and working correctly.
When the failure condition has been fully investigated, and the symptoms
are known, proceed with fault-finding according to the observed
symptoms. If the fault persists, and cannot be rectified using the
instructions given in this manual, contact Customer Services. Switch off
the equipment if it becomes unusable, or to protect it from further
damage.
5.4.3 Fuse Replacement

A fuse is held in an integral fuse carrier at the ac power inlet at the rear
panel.
Table 5.1: Fuse Information
Item Specification
Fuse position Fuse in live conductor in power input filter at rear of unit
Fuse size 5 x 20 mm
Fuse current rating, voltage 5 A, 250 Vac T HBC
Fuse type Littel fuse (215 series) or Bussman S505 series (equivalent)
IEC 127, part 2, sheet 5
NOTE…
Refer to Annex B, Section B.5, Power Supply for more information.
To replace the ac power fuse:
WARNING…
BEFORE REPLACING THE REAR PANEL FUSE, DISCONNECT THE UNIT FROM THE SUPPLY.
FAILURE TO DO THIS MAY EXPOSE HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES. UNPLUG THE UNIT FROM THE
LOCAL SUPPLY SOCKET.
1. Ensure that power is turned off and the power cable is disconnected
from the ac power inlet.
2. Ease out the fuse carrier by placing a small, flat-bladed screwdriver in
the notch at the side of the carrier.
CAUTION...
When replacing the power input fuse, always ensure that a fuse of the correct type and rating, is fitted.
Failure to do so results in inadequate protection.
ST.TM.E10033.3
3. Replace the fuse in the carrier.

4. Insert the fuse carrier back in the ac power inlet.
If required, use a small flat-bladed
screwdriver in the notch at the side
of the carrier to ease it out.
AC Power Inlet
Fuse Carrier
Figure 5.1: Orientation of Fuse Carrier
If the replacement fuse also blows, do not continue. Disconnect the

equipment and contact Customer Services for advice.
5.4.4 Error Reporting

Categories of Error
Equipment status is monitored continuously, and error messages are
displayed on the front panel display screen in the event of a fault, or if
poor operating procedure results in equipment capacity being exceeded.
Relay contacts are also provided.
Two categories of error may be indicated:
1. FAIL – a hardware or software failure condition – a condition that
should never occur during the normal operating life of the equipment.
Failures cause both the alarm and fail relays to be triggered and the
front panel Alarm LED to be lit.
2. ALARM – an alarm condition – a condition which is unusual but which
may occur during normal operation (such as loss of video input).
Alarms cause the alarm relay only to be triggered and the front panel
Alarm LED to be lit.
Alarm and Fail Relays

Alarm and fail relays are switched in response to detected error conditions.
Relay contacts are available at the rear panel ALARM connector (see
Chapter 2, Installing the Equipment for connector details) to enable the
equipment status to be monitored from a remote location.
5.4.5 Error Messages

Whenever an error occurs the current display is replaced by an error
message display. The display of error messages may be suppressed using
the Display Errors option on the Setup/System/General Menu – see
Chapter 3, Operating the Equipment Locally. A typical error message
display is shown in Figure 5.2. The error message gives the error type
(alarm or fail), the module affected, and a description of the error.
Softkeys displayed if
Errors there is more than
one error. Use them
Type: Alarm PgUp to scroll through the
error screens.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Module: Motherboard PgDn

Desc: Video Input Lock *
Quit Press to clear the
error message
immediately.
Figure 5.2: Typical Error Message Display
The error message clears after a few seconds. If there is more than one
error, use the ↓PgDn and ↑PgUp softkeys to step through the error
screens. Press the Quit softkey to clear the error message immediately;
the front panel Alarm LED will remain lit. To view any current error
messages again, use the Errors Menu.
The error messages which may be displayed are listed in Annex C,
together with an indication of the cause of the error and any action the
operator can take to correct the error.
5.4.6 Front Panel Problems

Introduction
Use the following techniques to troubleshoot the MCE when the front panel
display and keys are not functioning as expected. If the front panel Alarm
LED is displayed accompanied by an error message, then troubleshoot in
accordance with the message (see Section 5.4.5, Error Messages).
Self-test diagnostic functions are described in Chapter 3, Operating the
Equipment Locally.
If the actions described below fail to clear the fault symptoms, call a
Service Engineer or contact Customer Services.
Screen is Blank
If the screen is blank, check that the front panel Power LED is lit. If it is
not, refer to Section 5.4.11, Power Supply Problems/LED Unlit.
Area of the Screen is Permanently Blank or Lit

If an area of the screen is suspect (either permanently blank or lit),
perform a self-test using the LCD Display option on the
Diagnostics/Front Panel Menu.
Softkeys or Keypad Keys are Not Functioning

If the front panel Power LED is not lit, refer to Section 5.4.11, Power
Supply Problems/LED Unlit.
If a softkey or keypad key appears not to be functioning, perform a self-
test using the Keyboard option on the Diagnostics/Front Panel Menu.
Password Does Not Work / Forgotten

In the event that a password used on the equipment does not work or has
been forgotten, contact Customer Services.
Parameters Cannot be Adjusted

If parameters cannot be adjusted on-screen, check the following:
ST.TM.E10033.3
1. Check that you are using the relevant Setup Menu. Changes cannot be
made to the parameters shown in the Status Menus.
2. Check that the keys are functioning. Perform a self-test using the
Keyboard option on the Diagnostics/Front Panel Menu.
Commands are not Carried Out

If changes to parameters entered at the front panel menus are seemingly
not carried out, check that the changes to the parameter settings and
values are accepted by the equipment. The Enter softkey must be pressed
after a parameter has been adjusted in order to implement the changes
which have been selected.
5.4.7 Video Channel Problems

In the event of video channel problems, if video has been lost altogether
or performance is degraded, use Table 5.2 to troubleshoot the MCE. In the
event of persistent problems call a Service Engineer or Customer Services.
Table 5.2: Video Channel Fault-finding
Step Action If Result of Action is Yes… If Result of Action is No…

1 Check for Error/Alarm Indications. Is an Fault-find according to the displayed Proceed to next step.
error message displayed? message (see Annex C). Try to identify the
source of the problem and the knock-on
effects.
2 Check Video Input and Cables. Check Check the Status/Video/Source Check the video cables by swapping
the video source is functioning correctly by Menu to confirm that the video signal is them with ones of known quality/
connecting it directly to local monitoring properly synchronised. Check the input performance, to see whether it is a
equipment. Is the video signal present/ cables by swapping them with ones of cable problem. If the cables are fine,
clean? known quality/performance, to see whether fault-find the video source.
it is a cable problem. A freeze frame or
black output is indicative of video loss at
the input.
3 Check Configuration. Is the configuration Proceed to next step. If in doubt about the configuration, load
valid? Is there sufficient output power, error a configuration which has previously
correction, FEC? Is the correct input type proven successful, and try again. Try
set? Output scrambled? Are the temporarily turning off any audio/data
parameters which have been selected, services and reconfigure the equipment
workable? (see Getting Started in Chapter using the auto-calculation and selection
3, Operating the Equipment Locally) mode. This will give better bit-rate and
resolution to the video channel.
4 Check Video Input Circuits. Insert a video Possible problem with the video input Proceed to next step.
signal of known quality/performance or use circuits. Call a Service Engineer.
the Setup/Video/Source Menu to
insert a test pattern or choose a different
video source. Is the problem fixed?
ST.TM.E10033.3

5 Check Receiver and Cables. Are the Possible problem with the Receiver or Proceed to next step.
problems only exhibited on the monitoring associated cables. Check the rear panel
Receiver output and not on the transmitted cables connecting the Receiver by
signal? swapping them for ones of known quality/
performance. Call a Service Engineer.
6 Check Video Encoder Circuits. Picture Try a different coding mode and see which If the fault persists, call a Service
distortion may indicate a possible problem areas of the picture are distorting. Call a Engineer.
with the MPEG-2 video encoder circuits. Is Service Engineer.
the picture distorted?
5.4.8 Audio Channel Problems

In the event of audio channel problems, if audio has been lost altogether
or performance is degraded, use Table 5.3 to fault-find the MCE. If the
video channel is also affected, troubleshoot as detailed in Section 5.4.7,
Video Channel Problems. In the event of persistent problems call a Service
Engineer or contact Customer Services.
Table 5.3: Audio Channel Fault-finding

1 Check for Error/Alarm Indications. Is an Troubleshoot according to the displayed Proceed to next step.
effects.
2 Check Audio Input and Cables. Check Check the audio level bargraphs on the Check the audio cables by swapping
the audio source is functioning correctly by Status/Audio (Channel n) Menu them with ones of known quality/
connecting it directly to local monitoring to confirm that the audio signal is being performance, to see whether it is a
equipment. Is the audio signal present/ received. Check the input cables by cable problem. If the cables are fine,
clean? swapping them with ones of known fault-find the audio source.
quality/performance, to see whether it is a
cable problem.
valid? Are the parameters which have been a configuration which has previously
selected, workable? (see Getting Started in proven successful, and try again.
Chapter 3, Operating the Equipment
Locally)
4 Check Receiver and Cables. Are the Possible problem with the Receiver or If the fault persists, call a Service
problems only exhibited on the monitoring associated cables. Check the rear panel Engineer.
performance. If the fault persists, call a
Service Engineer.
5.4.9 Data Channel Problems

In the event of data channel problems, if data has been lost altogether or
performance is degraded, use Table 5.4 to troubleshoot the MCE. If the
video channel is also affected, fault-find as detailed in Section 5.4.7, Video
Channel Problems. In the event of persistent problems call a Service
Engineer or contact Customer Service.
NOTE...
Data inputs are not compressed by the MCE.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Table 5.4: Data Channel Fault-finding

1 Check for Error/Alarm Indications. Is an Troubleshoot according to the displayed Proceed to next step.
effects.
2 Check Data Input and Cables. Check the Check the input cables by swapping them Check the input cables by swapping
data source is functioning correctly by with ones of known quality/performance, to them with ones of known quality/
connecting it directly to local monitoring see whether it is a cable problem. performance, to see whether it is a
equipment. Is the data signal present/ cable problem. If the cables are fine,
clean? fault-find the data source.
valid? Are the parameters which have been a configuration which has previously
selected, workable? (see Getting Started in proven successful, and try again.
Locally)
4 Check Receiver and Cables. Are the Possible problem with the Receiver or If the fault persists, call a Service
problems only exhibited on the monitoring associated cables. Check the rear panel Engineer.
performance. If the fault persists, call a
Service Engineer.
5.4.10 Alarm(s) Indicated but Signals are Good

If the front panel Alarm LED is displayed, accompanied by an error
message, then troubleshoot in accordance with the message (see Section
5.4.5, Error Messages).
If the MCE alarm is raised but video, audio and data transmission appear
to be unaffected, this suggests that there is a very localised problem with
functions not currently in use. In the event of persistent problems call a
Service Engineer or contact Customer Services.
ST.TM.E10033.3
5.4.11 Power Supply Problems/LED Unlit

Introduction
Use the following techniques to fault-find the MCE according to the
observed symptom(s) when a power supply failure is suspected.
Power LED Unlit

If the MCE Power LED is unlit, fault-find the problem as detailed in
Table 5.5.
Table 5.5: Power LED Unlit Fault-finding

1 Check Power LED. Is the MCE still If the MCE is clearly working normally then Proceed to next step.
working? the Power LED itself is probably at fault.
Call a Service Engineer.
2 Check AC Power Source. Connect a The problems lies within the MCE or power The problem lies with the ac power
known-working piece of equipment to the cable. Proceed to next step. source. Check circuit breakers, fuse
power source outlet. Does it work? boxes, etc.
3 Check Power Cable and Fuse. Unplug The problems lies within the MCE. Proceed The problem lies with either the cable
the power cable from the MCE and try it in to next step. itself, or with the fuse in the plug.
another piece of equipment. Does it work? Replace the fuse or try to substitute
another cable.
4 Check PSU Module and Fuse. Ensure the Replace the fuse with one of the correct Possible problem with the PSU module,
power connector is unplugged. Remove the type and rating (see Annex B, Technical call a Service Engineer.
fuse from the rear panel connector and Specification). If the PSU still does not
inspect it. Has the fuse blown? work, unplug the power cable and call a
Service Engineer.
Fan(s) Not Working/Overheating

This equipment is forced air cooled and must not be operated unless all
cooling fans are working. In the event of overheating problems, refer to
Table 5.6.
NOTE…
Failure to ensure a free air flow around the unit may cause overheating. This condition is detected by a
temperature sensor on the Base Board 3ASI (Motherboard) which triggers an automatic alarm.
Table 5.6: Fans Not Working/Overheating

1 Check Fan Rotation. Inspect the fans Check that the MCE has been installed Possible break in the dc supply from the
located at the sides of the enclosure. Are with sufficient space allowed for air flow PSU module to the suspect fan(s). Call
the fans rotating? (see Chapter 2, Installing the Equipment). If a Service Engineer.
If the MCE is installed in a position in which the ambient air is too hot, additional cooling
the fans cannot be easily checked, check may be required.
the Fans parameter on the
Status/System/General Menu (see
Locally) to confirm the operation of the
fans. This menu also contains a
Temperature parameter which shows
the temperature inside the MCE chassis.
ST.TM.E10033.3
5.5 Rate Buffer Setting

The MCE, when running in 4:2:2 mode, has two software-selectable rate
buffer modes; small and medium.
When transmitting 4:2:2 mode into systems using the earlier System 3000
PRO IRD M2/PSR/3/422BAS then the rate buffer mode of the MCE must be
set to 'small'.
However, when operating into an Alteia the rate buffer mode of the MCE
must be set to ‘medium’ (default size).
When operating in mixed environments, both the Alteia and the MCE must
be changed to small buffer mode.
NOTE…
These settings can be changed using the VT100 not the front panel menus. Contact Customer
Services for advice (see Preliminary Pages).
Table 5.7: Rate Buffer Settings
MCE Setting Alteia Setting

PRO IRD SMALL -
Alteia only MEDIUM MEDIUM
Alteia and PRO IRD SMALL SMALL
NOTE…
Mobile encoders are factory set to use a small rate buffer. If they are not connected to PRO IRDs then
the rate buffer mode may be set to medium.
5.6 Disposing of this Equipment

5.6.1 General
Dispose of this equipment safely at the end of its life. Local codes and/or
environmental restrictions may affect its disposal. Regulations, policies
and/or environmental restrictions differ throughout the world. Contact your
local jurisdiction or local authority for specific advice on disposal.
5.6.2 Lithium Batteries

The equipment uses the Dallas Semiconductor NVRAM DS1644-12
(referred to as NVRAM within this manual). This component contains a
Lithium battery. This battery is not a USA Environmental Protection Agency
listed hazardous waste. It is fully encapsulated, not user serviceable and
should not be tampered with.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Annex A
A. Glossary
The following list covers most of the abbreviations, acronyms and terms used in
TANDBERG Television Limited Manuals. All terms may not be included in this manual.
µm Micro metres (10-6 metres).

3:2 pulldown A technique used when converting film material (which operates at 24 pictures per second) to 525-line video
(operating at 30 pictures per second).
4:2:0 Digital video coding method in which the colour difference signals are sampled on alternate lines at half the
luminance rate.
4:2:2 Digital video coding method in which the colour difference signals are sampled at half the luminance rate.
5B6B Block code (5 binary bits encoded to 6 binary bits).
ac Alternating Current.
ADPCM (Adaptive Differential A reduced bit-rate variant of PCM audio encoding (see also PCM). This algorithm encodes the difference between
Pulse Code Modulation) an actual audio sample amplitude and a predicted amplitude and adapts the resolution based on recent differential
values.
ACC Authorisation Control Computer.
ADT Audio, Data And Teletext.
AFC Automatic Frequency Control.
AFS Automation File Server.
AGC Automatic Gain Control.
AMOL I and II (Automatic Used by automated equipment to measure programme viewing ratings.
Measure of Lineups I and II)
ASI Asynchronous Serial Interface.
ASIC (Application-Specific A customised chip designed to perform a specific function.
Integrated Circuit)
Async Asynchronous.
ATM (Asynchronous Transfer A source independent transport mechanism, supporting variable bit-rate transmission, which uses fixed length
Mode) packets (called cells) to transfer user data.
ATSC Advanced Television Standards Committee.
B3ZS Interface code (bipolar with three successive zeros substituted). Similar coding scheme to HDB3.
Backward Compatibility A newer coding standard is backward compatible with an older standard if decoders designed to operate with the
older coding standard are able to continue to operate by decoding all or part of a bit-stream produced according to
the newer coding standard.
BAT (Bouquet Association Part of the service information data. The BAT provides information about bouquets. It gives the name of the
Table) bouquet and a list of associated services.
Instruction Manual: evolution 5000 E5500 Mobile Contribution Encoder Page A-1
ST.TM.E10033.3
Glossary
Baud Rate The rate of transfer of digital data when the data comprises information symbols that may consist of a number of
possible states. Equivalent to bit-rate when the symbols only have two states (1 and 0). Measured in Baud.
BCC Broadcast Control Computer.
BER Bit Error Rate: A measure of transmission quality. It is generally shown as a negative exponent, (e.g., 10-7 which
means 1 out of 107 bits are in error or 1 out of 10,000,000 bits are in error).
Also:
Bit Error Ratio: The ratio of error bits to total error bits in a transport stream.
Bit-Rate The rate of transfer of digital data when the data comprises two logic states, 1 and 0. Measured in bit/s.
Block; Pixel Block An 8 row by 8 column matrix of luminance sample values, or 64 DCT coefficients (source, quantised, or
dequantised).
Bouquet A collection of services (TV, radio, and data, or any combination of the three) grouped and sold together, and
identified in the SI as a group. A single service may be in several bouquets.
B-Picture; B-Frame A picture that is coded using motion-compensated prediction from previous I or P frames (forward prediction)
(Bidirectionally Predictive and/or future I or P frames (backwards prediction). B frames are not used in any prediction.
Coded Picture/Frame)
BPSK (Binary Phase Shift A data modulation technique.
Keying)
Buffer A memory store used to provide a consistent rate of data flow.
BW Bandwidth.
CA (Conditional Access) The technology used to control the access to viewing services to authorised subscribers through the transmission
of encrypted signals and the programmable regulation of their decryption by a system such as viewing cards.
CAT (Conditional Access Part of the Service Information data. The CAT identifies the PID in which conditional access management data
Table) (EMMs) is being carried, per CA provider.
C-Band The portion of the electromagnetic spectrum which spans the frequency range of approximately 4 GHz to 6 GHz.
Used by communications satellites. Preferred in tropical climates because it is not susceptible to fading.
CCIR See: ITU-R.
CCITT See: ITU-T.
Channel A particular bandwidth on which an individual viewing service is broadcast.
Channel Coding A form of coding for the conversion of a digital signal into a signal that is matched to the characteristics of the
transmission channel.
Closed Captioning A TV picture subtitling system used with 525-line analogue transmissions.
Codec The combination of a coder followed by a complementary decoder located respectively at the input and output of a
transmission path.
COFDM (Coded Orthogonal A modulation system used particularly for terrestrial digital broadcasting.
Frequency Division Multiplex)
Compression Reduction in the number of bits used to represent an item of data. For the purposes of a broadcast system, it is the
process of reducing digital information by discarding redundant portions of information that are not required upon
reconstitution to produce viewing clarity.
Compression System Responsible for compressing and multiplexing the video/audio/data bit-streams, together with the authorisation
stream. The multiplexed data stream is then transmitted to the satellite or cable head-end.
Cr/Cb Chrominance difference signals. These signals, in combination with the luminance signal (Y), define the colour of a
particular point on a TV line.
CRC (Cyclic Redundancy A mathematical algorithm that computes a numerical value based on the bits in a block of data. This number is
Check) transmitted with the data and the receiver uses this information and the same algorithm to insure the accurate
delivery of data by comparing the results of algorithm and the number received. If a mismatch occurs, an error in
transmission is presumed.
CVBS (Composite Video Analogue TV signals, e.g. PAL, NTSC.
Blanking and Synchronisation)
dB (Decibels) A ratio of one quantity (usually signal power) to another. Common variants are suffixed by an additional letter
signifying that a single power measurement is referenced to a standard value:
dBm - decibels relative to 1 mW
dBW - decibels relative to 1 W.
DCE Data Communications Equipment.
Page A-2 Instruction Manual: evolution 5000 E5500 Mobile Contribution Encoder
ST.TM.E10033.3
Glossary
DCT (Discrete Cosine An invertible, discrete orthogonal transformation. The values associated with blocks of pixel samples are
Transform) transformed from the spatial domain into the frequency domain, producing coefficients in which spatially redundant
information can be removed. Can be forward DCT or inverse DCT.
DDS Direct Digital Synthesiser.
Decoder The unit containing the electronic circuitry necessary to decode encrypted signals. Some decoders are separate
from the receiver but, in satellite TV broadcasting, the term is often used interchangeably as a name for an
Integrated Receiver Decoder (IRD). (The term IRD, or IRD/Decoder, is usually associated with satellite TV
broadcasting while Cable systems are based on Converters or on Set-Top Boxes/Converters.)
Decoding Time-stamp A field that may be present in a PES packet header that indicates the time that an access unit is to be decoded in
the system target decoder.
Differential Coding Method of source coding using the difference between the value of a sample and a predicted value.
DIL Dual In Line.
DIN Deutsches Institut für Normung.
Downlink The part of the communications satellite circuit that extends from the satellite to the Earth.
DPCM (Differential Pulse A process in which a signal is sampled and the difference between each sample of a signal and its predicted value
Code Modulation) is derived from the succession of quantised values is converted by coding into a digital signal.
DSNG Digital Satellite News-Gathering.
DSP Digital Signal Processor.
DTE/DCE (Data Terminal Components in a packet switching network.
Equipment/Data
Communication Equipment)
DTH (Direct To Home) The term used to describe uninterrupted transmission from the satellite directly to the subscriber - that is, no
intermediary cable or terrestrial network utilised.
DVB (Digital Video A European project which has defined transmission standards for digital broadcasting systems using satellite
Broadcasting) (DVB-S), cable (DVB-C) and terrestrial (DVB-T) media, created by the EP-DVB group and approved by the ITU.
Specifies modulation, error correction, etc. (see EN 300 421). DVB-PI refers to DVB Professional Interfaces.
DVB SI Digital Video Broadcasting Service Information.
Earth Technical Earth: Ensures that all equipment chassis within a rack are at the same potential, usually by connecting
a wire between the Technical earth terminal and a suitable point on the rack. This is sometimes known as a
Functional earth.
Protective Earth: Used for electric shock protection. This is sometimes known as a safety earth.
EBU European Broadcast Union.
ECM Entitlement Control Message.
EIA Electronics Industries Association (USA).
EIT (Event Information Table) A component of the Service Information (SI) stream which contains information about events or programmes such
as event name, start time, duration, etc.
Elementary Stream A generic term for a coded video, coded audio or coded other bit-stream.
EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility.
EMM Entitlement Management Message.
Ethernet A means by which machines are connected and communicate over a network.
ETS European Telecommunications Standard.
ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute.
FCC Federal Communications Commission.
FDM (Frequency Division A common communication channel for a number of signals, each with its own allotted frequency.
Multiplex)
FEC Forward Error Correction.
Also:
Future ECM Computer: responsible for preparation of FECMs from Programme Information.
FFT (Fast Fourier A fast algorithm for performing a discrete Fourier transform.
Transformation)
FIFO (First In, First Out) A type of buffer.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Glossary
Footprint The area of the Earth’s surface covered by a satellite’s downlink transmission. Also (generally) the area from
which the satellite can receive uplink transmissions.
FTP File Transfer Protocol.
G.703 The ITU-T standard which defines the physical and electrical characteristics of hierarchical digital interfaces.
GOP (Group of Pictures) MPEG video compression works more effectively by processing a number of video frames as a block. The NDS
System Encoder normally uses a 12 frame GOP, every twelfth frame is an I frame.
GUI Graphical User Interface.
HDTV High Definition Television.
HPA (High Power Amplifier) Used in the signal path to amplify the modulated and up-converted broadcast signal for feeding to the uplink
antenna.
Hub A device in a multipoint network at which branch nodes interconnect.
ICAM (Integrated Conditional Embedded in the IRD and responsible for descrambling and packet filtering and reception. It also contains the
Access Module) physical interface to the subscriber’s viewing card.
IEC International Electrotechnical Committee.
IF (Intermediate Frequency) Usually refers to the 70 MHz or 140 MHz output of the modulator in satellite and cable transmission applications.
Interframe Coding Predictive coding where values for prediction are taken from the previous and the current frame. That is, coding
exploits temporal redundancy by using forward or backward prediction to produce P or B Frames.
Intraframe Coding Coding of a macroblock or picture that uses information only from that macroblock or picture. Exploits spatial
redundancy by using DCT to produce I Frames.
IP Internet Protocol.
I-picture; I-frame (Intracoded A picture/frame which is coded using purely intra coding, with reference to no other field or frame information. The
Picture/Frame) I frame is used as a reference for other compression methods.
IPPV (Impulse Pay Per View) One-time events that the subscriber purchases ‘on impulse’ using pre-arranged credit from the SMS, not as part of
a subscription.
IRD (Integrated Receiver The receiver with an internal decoder which is connected to the subscriber’s TV. The IRD is responsible for
Decoder) receiving and de-multiplexing all signals. The unit receives the incoming signal and decodes it when provided with
a control word by the viewing card. (Domestic IRDs are also known as Set-Top Units or Set-Top Boxes.)
IRE (Institute of Radio No longer in existence but the name lives on as a unit of video amplitude measurement. This unit is 1% of the
Engineers) range between blanking a peak white for a standard amplitude signal.
ISDN (Integrated Services An ISDN line usually refers to a 64 kbit/s data line.
Digital Network)
ISO International Standards Organisation.
ITS (Insertion Test Signal) A suite of analogue test signals placed on lines in the VBI. Also known as VITS.
ITT Invitation To Tender.
ITU-R International Telecommunications Union - Radiocommunications Study Groups (was CCIR).
ITU-T International Telecommunications Union - Telecommunications Standardisation Sector (was CCITT).
JPEG (Joint Photographic An ISO/IEC international standards group developing an image compression algorithm for continuous tone still
Experts Group) colour pictures.
Kbps / kbps 1024 bits per second / 1000 bits per second.
Ku-band The portion of the electromagnetic spectrum which spans the frequency range of approximately 12 GHz to
14 GHz. Used by communications satellites. Preferred for DTH applications because this range of frequency is
less susceptible to interference.
LAN (Local Area Network) A network which provides facilities for communications within a defined building or group of buildings in close
proximity.
L-band The frequency band from 950 MHz to 2150 MHz which is the normal input frequency range of a domestic IRD. The
incoming signal from the satellite is down-converted to L-band by the LNB.
LED Light Emitting Diode.
LNB (Low Noise Block Down- The component of a subscriber satellite transmission receiving dish which amplifies the incoming signal and down-
Converter) converts it to a suitable frequency to input to the IRD (typically 950 MHz - 1600 MHz).
LO Local Oscillator.
LSB Least significant bit.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Glossary
LVDS Low Voltage Differential Signal.

Also:
Low Voltage Differential Serial interface.
Macroblock The four 8 x 8 blocks of luminance data and the two (for 4:2:0 chrominance format), four (for 4:2:2) or eight (for
4:4:4) corresponding 8 x 8 blocks of chrominance data coming from a 16 x 16 section of the luminance component
of the picture. Macroblock can be used to refer to the sample data and to the coded representation of the sample
values and other data elements.
Mbps Mega (million) bits per second.
MCC (Multiplex Control A component of the compression system. Using information from the AFS, the MCC sets up the configuration for
Computer) the multiplexers under its control. An MCC controls the main and backup multiplexer for each transport stream.
MCPC Multiple Channels Per Carrier.
MEM One of the range of Tandberg Television compression system control element products. The MEM holds a model
of the system hardware. Using this model, it controls the individual system elements to configure the output
multiplexes from the incoming elementary streams. The MEM monitors the equipment status and controls any
redundancy switching.
MMDS (Multichannel A terrestrial microwave direct-to-home broadcast transmission system.
Microwave Distribution
System)
Motion Compensation The use of motion vectors to improve the efficiency of the prediction of sample values. The prediction uses motion
vectors to provide offsets into the past and/or future reference frames or fields containing previously decoded
sample values that are used to form the prediction error signal.
Motion Estimation The process of estimating motion vectors in the encoding process.
Motion Vector A two-dimensional vector used for motion compensation that provides an offset from the co-ordinate position in the
current picture or field to the co-ordinates in a reference frame or field.
MP@ML (Main Profile Main A subset of the MPEG-2 standard which supports digital video transmissions from around 2 to 15 Mbit/s over both
Level) satellite and cable channels.
MPEG (Moving Pictures The name of the ISO/IEC working group which sets up the international standards for digital television source
Experts Group) coding.
MPEG-2 Industry standard for video and audio source coding using compression and multiplexing techniques to minimise
video signal bit-rate in preparation for broadcasting. Also known as ISO/IEC 13818 [1]. Supersedes the MPEG-1
standard. The standard is split into layers and profiles defining bit-rates and picture resolutions.
MSB Most significant bit.
MSymbol/s Mega Symbols per second (106 Symbols per second)
Multiplex A number of discrete data streams (typically 8 to 12) from encoders that are compressed together in a single DVB
compliant transport stream for delivery to a modulator.
MUSICAM (Masking pattern An audio bit-rate reduction system relying on sub-band coding and psychoacoustic masking.
adapted Universal Sub-band
Integrated Coding And
Multiplexing)
Mux (Multiplexer) Transmission multiplexer: receives EMMs from the ACC, ECMs from the BCC, video/audio data from the
encoders, and the SI stream from the SIC. It then multiplexes them all into a single DVB-compliant transport
stream, and delivers the signal to the uplink after modulation.
The multiplexer also contains the cypher card which scrambles the services according to the control words
supplied by the BCC.
Network In the context of broadcasting: a collection of MPEG-2 transport stream multiplexes transmitted on a single
delivery system, for example, all digital channels on a specific cable system.
NICAM (Near Instantaneously
Companded Audio Multiplex)
NIT (Network Information Part of the service information data. The NIT provides information about the physical organisation of each
Table) transport stream multiplex, and the characteristics of the network itself (such as the actual frequencies and
modulation being used).
nm Nano metres (10-9 metres).
NTSC (National Television The group which develops standards used in television broadcast systems in the United States. Also adopted in
Systems Committee) other countries (e.g. Mexico, Canada, Japan). This system uses 525 picture lines and a 60 Hz field frequency.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Glossary
NVOD (Near Video On A method of offering multiple showings of movies or events. The showings are timed to start at set intervals,
Demand) determined by the broadcaster. Each showing of a movie or event can be sold to subscribers separately.
NVRAM (Non-volatile Random Memory devices which, although permitting random read/write access, will not lose their information when power
Access Memory) is removed. Stores the default configuration parameters set by the user.
OFDM Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing.
OSD (On-screen display) Messages and graphics, typically originating from the SMS, and displayed on the subscriber’s TV screen by the
IRD, to inform the subscriber of problems or instruct the subscriber to contact the SMS.
Packet A unit of data transmitted over a packet-switching network. A packet consists of a header followed by a number of
contiguous bytes from an elementary data stream.
PAL (Phase Alternation by A colour television broadcasting system developed in Europe that uses 625 picture lines and a 50 Hz field
Line) frequency.
PAT (Program Association Part of the service information data. For each service in the multiplex, the PAT carries the basic mapping of all the
Table) data in the transport stream, associating each programme with a Program Map Table.
PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) A process in which a signal is sampled, each sample is quantised independently of other samples, and the
resulting succession of quantised values is encoded into a digital signal.
PCR (Program Clock A time-stamp in the transport stream from which the decoder timing is derived.
Reference)
Pel (Picture Element) Also known as a pixel.
PES (Packetised Elementary A sequential stream of data bytes that has been converted from original elementary streams of audio and video
Stream) access units and transported as packets. Each PES packet consists of a header and a payload of variable length
and subject to a maximum of 64 kBytes. A time-stamp is provided by the MPEG-2 systems layer to ensure correct
synchronisation between related elementary streams at the decoder.
PID Packet Identifier: the header on a packet in an elementary data stream which identifies that data stream. An
MPEG-2/DVB standard.
Also: Project Initiation Document, Programme ID.
PIN (Personal Identification A password used to control access to programming and to set purchase limits. Each subscriber household can
Number) activate several PINs and may use them to set individual parental rating or spending limits for each family
member.
Pixel; Picture Element The digital representation of the smallest area of a television picture capable of being delineated by the bit-stream.
pk-pk Peak to peak.
PLL Phase-Locked Loop.
PMT (Program Map Table) Part of the Service Information data. Each programme has a PMT which lists the component parts (the elementary
streams of video, audio, etc.) for the various programmes being transmitted.
P-picture/P-frame A picture/frame produced using forward prediction. It contains predictions from either previous I frames or previous
P frames. The P frame is used as a reference for future P or B frames.
ppm Parts per million.
PPV (Pay Per View) A system of payment for viewing services based on a usage/event basis rather than on on-going subscription.
Subscribers must purchase viewing rights for each PPV event that they wish to view. PPV events may be
purchased as IPPV or OPPV (q.v.).
Program A sequence of instructions for a computer.
A concept having a precise definition within ISO 13818-1 (MPEG-2). For a transport stream, the time base is
defined by the PCR. The use of the PCR for timing information creates a virtual channel within the stream.
Programme A linking of one or more events under the control of a broadcaster. For example, football match, news show, film
show. In the MPEG-2 concept, the collection of elementary streams comprising the programme have a common
start and end time. A series of programmes are referred to as events.
PROM (Programmable Read- A device which may be written once with data for permanent storage, and then read whenever required. Special
Only Memory) types of PROM permit the erasure of all data by Ultra Violet light (EPROM) or by application of an electronic signal
(EEPROM).
PS (Program Stream) A combination of one or more PESs with a common timebase.
PSI (Program Specific Consists of normative data which is necessary for the demultiplexing of transport streams and the successful
Information) regeneration of programs. (See also: service information).
PSIP (Program System The ATSC equivalent of SI for DVB.
Information Protocol)
PSK (Phase Shift Keying) A method of modulating digital signals particularly suited to satellite transmission.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Glossary
PSR (Professional Satellite See also: IRD.

Receiver)
PSU Power Supply Unit.
QAM (Quadrature Amplitude A method of modulating digital signals which uses combined techniques of phase modulation and amplitude
Modulation) modulation. It is particularly suited to cable networks.
QPSK (Quadrature Phase A form of phase shift keying modulation using four states.
Shift Keying)
Quantising: Quantisation A process in which the continuous range of values that a quantity may assume is divided into a number of
predetermined adjacent intervals and in which any value within a given interval is represented by a single
predetermined value within the interval.
Also:
A restriction of the number of DCT coefficient values, resulting in a limiting of the luminance and chrominance
information.
RAM (Random Access A volatile storage device for digital data. Data may be written to, or read from, the device as often as required.
Memory) When power is removed, the data it contains is lost.
RF Radio Frequency.
ROM (Read-Only Memory) A non-volatile storage device for digital data. Data has been stored permanently in this device. No further
information may be stored (written) there and the data it holds cannot be erased. Data may be read as often as
required.
RS (Reed Solomon coding) An error detection and correction coding system which is applied to the Transport Stream before transmission to
counter the effects of interference.
RLC (Run Length Coding) Minimisation of the length of a bit-stream by replacing repeated characters with an instruction of the form ‘repeat
character x y times’.
SCPC Single Channel Per Carrier.
Scrambling Alteration of the characteristics of a television signal in order to prevent unauthorised reception of the information
in clear form.
Also:
A process (in digital transmission) used to combine a digital signal with a pseudo-random sequence, producing a
randomised digital signal, conveying the same information, in order to facilitate transmission.
SDT (Service Description Provides information in the SI stream about the services in the system; for example, the name of the service, the
Table) service provider, etc.
SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage (EN 60950).
Set-Top Box (STB) The cable equivalent of the IRD (q.v.).
SFN Single Frequency Network.
SI (Service Information) Digital data describing the delivery system, content and scheduling/timing of broadcast data streams. SI data
provides information to enable the IRD to automatically demultiplex and decode the various streams of
programmes within the multiplex. Specified in ISO/IEC 13818[1].
Smart Card See: Viewing Card.
SMATV (Satellite Mast A distribution system which provides sound and television signals to the households of a building or group of
Antenna Television) buildings, typically used to refer to an apartment block.
SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers.
SMS (Subscriber Management A system which handles the maintenance, billing, control and general supervision of subscribers to conditional
System) access technology viewing services provided through cable and satellite broadcasting. The SMS system provided
by NDS links a number of Users on a LAN with Batch Processors and a File Server providing access to a
Database and a separate dedicated Conditional Access Interface Server which communicates with an
Authorisation Control Centre (ACC).
An SMS can be an automatic (e.g. Syntellect) system where subscribers order entitlements by entering
information via a telephone. Alternatively, an SMS can be a manual system which requires subscribers to speak
with an operator who manually enters their entitlement requests. Some systems support multiple SMSs.
SNG Satellite News-Gathering.
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol.
Spatial Redundancy Information repetition due to areas of similar luminance and/or chrominance characteristics within a single frame.
Removed using DCT and Quantisation (Intra-Frame Coding).
SPI Synchronous Parallel Interface.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Glossary
Statistical Redundancy Data tables are used to assign fewer bits to the most commonly occurring events, thereby reducing the overall
bit-rate. Removed using Run Length Coding and Variable Length Coding.
STB (Set-Top Box) See: IRD.
TAXI (Transparent A proprietary multiplexer interface.
Asynchronous Tx/Rx Interface)
TCP/IP (Transmission Control A set of communications protocols that may be used to connect different types of computers over networks.
Protocol/Internet Protocol)
TDM (Time Division Multiplex) One common, physical communications channel for a number of signals, each with its own allotted time slot.
TDT (Time and Date Table) Part of the Service Information. The TDT gives information relating to the present time and date.
Temporal Redundancy Information repetition due to areas of little or no movement between successive frames. Removed using motion
estimation and compensation (Inter-Frame Coding).
Time-stamp A term that indicates the time of a specific action such as the arrival of a byte or the presentation of a presentation
unit.
Transport Stream A set of packetised elementary data streams and SI streams which may comprise more than one programme, but
with common synchronisation and error protection.
The data structure is defined in ISO/IEC 13818-1 [1] and is the basis of the ETSI Digital Video Broadcasting
standards.
Transport Stream Packet A data structure used to convey information about the transport stream payload.
Header
TS Transport stream. A combination of one or more fixed length PESs with independent timebases into a single
stream.
TSP Transport Stream Processor.
U 44.45 mm (rack height standard).
UART (Universal A device providing a serial interface for transmitting and receiving data.
Asynchronous Receiver
Transmitter)
Upconvert/ Downconvert The process by which the frequency of a broadcast transport stream is shifted to a higher (lower) frequency range.
Uplink The part of the communications satellite circuit that extends from the Earth to the satellite.
UPS (Uninterruptable Power A device that conditions the power supply to equipment to ensure continuous power and the avoidance of power
Supply) surges. It also provides power from batteries, for a short time, in case of mains failure.
UTC Universal Time, Co-ordinated (previously Greenwich Mean Time or GMT).
Also
Unique Title Code.
VITS Vertical Interval Test Signal. See: ITS.
VPS Video Programming System.
WSS (Wide Screen Switching) Data used in wide-screen analogue services which enables a receiver to select the appropriate display mode.
WST World System Teletext.
XILINX A type of programmable Integrated Circuit.
Y (Luminance) Defines the brightness of a particular point on a TV line.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Annex B
B. Technical Specification
Contents
Analogue Composite/Component Input........B-9
B.1 Inputs B-3
Video Performance Figures..........................B-9
B.1.1 Video............................................................ B-3
B.9.2 Data Input Module (S8477).........................B-10
SDI ............................................................... B-3
RS-422 Synchronous Data Input ................B-10
HSYNC IN .................................................... B-3
RS-232 Asynchronous Data Input ..............B-10
Teletext Extraction ....................................... B-3
B.9.3 Frequency Agile QPSK Modulator
B.1.2 Audio............................................................ B-4
(S10949).....................................................B-10
Standard Audio ............................................ B-4
B.9.4 RAS Scrambling Module (S8489)...............B-12
Audio Extraction ........................................... B-4
B.9.5 Internal Remux Module (S10655)...............B-12
B.2 ASI Outputs .............................................................. B-4 Connectors .................................................B-12
LEDs...........................................................B-13
B.3 Control and Monitoring ............................................. B-5
B.3.1 Local Control................................................ B-5 List of Tables
B.3.2 Remote Control............................................ B-5 Table B.1: Serial Digital Video Specification................................. B-3
Ethernet 1 and 2........................................... B-5 Table B.2: HSYNC IN Specification .............................................. B-3
B.3.3 Alarm............................................................ B-5 Table B.3: Standard Audio Input Specification.............................. B-4
B.3.4 Host Status................................................... B-5 Table B.4: Embedded Audio Specification.................................... B-4
B.3.5 Remote Control In........................................ B-6 Table B.5: ASI OUT Specification ................................................. B-4
B.3.6 Remote Control out...................................... B-6 Table B.6: Ethernet Specification.................................................. B-5
Table B.7: Alarm Specification ...................................................... B-5
B.4 Test Tone ................................................................. B-6 Table B.8: Host Status Specification............................................. B-5
Table B.9: Test Tone Specification ............................................... B-6
B.5 Power Supply ........................................................... B-6
Table B.10: AC Power Supply Specification ................................. B-6
B.6 Physical Details ........................................................ B-7 Table B.11: Physical Details ......................................................... B-7
Table B.12: Environmental Specification ...................................... B-7
B.7 Environmental Conditions......................................... B-7
Table B.13: Analogue Video Input Specification ........................... B-9
B.8 Compliance............................................................... B-7 Table B.14: Analogue Video System Performance Figures.......... B-9
B.8.1 Safety........................................................... B-7 Table B.15: RS-422 Synchronous Data Input Specification........ B-10
B.8.2 EMC ............................................................. B-8 Table B.16: RS-232 Asynchronous Data Input Specification...... B-10
B.8.3 CE Marking .................................................. B-8 Table B.17: IF OUT MONITOR Specification.............................. B-10
Table B.18: IF OUT MAIN Specification...................................... B-11
B.8.4 C-Tick Mark.................................................. B-8
Table B.19: IF OUT MONITOR Specification.............................. B-12
B.9 Module Information................................................... B-9 Table B.20: DVB ASI 1, 2 and 3 Specification ............................ B-12
B.9.1 Analogue Video Input Module (S8481) ........ B-9 Table B.21: DVB ASI IN 1, 2 and 3 Connector............................ B-12
Table B.22: DVB ASI OUT 1 Connector...................................... B-13
Instruction Manual: evolution 5000 E5500 Mobile Contribution Encoder Page B-1
ST.TM.E10033.3
Technical Specification
Table B.23: DVB ASI IN 1, 2 and 3 - LED Indications .................B-13

Table B.24: DVB ASI OUT 1 - LED Indications ...........................B-13
Page B-2 Instruction Manual: evolution 5000 E5500 Mobile Contribution Encoder
ST.TM.E10033.3
B.1 Inputs
B.1.1 Video
SDI
Table B.1: Serial Digital Video Specification
Item Specification
Safety status: SELV
Connector designation: SDI
Connector type; BNC female socket
Input standard (UK/EC): ITU-R BT.656 Part 3, Bit Serial Interface 4:2:2 YPRPB
Input standard (USA): ANSI / SMPTE 259M Level C - 270 Mbit/s, 525/625 component
Cable length: 250 m, maximum
Input level: 800 mV pk-pk nominal ±10%
Return loss: >-22 dB, 10-270 MHz
HSYNC IN
Table B.2: HSYNC IN Specification
Item Specification
Safety status: SELV
Connector designation: HSYNC IN
Connector type; BNC female socket
Input standard: 625 line PAL or 525 line NTSC, chrominance not required.
Cable length: 250 m, maximum
Return loss: >35 dB, 5 MHz (when impedance is set to 75 Ω)
Teletext Extraction
Teletext is extracted from the Vertical Blanking Interval (VBI) of the active
video signal.
ST.TM.E10033.3
B.1.2 Audio
Standard Audio
Table B.3: Standard Audio Input Specification
Item Specification
Safety status: SELV
Connector designation: AUDIO IN
Connector type: 15-way, D-type male connector
Encoding standard: MPEG-2 ISO/IEC 13818-3 (layer 2)
Input standard (analogue) Balanced analogue
Clip level: 12 dB or 18 dB
Input impedance: 600 Ω or 20 kΩ (selectable). 600 Ω = default
Input standard (digital) AES/EBU digital (selectable)
Sampling rate: 32/44.1/48 kHz (selectable)
Input rate: 32, 44.1, 48 kHz
Coding standard (1): MPEG-1 (layer 2)
Supported Coding modes: Single channel, dual channel, joint stereo and normal stereo
Supported Coded data rate: 32-384 kbit/s
Coding standard (2): Dolby Digital
Termination: 110 Ω
Coding standard (3): Pre-encoded Dolby Digital (AC-3)
Coding standard (4): Linear PCM
When the unit is not powered the analogue audio input defaults to AES/EBU with 110 Ω termination
Audio Extraction
Audio embedded on the serial digital video input can also be extracted and
encoded. Up to four stereo pairs of audio can be extracted from the SDI.
Table B.4: Embedded Audio Specification
Item Specification
Serial Digital Interface
Safety status: SELV
Connector designation: SDI
Connector type: BNC female connector
Input standard (UK/EEC): ITU-R BT.656 Part 3, Bit Serial Interface 4:2:2 YCRCB
Input standard (USA): ANSI / SMPTE 259M Level C - 270 Mbit/s, 525/625 component
B.2 ASI Outputs

Table B.5: ASI OUT Specification
Item Specification
Safety status: SELV
Connector type: BNC 75 Ω
Connector designation: ASI OUT 1, ASI OUT 2, ASI OUT 3
ST.TM.E10033.3
B.3 Control and Monitoring

B.3.1 Local Control
Local control is by means of the front panel keypad and LCD display. These
are used to display, select and change parameters, which are arranged on
a series of display menus (for details see Chapter 3, Operating the
Equipment Locally).
B.3.2 Remote Control

Ethernet 1 and 2
Table B.6: Ethernet Specification
Item Specification
Safety Status: SELV
Connector designation: ETHERNET1 and ETHERNET 2
Connector type: 8-way RJ45 socket, 10 BaseT (ISO 882/3)
B.3.3 Alarm
Table B.7: Alarm Specification
Item Specification
Safety status: SELV
Connector designation: ALARM
Connector type: 9-way D-type male
Alarm Contacts: Changeover contacts (5 Ω in common)
Fail contacts: Changeover contacts (5 Ω in common)
Reset contacts: Short pins 9 and 5
B.3.4 Host Status

This is a test-only output and is not normally intended for operator use,
since status data is normally communicated via a remote controller, where
used.
Table B.8: Host Status Specification
Item Specification
Safety status: SELV
Connector designation: HOST STATUS
Connector type: 9-way D-type male
ST.TM.E10033.3
B.3.5 Remote Control In

This connector provides an RS-485 user interface control port which allows
the unit to be controlled by an external master. Table as Table B.8 but
connector designation is REMOTE CONTROL IN.
B.3.6 Remote Control out

This connector allows the encoder to control an external modulator and/or
IRD. Table as per B.3.4 but connector designation is REMOTE CONTROL
OUT.
B.4 Test Tone

Table B.9: Test Tone Specification
Item Specification
Frequency: 1 kHz at 48 kHz sampling frequency
Level: 6.87 dB at 18 dB system gain
B.5 Power Supply

This equipment is fitted with a wide-ranging power supply. It is suitable for
supply voltages of 100-120 Vac -10% +6% or 220-240 Vac -10% +6% at
50/60 Hz nominal.
Table B.10: AC Power Supply Specification
Item Specification
Power distribution system: Type TN ONLY (EN 60950 para 1.2.12.1): Power distribution system
having one point directly earthed, the exposed conductive parts of the
installation being connected to that point by protective earth
conductors. This equipment must NOT be used with single-phase
three-wire and PE, TT or IT Type Power distribution systems.
Connection to supply: Pluggable Equipment Type A (EN 60950 para 1.2.5): Equipment which
is intended for connection to the building power supply wiring via a
non-industrial plug and socket-outlet or a non-industrial appliance
coupler or both. Correct mains polarity must always be observed. Do
not use reversible plugs with this equipment.
Class of equipment: Class I Equipment (EN 60950 para 1.2.4): electric shock protection by
basic insulation and protective earth.
Rated voltage: 100-120/220-240 Vac (single phase)
Rated frequency: 50/60 Hz
Voltage selection: Wide-ranging
Rated current: 4 A (100-120 Vac range)
2 A (220-240 Vac range)
Input connector: CEE 22/IEC 320 3-pin male receptacle
Fuse: Fuse in live conductor in power input filter at rear of unit. Do not use
reversible plugs with this equipment.
Fuse type: 5 x 20 mm IEC127 Sheet V e.g.:
Bussmann S505 series
Littelfuse 215 series
Fuse current rating: 5 A 250 V T HBC
PSU Power Consumption: 250 W maximum
ST.TM.E10033.3
B.6 Physical Details

Table B.11: Physical Details
Item Specification
Height: 88.9 mm 2U chassis
Width: 442.5 mm excluding fixing brackets
Overall width: 482.6 mm including fixing brackets
Depth: 499.5 mm excluding rear connector clearance
Approximate weight: 12 kg (26.4 lbs)
Rack-mount case: 19 inch width, 2U height
B.7 Environmental Conditions

Table B.12: Environmental Specification
Item Specification
Operational
Temperature: 0°C to +40°C (32°F to 104°F) ambient with free air-flow
Relative Humidity: 0% to 90% (non-condensing)
Cooling requirements: Front section: Cool air input from front panel,
exhaust from right side panel
Rear section: Cool air input from right side panel,
exhaust from left side panel
Handling/movement: Designed for fixed use when in operation
Storage/Transportation
Temperature: 0°C to +70°C (32°F to 158°F)
Relative Humidity: 0% to 90% (non-condensing)
B.8 Compliance1
B.8.1 Safety
This equipment has been designed and tested to meet the requirements of
the following:
EN 60950 European Safety of information technology equipment
including business equipment.
IEC 60950 Internation Safety of information technology equipment
al including business equipment.
In addition, the equipment has been designed to meet the following:
UL 1950 USA Safety of information technology equipment
including business equipment.
1
The version of the standards shown is that applicable at the time of manufacture.
ST.TM.E10033.3
B.8.2 EMC2
The equipment has been designed and tested to meet the following:
EN 55022 European Emission Standard
and Limits and methods of measurement of
AS/NZS 3548 Australia radio frequency interference characteristics
and New of information technology equipment -
Zealand Class A.
EN 61000-3- European Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC), Part 3
2 Limits; Section 2. Limits for harmonic
current emissions (equipment input current
≤ 16 A per phase).
EN 50082-13 European Generic Immunity Standard
Part 1: Domestic, commercial and light
industry environment.
FCC USA Conducted and radiated emission limits for
a Class A digital device, pursuant to the
Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title
47-Telecommunications, Part 15: Radio
frequency devices, subpart B -
Unintentional Radiators.
B.8.3 CE Marking
The CE mark is affixed to indicate compliance with the
following directives:
89/336/EEC of 3 May 1989 on the approximation of the
laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic
compatibility.
73/23/EEC of 19 February 1973 on the harmonisation of
the laws of the Member States relating to electrical
equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits.
NOTE...
The CE mark was first affixed to this product in 2000.
B.8.4 C-Tick Mark

The C-Tick mark is affixed to denote compliance with the
Australian “Radiocommunications (Compliance and Labelling –
Incidental Emissions) Notice made under s.182 of
Radiocommunications Act 1992.
NOTE...
The C-Tick mark was first affixed to this product in 2000.
2
The EMC tests were performed with the Technical Earth attached, and configured using recommended cables.
3
The 1st Edition 1992 and the 2nd Edition 1997 have been complied with.
ST.TM.E10033.3
B.9 Module Information

B.9.1 Analogue Video Input Module (S8481)
Analogue Composite/Component Input
Table B.13: Analogue Video Input Specification
Item Specification
Safety status: SELV
Analogue input: 625 line composite PAL-B, -D, -G, -H,
-I or -M As specified in ITU-R BT.
624-4 “Characteristics of
525 line composite NTSC-M with or Television Systems”
without pedestal
625 line component
As specified in
525 line component with or without ITU-R BT. 601-5
pedestal, or Beta level (no pedestal)
Connector designation: Y/COMP, PR and PB
Input level: 1 V pk-pk nominal ±5%
Return loss: >30 dB up to 6 MHz
Termination: 75 Ω or no termination (selectable)
Video Performance Figures
Table B.14: Analogue Video System Performance Figures
Signal Performance PAL/Input NTSC/Input Component/Input

(Composite) (Composite)
Input return loss: 35 dB 35 dB 35 dB
Luminance bandwidth: 5.5 MHz 5.5 MHz 5.5 MHz
PR, PB bandwidth: System dependent System dependent PR PB = 2.75 MHz
Luminance non-linearity: 1% 1% 1%
PR, PB non-linearity: 1% 1% 1%
Signal to noise ratio: >55.6 dB >55.6 dB >55.6 dB
K2T pulse response: <1%K <1%K <1%K
K-p/b: 1% 1% 1%
Kbar: 0.05%K 0.05%K 0.05%K
Subcarrier rejection: 40 dB 40 dB 40 dB
Y/C timing error: 10 ns 10 ns 10 ns
Jitter over 1 field: ±2.5 ns ±2.5 ns ±2.5 ns
ST.TM.E10033.3
B.9.2 Data Input Module (S8477)

RS-422 Synchronous Data Input
Table B.15: RS-422 Synchronous Data Input Specification
Item Specification
Safety status: SELV
Type: ITU-T V.11 (RS-422), synchronous serial data and external clock
Connector designation: SYNC
Connector type: 15-way D-type, female
Clock frequencies: n × 64 kbit/s from 64 kbit/s to 2048 kbit/s (selectable)
or
n × 56 kbit/s from 56 kbit/s to 1792 kbit/s (selectable)
Timestamp: Not supported
Operation modes: Bit-pipe – Transport packet alignment and byte alignment relative to
the incoming bit-stream are arbitrary.
RS-232 Asynchronous Data Input
Table B.16: RS-232 Asynchronous Data Input Specification
Item Specification
Safety status: SELV
Type: ITU-T V.24/V.28 (EIA RS-232D) asynchronous serial data
Connector designation: ASYNC
Connector type: 9-way D-type, female
Supported baud rates: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 baud
Control mechanism: XON/XOFF
Timestamp: Not supported
Transport package alignment: Transparent to data source. Port operates as a bit-pipe.
B.9.3 Frequency Agile QPSK Modulator (S10949)

Table B.17: IF OUT MONITOR Specification
Item Specification
Safety status: SELV
Connector designation: IF OUT MONITOR
Output impedance: 75 Ω
Output power: −20 dB ± 2 dB referenced to the main IF output (IF OUT MAIN)
Return loss: > 20 dB, 35 < f < 105 MHz
Main/monitor output isolation: >30 dB, 35 < f < 105 MHz
(both directions)
ST.TM.E10033.3
Table B.18: IF OUT MAIN Specification
Item Specification
Safety status: SELV
Connector designation: IF OUT MAIN
Return loss: >18 dB, 35 < f < 105 MHz
Output power: –20 to +5 dBm in 0.1 dB steps
Power level stability: ±0.5 dB
Signal type: QPSK per EN 300 421
Symbol-rate (minimum) 0.46875 Msymbol/s
Symbol rate (maximum) vs Fc (MHz) 50-60 60-80 80-90
carrier frequency Fc:
Symbol-rate Fc – 30 30 110 – Fc
Msymbol/s
Transmit symbol-rate accuracy: Within 15 ppm
Convolutional FEC rates: 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6 and 7/8
Bit-rate (204 byte format: 2 x Rs x FEC Mbit/s
where
Rs = Symbol-rate (Msymbol/s)
FEC = FEC ratio (values listed above)
Power spectrum: Square root raised cosine, α = 0.35 per EN 300 421
Power spectrum (detail, nominal): Bandwidth/Rs ratio (BW/Rs) at power spectral density Co values (dB)
relative to the power spectral density Coo at the carrier (center)
frequency:
Co-Coo (dB) BW/Rs
-3 1.0
-6 1.13
-10 1.21
-20 1.32
-30 1.37
Carrier frequency Fc: 50 – 90 MHz
Carrier frequency step: 125 kHz
Carrier frequency accuracy: Within ± 7.5 kHz
Carrier suppression: >40 dB
IF spectrum inversion: Selectable on/off
Residual carrier, carrier OFF < -70 dBm
state:
Spurious outputs, modulated < -60 dBc/4 kHz relative to unmodulated carrier, 0 < f < 500 MHz
carrier: excluding ±1.06 × Symbol Rate about the carrier frequency
Spurious outputs, unmodulated < – 50 dBc
carrier < - 55 dBc typical
0 < f < 500 MHz, each component
Carrier phase noise: Phase noise density (dBc/Hz) Frequency offset from carrier
< –85 100 Hz
< –85 1 kHz
< –95 10 kHz
< –110 100 kHz
Transmission modes: Modulation on/off
Carrier on/off
ST.TM.E10033.3
Table B.19: IF OUT MONITOR Specification
Item Specification
Safety status: SELV
Connector designation: IF OUT MONITOR
Output power: −20 dB ± 2 dB referenced to the main IF output
(IF OUT MAIN)
Return loss: > 20 dB, 35 < f < 105 MHz
Main/monitor output isolation: >30 dB, 35 < f < 105 MHz
(both directions)
B.9.4 RAS Scrambling Module (S8489)

Table B.20: DVB ASI 1, 2 and 3 Specification
Item Specification
Safety status: SELV
Connector type: BNC 75 Ω
Connector designation: DVB ASI 1, DVB ASI 2, DVB ASI 3
B.9.5 Internal Remux Module (S10655)

Connectors
Table B.21: DVB ASI IN 1, 2 and 3 Connector
Item Specification
Safety status SELV
Connector designation DVB ASI IN 1, DVB ASI IN 2, DVB ASI IN 3
Connector type BNC
Connector Impedance 75 Ω4
Data coding 8B/10B
Channel rate 270 Mbit/s
Specification DVB A010 rev 1 (Asynchronous Serial Interface)5
4
75Ω terminator must be fitted when this connector is not in use.
5
Byte mode and single packet burst mode only.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Table B.22: DVB ASI OUT 1 Connector
Item Specification
Safety status SELV
Connector designation DVB ASI OUT 1
Connector type BNC
Connector Impedance 75 Ω5
Data coding 8B/10B
Channel rate 270 Mbit/s
Specification DVB A010 rev 1 (Asynchronous Serial Interface)6
LEDs
Table B.23: DVB ASI IN 1, 2 and 3 - LED Indications
Item Specification
Red LED Input ASI lock
On No lock on ASI (8B/10B coding)
Off ASI Input lock OK
Green LED Packet size
Off Not locked to MPEG packets
Flash (1:3 mark:space) 188 byte packets
Flash (3:1 mark:space) 204 byte packets
Table B.24: DVB ASI OUT 1 - LED Indications
Item Specification
Red LED
On Output disabled
Off Output enabled
Green LED
Off Output not in use
Flash (1:3 mark:space) 188 byte packets output
Flash (3:1 mark:space) 204 byte packets output
6
Byte mode and single packet burst mode only
ST.TM.E10033.3
BLANK
ST.TM.E10033.3
Annex C
C. Error Messages
Contents
C.1 Introduction............................................................... C-3 List of Tables
Table C.1: Base Board 3ASI (Motherboard) Error Messages ....... C-3
C.2 Dealing with Error Messages.................................... C-3
Table C.2: Video Compression Module Error Messages .............. C-5
C.3 Base Board 3ASI (Motherboard) Related Errors ...... C-3 Table C.3: Video Input Module Error Messages ........................... C-5
Table C.4: Audio Error Messages ................................................. C-6
C.4 Video Compression Module Related Errors ............. C-5 Table C.5: RS-422 Data Error Messages...................................... C-6
C.5 Video Input Module Related Errors .......................... C-5 Table C.6: RS-232 Data Error Messages...................................... C-6
Table C.7: QPSK Modulator Error Messages .............................. C-7
C.6 Audio Related Errors ................................................ C-6
C.7 RS-422 Data Related Errors..................................... C-6
C.8 RS-232 Data Related Errors..................................... C-6
C.9 QPSK Modulator Related Errors .............................. C-7
Instruction Manual: evolution 5000 E5500 Mobile Contribution Encoder Page C-1
ST.TM.E10033.3
Error Messages
BLANK
Page C-2 Instruction Manual: evolution 5000 E5500 Mobile Contribution Encoder
ST.TM.E10033.3
Error Messages
C.1 Introduction
If an error should occur in the MCE, then a message indicating the type of
error is shown on the front panel display. The display of error messages
may be suppressed using the Display Errors option on the
Setup/System/General Menu – see Chapter 3, Operating the Equipment
Locally.
The possible error messages are listed below, together with an indication
of the alarm condition, they are:
• An alarm condition which is unusual but which may occur during normal
operation (such as loss of video input).
• A failure condition indicating a hardware or software failure – a
condition that should never occur during the normal operating life of the
equipment.
Both types of error will light the front panel Alarm LED. The alarm relay
interface on the Alarm connector (see Chapter 2, Installing the
Equipment) will be set according to the type of error, they are:
• An alarm condition which triggers the alarm relay only
• A failure condition triggering both the fail and alarm relays).
Unless otherwise stated, call a Service Engineer if a problem occurs.
C.2 Dealing with Error Messages

The action to take when an error message is reported, is given in the
following tables. If the fault cannot be resolved using the information
provided, make a note of the error message(s) displayed, then call a
Service Engineer (see Customer Services Information in the Preliminary
Pages).
The following references may be useful:
• Power on/off procedure – see Chapter 2, Installing the Equipment.
• Base Board 3ASI (Motherboard)/module locations – see Chapter 4,
Equipment Description.
• Error detection and handling (EDH) information – see Chapter 4,
Equipment Description.
C.3 Base Board 3ASI (Motherboard) Related

Errors
Table C.1: Base Board 3ASI (Motherboard) Error Messages
Error Message Alarm Fail Action to Take

Audio A Comms
Audio B Comms
Power off MCE. Check Base Board 3ASI (Motherboard)
LCD Auto Status is firmly seated in the chassis. Power on MCE. If fault still
present, call Service Engineer.
LCD Status
ST.TM.E10033.3
Error Messages

Mux Comms
Option Module 1 Comms (S8481 Video Input Module)
Option Module 2 Comms (S8477 Data Input Module) and reported Option Module are firmly seated in the
Option Module 3 Comms (S10949 QPSK Modulator) chassis. Power on MCE. If fault still present, call Service
Engineer.
Option Module 4 Comms [S8489 or S10655 Module]
Over Temperature Check equipment ventilation slots are clear and
unobstructed; see Chapter 2 for details of ventilation
requirements. Check ambient air temperature is within
specified range; see Annex B. If fault still present, call
Service Engineer.
Over Voltage (5V) Power supply unit output voltage requires adjustment.
Call Service Engineer.
PSU Voltage Sensor Failure
Real Time Clock Failure Power MCE off, then back on again. If fault still
SCC3 Serial Port present, call Service Engineer.
SCC4 Serial Port

SDI Anc. Data Error An ancillary data checksum
error was detected in the digital
serial link connected to the
Encoder.
SDI Anc. Data Error Already An ancillary data checksum Check the source of
error was detected in the digital the digital serial link
serial link ‘upstream’ of the connected to the
Encoder. Encoder SDI video
input, and any
SDI Anc. Data Unknown Error The status of the ancillary data equipment in the
flags is not known as the serial signal path between
link is received from a the source and the
transmitter that does not Encoder, and all
support EDH. related cables and
SDI Full Field Error A full field CRC error was connectors. If the
detected in the digital serial link transmitter (and/or
connected to the Encoder. any intervening
devices) do not
SDI Full Field Error Already A full field CRC error was
support EDH, then
detected in the digital serial link
these messages do
‘upstream’ of the Encoder.
not indicate a fault
SDI Full Field Unknown Error The status of the full field flags with the Encoder.
is not known as the serial link Try to verify the
is received from a transmitter serial link using
that does not support EDH. another receiver. If
SDI Picture Error An active picture CRC error the link is verified as
was detected in the digital OK then call Service
serial link connected to the Engineer for
Encoder. Encoder. If link is
suspect or cannot
SDI Picture Error Already An active picture CRC error be tested, then fault
was detected in the digital may lie in data
serial link ‘upstream’ of the transmitter or the
Encoder. Encoder; investigate
SDI Picture Unknown Error The status of the active picture further.
flags is not known as the serial
link is received from a
transmitter that does not
support EDH.
Temperature Sensor Failure Power MCE off, then back on again. If fault still
ST.TM.E10033.3
Error Messages

Under Temperature Check ambient air temperature is within specified
range; see Annex B. If fault still present, call Service
Engineer.
Under Voltage (5V) Power supply unit output voltage requires adjustment.
Call Service Engineer.
Video Encoder Comms Power off MCE. Check Base Board 3ASI (Motherboard)
and Video Compression Module are firmly seated in the
Video Pre-Processor Comms
chassis. Power on MCE. If fault still present, call Service
Engineer.
Video Input Lock Check video input is present and the MCE is
Video: Wrong Line Standard configured for the correct line standard.
C.4 Video Compression Module Related Errors

Table C.2: Video Compression Module Error Messages

Config Update Power off MCE. Check Base Board 3ASI (Motherboard)
and Video Compression Module are firmly seated in the
Encoder Stopped
chassis. Power on MCE. If fault still present, call Service
Engineer.
Incorrect Parameters Check MCE configuration.
PCR Error
Rate Buffer Overflow
E4 Comms Sequence Number and Video Compression Module are firmly seated in the
E4 Does Not Respond chassis. Power on MCE. If fault still present, call Service
Engineer.
Initialisation Error
Rate Buffer Empty
C.5 Video Input Module Related Errors

Table C.3: Video Input Module Error Messages

and Video Input Module are firmly seated in the chassis.
Processor Stopped
Power on MCE. If fault still present, call Service
Engineer.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Error Messages
C.6 Audio Related Errors

Table C.4: Audio Error Messages

is firmly seated in the chassis. Power on MCE. If fault still
Encoder Stopped
Incorrect Parameters Check MCE configuration.
Level Clipping Left Audio input level is too high and is being clipped. Adjust
Level Clipping Right audio input level.
PCR Error Power off MCE. Check Base Board 3ASI (Motherboard)
is firmly seated in the chassis. Power on MCE. If fault still
Silence Timeout Left Silence timeout period can be set using terminal
connected to Host Status port (contact Customer
Silence Timeout Right
Services for details). Error message is generated if audio
input is silent for n seconds. Timeout period normally set
to 0 which disables this feature, in which case these
errors should not be reported.
C.7 RS-422 Data Related Errors

Table C.5: RS-422 Data Error Messages

Encoder Stopped Power off MCE. Check Base Board 3ASI (Motherboard)
and Data Input Module are firmly seated in the chassis.
RS422 Config Update
Engineer.
C.8 RS-232 Data Related Errors

Table C.6: RS-232 Data Error Messages

Encoder Stopped
RS232 Config Update Power off MCE. Check Base Board 3ASI (Motherboard)
and Data Input Module are firmly seated in the chassis.
RS232 Error 1
RS232 Error 2 Engineer.
RS232 Error 3
ST.TM.E10033.3
Error Messages
C.9 QPSK Modulator Related Errors

Table C.7: QPSK Modulator Error Messages

ALC Error
Config Update
FIFO Fault
Hardware Config Error
IF Synthesiser
Input Clock Fault and Modulator Module are firmly seated in the chassis.
Input Data Fault Power on MCE. If fault still present, call Service
Engineer.
Modulation Fault
Modulator Comms
Parameter Fault
Processor Stopped
Symbol Clock Synthesiser
ST.TM.E10033.3
Error Messages
BLANK
ST.TM.E10033.3
Annex D
D. Predefined User Configurations
Contents
D.1 Introduction............................................................... D-3 List of Tables
Table D.1: Default Configuration Settings..................................... D-3
D.2 General Default Settings .......................................... D-3
Table D.2: Predefined User Configurations................................... D-5
D.3 Predefined User Configurations ............................... D-5 Table D.3: ISOG Configurations.................................................... D-7
D.4 ISOG Configurations ................................................ D-7
Instruction Manual: evolution 5000 E5500 Mobile Contribution Encoder Page D-1
ST.TM.E10033.3
Predefined User Configurations
BLANK
Page D-2 Instruction Manual: evolution 5000 E5500 Mobile Contribution Encoder
ST.TM.E10033.3
D.1 Introduction
There are sixteen predefined user configurations. These are a quick and
easy way to configure the MCE without having to enter individual
parameters.
D.2 General Default Settings

The MCE default parameters settings are as shown in Table D.1.
Table D.1: Default Configuration Settings
Module Parameter Value

System: Service Information On
Encoder Number 1
Network Name Tandberg Network
Service Name Default Service
Network ID 0xFFFF
Service ID 0x0001
Transport Stream ID 0x0001
Setup Password OFF
Mux: On Air ON
Mode ASI
Clock Local Oscillator
Lock Local to Remote PCR Off
PCR Timing Interval 40 ms
PCR PID 0x1FFE
ASI Bit-rate 40 Mbit/s
TAXI Port A
Video Preprocessor: Teletext PID 0x111
Teletext On
Video Input Enabled
Output on Video Loss Freeze Frame
Closed Caption On
Pan Scan Flags Enabled
WSS On
VPS On
Logo Off
Audio DID Extractors Auto
Video Encoder: Control Mode Auto
Bit-rate 8 Mbit/s
GOP Structure IBBP
GOP Length 12
Encode On
PCR Source Motherboard
Field/Frame Picture Frame
ST.TM.E10033.3
Module Parameter Value

Chroma Mode 4:2:0
Frame Rate 25 Hz
3:2 Pulldown/Repeat Field Off
Vertical Resolution Full (576)
Encoding Mode Standard
Aspect Ratio 4:3
Horizontal Res 704
Auto Horizontal Res On
Copyright Off
Original Off
StatMux Off
ITS Lines Disabled
Video PID 0x134
Audio (MPEG-2): Coding Standard MPEG Layer 2
Source Analogue (On)
Audio Gain 12 dB
Delay 201 ms
Silence Timeout Disabled
Emphasis Off
Language (L) English
Language (R) English
Audio (Dolby Digital): Bit-rate 192 kbit/s
Bit-stream Mode Complete Main
Coding Mode 2/0 (Stereo)
Copyright On
Original On
Dolby Surround Mode Not Indicated
Dialogue Normalisation -27 dB
Audio Production Information Off
Mixing Level 25 dB
Room Type Not Indicated
Dynamic Range Compression Film light
Sampling Frequency 48 kHz
Channel Bandwidth Low Pass Filter On
DC High Pass Filter On
Audio Musicam Bit-rate 384 kbit/s
(MPEG-2):
Coding Mode Stereo
Copyright Off
Original Off
Sampling Frequency 48 kHz
Motherboard Channel A PID 0x100
Motherboard Channel B PID 0x101
ST.TM.E10033.3
If the 525 line defaults are selected, then:

• Frame Rate is set to 29.97 Hz;
• GOP Length is set to 15.
If the 625 line defaults are selected, then:
• Frame Rate is set to 25 Hz;
• GOP Length is set to 12.
D.3 Predefined User Configurations

The predefined user configurations have essentially the same settings as
Table D.1 except for those differences shown in Table D.2:
Table D.2: Predefined User Configurations
Configuration Service Name Variable Value

Number
1 Auto 2 Mbit/s Video Source Serial Digital
Video Profile/Level MP @ ML
Video Control Mode Auto
Video Bit-rate 2 Mbit/s
Horizontal Resolution 352
6 Low Delay 2 Mbit/s Video Source Serial Digital
Video Control Mode Low Delay
ST.TM.E10033.3

Number
11 Very Low Dly 2 Video Source Serial Digital
Video Control Mode Very Low Delay
15 Vry Low Dly 15 Video Source Serial Digital
ST.TM.E10033.3

Number
Video Chroma Mode 4:2:0
D.4 ISOG Configurations

The following ISOG configurations replace predefined configurations 14 and
15, (shown in the previous table), on version 3.3 and later.
Table D.3: ISOG Configurations

Number
14 ISOG 4:2:0 Video Source Serial Digital
Mux bit-rate (188) = 8.4480 Mbit/s Video Profile/Level MP @ ML
Mux bit-rate (204) = 9.1670 Mbit/s Video Control Mode Auto
Video Bit-rate 7.534 Mbit/s
Packet Length = 204 bytes Horizontal Resolution 704
15 ISOG 4:2:2 Video Source Serial Digital
Mux bit-rate (188) = 21.5030 Mbit/s Video Profile/Level 422P @ ML
Mux bit-rate (204) = 23.3330 Mbit/s Video Control Mode Auto
Chroma Mode 422
Video Bit-rate 19.748 Mbit/s
Packet Length = 204 bytes Symbol Rate 13.3332 Msym/s
ST.TM.E10033.3
BLANK
ST.TM.E10033.3
Annex E
E. Language Abbreviations
Languages are shown in alphabetical LANGUAGE ABBREVIATION
order.
MALAY MSA
MISCELLANEOUS MIS
LANGUAGE ABBREVIATION
MULTIPLE LANGUAGES MUL
AFRIKAANS AFR
NDEBELE NDE
ALBANIAN ALB
NORWEGIAN NOR
ARABIC ARA
POLISH POL
BASQUE BAQ
PORTUGESE POR
BRETON BRE
ROMANIAN RUM
BULGARIAN BUL
RUSSIAN RUS
CHINESE CHI
SERBO-CROAT SCR
CZECH CZE
SLOVAK SLK
DANISH DAN
SOMALI SOM
DUTCH DUT
SPANISH SPA
ENGLISH ENG
SWAHILI SWA
ESTONIAN EST
SWEDISH SWE
FINNISH FIN
THAI THA
FRENCH FRE
TIBETAN TIB
GAELIC GAE
UNDEFINED UND
GERMAN GER
UKRANIAN UKR
GREEK GRE
WELSH CYM
HUNGARIAN HUN
ICELANDIC ICE
INDONESIAN IND
IRISH IRI
ITALIAN ITA
JAPANESE JPN
KOREAN KOR
LATVIAN LAV
LITHUANIAN LIT
MACEDONIAN MAC
Instruction Manual: evolution 5000 E5500 Mobile Contribution Encoder Page E-1
ST.TM.E10033.3
Annex E - Language Abbreviations
The following non-ISO1 languages are The non-ISO “languages” allow tagging
supported. of audio without reference to specific
languages. The system can then
NOTE… transmit two languages (as Main and
Auxiliary) which could be any type of
Only applicable for a transport stream going to
an Alteia receiver. audio.
NOTE…
REFERENCE ABBREVIATION
The non-ISO languages need to be user defined
MAIN ONE in the MEM OR MCE for them to be available
AUX TWO
INTERNATIONAL SOUND INT
AUDIO 1 AAA
AUDIO 2 AAB
AUDIO 3 AAC
AUDIO 4 AAD
AUDIO 5 AAE
AUDIO 6 AAF
AUDIO 7 AAG
AUDIO 8 AAH
AUDIO 9 AAI
AUDIO 10 AAJ
AUDIO 11 AAK
AUDIO 12 AAL
AUDIO 13 AAM
AUDIO 14 AAN
AUDIO 15 AAO
AUDIO 16 AAP
1
International Standards Organisation.
Page E-2 Instruction Manual: evolution 5000 E5500 Mobile Contribution Encoder
ST.TM.E10033.3
Annex F
F. Creating and Downloading a Logo
Contents
F.1 Introduction................................................................F-3
F.2 What is OSD Creator.................................................F-3
F.3 Creating an .osd File .................................................F-3
F.3.1 Loading a .bmp File.......................................F-3
F.3.2 Creating Transparency..................................F-3
Adding Transparency Manually.....................F-4
Adding Transparency Using a Key File.........F-4
Editing the Palette .........................................F-4
Palette Reallocation ......................................F-4
F.3.3 Downsampling...............................................F-5
F.3.4 Saving the .osd File.......................................F-5
F.4 What is OSD Loader..................................................F-5
F.5 Using the OSD Loader ..............................................F-5
F.5.1 Start-up .........................................................F-5
F.5.2 Download an .osd File...................................F-5
F.5.3 Show and Hide Regions................................F-6
F.5.4 Multiple Regions............................................F-6
F.5.5 Region Interference.......................................F-6
F.6 Fault-finding...............................................................F-6
Instruction Manual: evolution 5000 E5500 Mobile Contribution Encoder Page F-1
ST.TM.E10033.3
Creating and Downloading a Logo
BLANK
Page F-2 Instruction Manual: evolution 5000 E5500 Mobile Contribution Encoder
ST.TM.E10033.3
F.1 Introduction
There is a logo overlay facility allowing broadcasters to trademark material
whereby the MCE is able to overlay broadcasters trademarks/logos onto
the active video.
To overlay or brand the material with a logo, the logo must first be
downloaded into the equipment using the Ethernet TFTP protocol. Once
this has been done the logo can be enabled or disabled.
There are two PC applications available from TANDBERG Television. OSD
Creator, which enables you to create an On Screen Display from a bit-map
file and OSD Loader, which is used to download a created OSD. Both of
these need to be previously loaded onto an available PC.
F.2 What is OSD Creator

Osd Creator is an application for creating .osd format files for use with the
Osd Loader. It accepts Windows .bmp format files as input. It includes the
facility to introduce a ‘mix’ component into the image, so that when the
image is superimposed onto video, some areas appear to be transparent.
The mix can be added manually, or by loading a separate ‘key file’.
The application also includes the facility to downsample the image to the
desired size.
The application runs under Windows 95 or Windows NT.
F.3 Creating an .osd File

The steps for creating an .osd file are as follows:
1. Load a .bmp file.
2. Create transparency in the desired areas.
3. Downsample to the desired size.
4. Save as an .osd file.
F.3.1 Loading a .bmp File

Select File/Open from the menu, and choose a file with a .bmp extension.
The image is displayed in its own window. The application does not accept
compressed bitmaps or multi-planed bitmaps.
F.3.2 Creating Transparency

The area of the image that is to be made transparent is called the inactive
area. The rest is the active area.
Transparency can added manually, or by using a ‘key file’. A ‘key file’ is a
.bmp file of the same size as the source file, with the active area of the
image coloured white, the inactive area coloured black, and intermediate
levels of transparency coloured grey.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Firstly, change the background colour so that it contrasts sharply with the
whole of the source image, using the black, red, green or blue buttons on
the toolbar. This makes it easier to spot mistakes.
The left button is used to make an area transparent (mix 0), the right
button makes it opaque (mix 255). Different mix levels can be entered for
intermediate levels of transparency. The brush size determines the size of
the area that is changed.
If the Changes Affect Palette box is checked, changing the transparency
of a pixel on the image also changes the palette entry on which the pixel is
based, and all the pixels that share that palette entry.
If the inactive area is mainly one colour, check the Changes Affect
Palette box, and left-click in the inactive area. All pixels of that colour
should become background-coloured. Repeat until the whole of the
inactive area is transparent. If parts of the active area have become
transparent, uncheck the Changes Affect Palette box, and paint with the
right button to correct these areas. Zoom in if necessary.
If there is no general colour for the inactive area, uncheck the Changes
Affect Palette box and paint the inactive area manually with the left
mouse button. Use the right button to correct mistakes. Trace around the
edge of the area with a medium brush, then use the large brush for wide
areas. Zoom in to do the fine corrections.
Adding Transparency Using a Key File

Create the ‘key file’ using a drawing package. Colour the active area white,
and the inactive area black. Save as a .bmp file.
Click the Key File toolbar button. Select the ‘key file’. The inactive area of
the image should now be transparent (background-coloured). Change the
background colour to verify that the correct area is transparent.
Editing the Palette

The palette may be displayed alongside the image by clicking the
Show/Hide Palette toolbar button. The transparency of each palette
entry may be altered in the same way as the image itself, using the left
and right mouse buttons. Changes to the palette are shown immediately
on the image.
The Red, Green, Blue and Mix component of the pixel or palette entry
under the cursor can be seen on the status bar at the bottom of the
screen.
Palette Reallocation
When the level of transparency of a pixel in the image is changed, a new
colour is effectively created. Whenever the image is downsampled or
saved, the palette is rebuilt to reflect the actual colours in the image. As
part of this process, pixels which have a mix value of zero are mapped to
palette entry zero, which is defined as Red = Green = Blue = Mix = 0. The
original colour information is lost and the right mouse button will not
change the pixel back to its original colour.
To rebuild the palette during editing, click the Reallocate Palette toolbar
button.
ST.TM.E10033.3
F.3.3 Downsampling
Click the Downsample toolbar button. A dialog box appears asking for a
downsampling ratio. This can be specified directly, or by entering the
desired image size. Click OK to downsample the image. The downsampling
algorithm includes a filter, so the boundary between the active and inactive
areas softens slightly. Zoom in and check that the correct areas are
transparent, and make corrections if necessary.
F.3.4 Saving the .osd File

Select File/Save As/OSD file from the menu. Saving is possible at any
time, and it is advisable to save the image often while editing is in
progress. The file may also be saved in .bmp format, but this file will not
contain transparency information.
F.4 What is OSD Loader

The OSD Loader is an application for transferring On Screen Display files to
the MCE, and causing the images in these files to be overlaid on the input
to the MCE. This enables logos to be superimposed on the encoded
bit-stream without an additional preprocessor.
The application runs under Windows 95 or Windows NT on an ordinary PC.
A network connection is required. The target MCE's IP address must be
‘visible’ from the host PC.
The application uses the .osd file format for images. These can be derived
from Windows .bmp files using the OSD Creator application (see F.2,
Creating a Logo Using OSD Creator).
F.5 Using the OSD Loader

F.5.1 Start-up
Activate the application. The application attempt to connect to the last
known MCE address. If the address is not correct, click the Abort
Transfer button and enter the IP address of the target MCE. This can be
found on the MCE front panel by selecting
Menu/Status/System/General. To test the connection, click the
Remove All button (you will be prompted for confirmation). The
communications box (at the top of the screen) should read ‘Transfer
Completed OK’. Select 625 Lines or 525 Lines depending on the current
line standard.
F.5.2 Download an .osd File

Choose an On-screen Display file with the Choose File button. You will be
prompted for a file with an .osd extension. The image will be displayed in
the OSD File box.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Position the image on the screen by dragging the white cursor box around
the main window. The position can also be adjusted by editing the
co-ordinates boxes. When the cursor is positioned, click the Download
button. The image will be displayed in the main window. Wait for ‘Transfer
Completed OK’ to appear in the communications box. After a short delay,
the image should appear on the output from the receiver.
F.5.3 Show and Hide Regions

The Download button defines a Region in the MCE, which remains until
the MCE is turned off, the Remove button is clicked, or the Region is
Downloaded again. The Region may be in the Shown or Hidden state,
which determines whether it appears in the video stream. If the Auto
Show box is checked, the initial state is Shown. Use the Show, Hide,
Fade Up and Fade Down buttons to change the state of the region.
Shown regions have a green border in the main window, Hidden regions
have a red border.
F.5.4 Multiple Regions

Multiple Regions may be displayed. To define an additional Region, change
the Region Number at the top of the Region Operations box, and repeat
the Download procedure. Buttons in the Region Operations box only
affect the current Region number (with the exception of Remove All). The
current Region can also be changed by double-clicking on the image in the
main window. The current region has a brighter border in the main
window. Select View As Numbers to display the Region number in the
main window instead of the image.
F.5.5 Region Interference

If two Regions share a horizontal line, they may interfere. This means that
when both Regions are Shown, only one actually appears in the video
stream. The application warns if this is the case. When one of the Regions
is Hidden, the other may be Shown as normal.
F.6 Fault-finding
If there appears to be a problem creating or downloading a logo check the
following:
• If the Communications box reads ‘Error Creating Socket’, there may be
a problem with the PC's network set-up, or another application may be
using the TFTP socket number.
• If the Communications box reads ‘Waiting For Response’ for a long
time, the target MCE is either busy or not visible on the network. Abort
the transfer before changing the IP address.
• Large images take time to appear due to network transfer rates and
image processing.
• If the download completes, but the OSD image does not appear on
video, the image may be too near the edge of the screen – try moving
it towards the centre. Make sure the correct line standard is selected.
ST.TM.E10033.3
• Make sure the image is visible on a typical domestic television. Make a

note of the co-ordinates where the image is required.
• If precise timing is required, Download the image in advance with
Auto Show off, then click Show when display is required.
• To move the current Region, reposition the white cursor, check that
the OSD File box has the correct image, and click Download.
ST.TM.E10033.3
BLANK
ST.TM.E10033.3
Annex G
G. Quick Reference Guide
This annex brings together information, which allows the E5500 MCE to be put into
service quickly.
G.1 Getting Started 3. Check that the green Power LED is

lit and that the red Alarm LED is
G.1.1 Before Powering Up unlit.
Before powering up the MCE check 4. Stable operation, within
that: specification, is available
immediately after a boot period of
1. The equipment has been installed in
approximately 30 seconds.
a suitable location.
2. The equipment has been connected
to external equipment and power
supply, as required.
G.2 Summary Screen
3. The power supply has been checked
and a good earth provided. Once the self-tests are successfully
completed, the summary screen is
4. The correct fuse type and rating has displayed. (If the equipment is already
been fitted to both the equipment on, press any key at the screen saver
and the ac power cable. or press the Quit key until the screen
appears.) The main part of the
NOTE… summary screen is laid out as follows:
Please refer to Instruction Manual
Summary Screen
ST.TM.E10033 for all power supply, fuse, safety,
EMC information and operating conditions. Service/Event name
IF output status IF output power level
Modulation status Tx bandwidth
G.1.2 Powering Up Video input standard Video input status

A u d i o (title only) Audio chnnls A & B status
To power up the MCE: Data channels enabled
1. Turn on the local mains supply to

apply power to the equipment.
2. The MCE executes a series of
power-up initialisation and self-test
routines. If the self-tests are
successful, the summary screen is
displayed. See the following section.
Instruction Manual: evolution 5000 E5500 Mobile Contribution Encoder Page G-1
ST.TM.E10033.3
Quick Reference Guide
G.3 Starting with

1
The overall transport bit-rate and video
bit-rate are automatically calculated
Default Settings from the modulation parameters.
Additionally, the overall transport bit-
The configuration of the MCE after
rate can be entered in the Mux Setup
booting is the same as when power was
and provided the correct FEC is
last removed, with the following
selected, the symbol rate will be
exceptions:
calculated.
• Modulation of the IF carrier is
switched off.
G.3.2 Modulator Setup
• The IF output is switched off.
1. From the summary screen press
• The IF output power level is set to Menu, Setup, Modulator.
‘Low’ (or ‘Normal’, if the low and
2. From the Modulator screen press:
normal settings are set to the same
level). a) Output Format – should be set
to IF (204).
If the MCE has been switched off but it
has not been moved and its external b) IF Output – turns the carrier on
connections have not been changed, or off.
the IF output and modulation must be c) IF Power – select the power
switched back on and the IF power level level between –20 and +5 dBm.
set to its previous setting in order to re- d) IF Frequency – set the IF
enable transmission. These key frequency to 70 +/-20 MHz.
operating parameters can be changed
e) Modulation – turn modulation
quickly using the Ops Menu, see below.
on or off.
If more detailed changes are required,
use the setup procedures that follow. f) Tx Bandwidth – set the
bandwidth in MHz.
G.3.1 Use of the Ops g) Symbol Rate – set the symbol
Menu rate in Msym/s.
h) FEC Rate – select the desired
The Ops Menu is intended to allow the
FEC rate.
user to quickly configure the unit and
get “on air”.
Ops. G.4 Starting without
2. From the Setup/Ops Menu press:
Default Settings
a) IF Output – set carrier to on
If the MCE is being setup initially (i.e.
b) Modulation – set carrier
no defaults are stored) or it has been
modulation to on
moved and its external connections
c) IF Power – set the power level: have been changed, follow this
1) Normal (default of 0.0 dBm), procedure:
Low (default of - 20 dBm)
or User. G.4.1 Video Source Setup
2) IF Frequency – set the IF 1. From the summary screen press
frequency in MHz. Menu, Setup, Video,
3) FEC Rate – select the FEC Video Source, Video Source.
rate. 2. Use the PgUp and PgDn softkeys
4) Tx Bandwidth – set the to select from: Moving Pattern;
bandwidth in MHz. Bars & Red; YPrPb; Monochrome;
NTSC no Pedestal; NTSC with
5) 1Symbol Rate – set the
Pedestal; PAL-D; PAL-B/G/H/I;
symbol rate in Msym/s.
Serial Digital.
Page G-2 Instruction Manual: evolution 5000 E5500 Mobile Contribution Encoder
ST.TM.E10033.3
3. Press Enter to make a selection. G.4.4 Audio Setup

4. If using a digital, monochrome, 1. From the summary screen press
YPrPb or test pattern source, select Menu, Setup, Audio,
Frame Rate. Using the PgUp, Channel 1A, Coding Standard.
PgDn and Enter softkeys, select
between 25 Hz or 29.97 Hz. 2. Use the PgUp and PgDn softkeys
to select from: MPEG Layer 2;
Dolby AC3; Pre-encoded AC3.
NOTE…
Other video controls (including Noise Reduction
NOTE…
and Logo Overlay) are available, see Instruction
Manual for details. (VBI and Teletext are Although Dolby AC3 and Pre-encoded
available from the VBI option in the Setup/Video AC3 are selectable, MPEG Layer 2 is
Menu.) typically used in this configuration.
3. Press Enter to make a selection.

G.4.2 Input Monitor 4. From the Channel 1A screen
To check that the video inputs are press:
present, a subsampled version of the a) Source – select the desired
video input to the encoder is available audio source (options available
on the input monitor. From the depend on selected coding
summary screen press Adv, Input standard; embedded inputs are
Monitor. via SDI).
G.4.3 Video Encoder NOTE…

Setup As with the video source setup, the input monitor
1. From the summary screen press can be used to check that the audio inputs are
present. These are displayed as an audio
Menu, Setup, Video, bargraph. From the summary screen press Adv,
Video Encoder, Profile/Level. Input Monitor.
2. Use the PgUp and PgDn softkeys
to select from: MP@ML; 422P@ML. b) Audio Bit-rate – select the
desired bit-rate.
NOTE… c) Coding Mode – select the
422P@ML is only available on this model if desired coding mode (options
purchased as an upgrade. available depend on selected
coding standard).
3. Press Enter to make a selection. 5. Channel 1B is set up in the same
4. From the Video Encoder screen manner.
press:
a) Control Mode – select desired NOTE…
mode, typically Manual. Other audio controls are available, see the
Instruction Manual for details.
b) Encoding Mode – select
desired mode, typically.
Standard
G.4.5 Data Setup
c) Encoding – select encoding On.
d) Bit-rate – select the desired bit- Menu, Setup, Data.
rate.
2. Now use the PgUp and PgDn
softkeys to select from: RS232
NOTE… (Async); RS422 (Sync).
Similar menus exist for: Horizontal Res, Aspect
3. From the RS232 or RS422 screen
Ratio, GOP Structure and GOP Length.
press:
ST.TM.E10033.3
a) Encoding – to turn the data G.4.8 Remultiplexing

service on or off.
Setup Option
b) Baud Rate or Bit-rate – select
baud rate/bit-rate using PgUp, On the MCE, the Remultiplexing Module
PgDn and Enter softkeys. (if fitted) is controlled using two menus.
To set up services use the Services
G.4.6 Modulator Setup Menu: Error! Bookmark not defined.
Menu, Setup, Mux, Service.
Menu, Setup, Modulator.
2. From the Service screen press:
2. From the Modulator screen press:
a) O/P Bit-rate – enter the bit-
a) Output Format – should be set
rate in 188 Byte Packets.
to IF (204).
b) Spare Bit-rate – indicates free
b) IF Output – turn the carrier on
transport bit-rate available.
or off.
c) IF Power – select the power The following are displayed on the
level between –20 and +5 dBm. service screen:
d) IF Frequency – set the IF I/P Bit-rate – graphic indication of free
frequency to 70 +/-20 MHz. transport bit-rate
e) Modulation – turn modulation O/P Bit-rate – graphic indication of total
on or off. transport bit-rate
f) Tx Bandwidth – set the “Service Name of Host Encoder” (–)
bandwidth in MHz. – Service On/Off
g) Symbol Rate – set the symbol “Service Name of Encoder on I/P 1” (1)
rate in Msym/s. – Service On/Off
h) FEC Rate – select the desired
“Service Name of Encoder on I/P 2” (2)
FEC rate.
– Service On/Off
“Service Name of Encoder on I/P 3” (3)
NOTE…
– Service On/Off.
Other menus exist for modulator control:
Spectrum Inversion, Preset Power Levels and
Satellite Descriptors. See Instruction Manual If other encoders are connected to the ASI inputs
for details. of the remultiplexer card, then their services will be
combined with the local service, to form a ‘multiple
channel’ service. The service names of the
additional channels will appear in the list as shown.
G.4.7 Mux Setup The spare bit-rate indicator graph (on the service
On the MCE, the Mux Menu can be used screen) should be used to ensure that the transport
stream has not being saturated with data.
for controlling output bit-rate and
remultiplexing control, (if fitted).
Menu, Setup, Mux.
2. From the Mux screen press:
a) O/P Format – select either 188
or 204 Byte Mode.
b) Bit-rate – entry of the bit-rate
in 188 or 204 Byte Packets.
NOTE…
The Modulator can be controlled by either
entering the bit-rate in 188 or 204 Byte packets
or the symbol rate.
ST.TM.E10033.3
To set up output rates or host encoder G.6 Rear Panel

rates use the Host Mux Menu:
1. From the summary screen press Connectors
Menu, Setup, Mux, Host Mux. Figure 1 shows the rear panel
2. From the Host Mux screen press: connectors for the unit, with the
remultiplexing option fitted.
a) On Air - set the multiplexer
output on. Remux Option Fitted
b) O/P Rate (188) - set the
remultiplexed output bit-rate of
the main MCE multiplexer to 188
byte packets (see Figure 1).
c) O/P Rate (204) - set the
remultiplexed output bit-rate of Figure 1: Rear Panel Connectors - Unit with
the main MCE multiplexer to 204 Remultiplexing Option Fitted
byte packets (see Figure 1).
d) Host Rate (188) - set the bit-
rate of the local (host)
multiplexer to 188 byte packets G.7 Configurations
(see Figure 1).
e) Host Rate (204) - set the bit- The Config Menu allows the user to
rate of the local (host) store and load the following types of
multiplexer to 204 byte packets MCE configuration:
(see Figure 1). User Defined, User Defined Backup,
f) Scramble (if RAS module fitted) Factory 525/625 Default.
- set key, either ON(SNG KEY), 16 setup (plus 16 backup)
OFF or ON(FIXED KEY), then set configurations can be stored.
SNG Key Code to 00000 and PCR
PID to 8190.
Cfgs.
g) Packet Length - set the packet
2. From the Config Menu select:
length to 204 byte packets.
a) Load Active Config – load a
Refer to Figure 4.6: Remultiplexing predefined config from memory.
Block Diagram in Chapter 4, Equipment
Description. b) Store Active Config – store the
current config to memory.
c) Load Cfgs from Backup –
overwrite all existing configs
G.5 Function of the from backup memory.
Remultiplexer d) Store Config from Backup –
store current configs in backup
The remultiplexer combines the locally memory.
generated host services with the e) Factory 525/625 Dflts –
externally supplied input services, restore the factory defaults.
connected via ASI to the rear of the
unit. By doing so the multiplexer will
automatically remap PIDs if they clash. NOTE…
Service names that clash will also be User defined configs can be individually write-
automatically remapped and time protected using: Write Protect Cfgs.
stamps adjusted if necessary. Refer to
Figure 4.6: Remultiplexing Block
Diagram in Chapter 4, Equipment
Description.
ST.TM.E10033.3
G.8 Alarms
When the Alarm LED is illuminated the
cause can be examined from the
Errors Menu.
Alarm reporting to the front panel can
be switched on and off using the
Display Errors option on the
Setup/System/General Menu.
G.9 Powering Down

The MCE has no power on/off switch.
To power down, isolate the MCE from
the mains power supply.
ST.TM.E10033.3
Index
The following conventions are used in this manual: a page number entry in bold
indicates a reference to a heading; a page number entry in italic is a reference to a
table or figure; otherwise the page number indicates a reference to an entry on that
page.
status menu, 5-11

test tone, 1-12
3 auto lip sync option, 3-72
3:2 pulldown option, 3-61

B
A background option, 3-54
backplane, 4-7
abbreviations,language, E-1 bandwidth calculations, 3-23
adaptive differential pulse code modulation (ADPCM), 4-5 Base Board 3ASI (motherboard), 4-11
add/delete language option, 3-83 Base Board 3ASI (motherboard)
address,IP, 2-21 audio encoders, 4-12
air-flow,internal, 1-4 audio input and switch, 4-12
alarm, 2-9 host processor, 4-11
connector, 2-14 multiplexer, 4-12
error messages, 5-8 preprocessor, 4-11
relay,switching, 5-8 video switch, 4-11
all modules diagnostics option, 3-110 basic description, 1-5
aspect ratio option, 3-60 battery disposal, 5-14
associated manuals, iv baud rate option, 3-47
async connector, 2-18 baud rate option, 3-85
audio before powering up, G-1
input stage and switch, 4-12 beryllium, 2-6
audio bit stream mode option, 3-74
bit-rate, 1-11 bit-rate
bit-rate option, 3-70 and resolution, 1-9
break out cable, 1-10, 2-13, 2-17 audio, 1-9, 1-11, 4-5
channels, 1-10 dolby AC-3 encoding, 1-12
Dolby AC3 calculations, 3-23
enabling, 3-45, 3-76, 3-78, 3-79, 3-80, 3-82 option, 3-58, 3-87, 3-104
dolby digital bit-rates, 1-12 selection
embedded, 1-10 automatic, 3-22
encoding functions, 4-9 manual, 3-22
encoding modes, 1-10 block diagram, functional, 4-8
dual mono, 1-10 bmp file loading, F-3
joint/intensity stereo, 1-10 break out cable,audio, 1-10, 2-13, 2-17
overview, 4-5 bronze support, 5-5
single mono, 1-10 brown out, 3-98
stereo, 1-10 buffer
inputs, 1-10, 2-9 mode, 5-14
menu, 3-67 settings, 5-14
PID option, 3-81 build standard, 1-4, 1-5
pre-compressed, 1-10 reference number, 1-5
pre-encoded AC-3, 1-12, 4-6
problems, 5-11
prod info option, 3-76
setup, G-3
Instruction Manual: evolution 5000 E5500 Mobile Contribution Encoder Index-1

ST.TM.E10033.3
Index
C control mode options, 3-56

copyright option, 3-77
cable C-tick mark, B-8
installing, 2-6 customer services
routing, 2-6 address, vii
table of wiring colours, 2-10 support, vi
calculations for bit-rate, symbol rate and bandwidth, 3-23
cautions, meaning of, v
CE marking, B-8
change password option, 3-44
D
channel 1A menu, 3-67 data
cleaning, 5-3 inputs, 1-14
closed caption option, 3-64 asynchronous RS-232, 1-14
coding synchronous RS-422, 1-14
mode option, 3-71 menu, 3-84
standard, option, 3-72 PID option, 3-85
compliance problems, 5-11
safety, B-7 setup, G-3
shock and vibration, 2-4 dc filter option, 3-79, 3-80, 3-82
component video input connector, 2-17 default service option, 3-109
composite analogue video input connector, 2-16 define user language option, 3-83
config menu, 3-20, 3-30 diagnostics menu, 3-109, 5-7, 5-9, 5-10
configuration diagram
description, 3-30 functional block, 4-8
isog, D-7 module positions, 4-9
menu, 3-45 dialogue level option, 3-75
predefined, 3-21 discrete cosine transform (DCT), 4-4
predefined user, D-5 display
quick, 3-21 contrast option, 3-45
storage, 1-9 errors option, 3-44
typical MCE, 1-6 screen problems, 5-9
typical remultiplexing, 1-7 screens
connecting up, 2-7 moving through, 3-6
connections navigation of, 3-5
basic unit, 2-8 disposal of equipment, 5-14
option modules, 2-8, 2-16 dolby
connectors, 2-12 digital, 1-9, 4-6
alarm, 2-14 bit rates, 1-12
audio, 2-13 encoding, 1-12
pin connections, 2-13 licence, 1-10
audio input module, 2-17 pro logic, 1-12
audio input module pin connections, 2-17 srnd mode option, 3-75
control remote, 2-15, 2-16 dynamic range option, 3-78, 3-79
DVB ASI, 2-14, 2-19, 2-20
DVB ASI connections, 2-14, 2-19, 2-20
ethernet,pin connections, 2-14
host status, 2-15
E
host status,pin connections, 2-15 earth
IF out main connection, 2-19 technical, 2-9, 2-11
IF out monitor connection, 2-19 warnings, 2-11
remote control earthing, 2-10
in, B-6 EDH. See error detection and handling
out, B-6 electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), vi, 2-3, B-8
remote control pin connections, 2-15 embedded
RS-422 data input module, 2-18 src 12 option, 3-81
pin connections, 2-18 embedded src 34 option, 3-81
video EMC. See electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
HSYNC IN, 2-13 EN 300 294, 1-13
SDI pin connections, 2-12, 2-13 enclosure, 4-7
serial, 2-12 encoding
video input, 2-16 audio, 4-5
component, 2-17 pre-encoded AC-3, 4-6
composite analogue, 2-16 inter-frame, 4-4
SDI (serial digital) intra-frame, 4-4
error detection and handling (EDH), 2-12 IPB frames, 4-3
SDI error detection and handling (EDH), 1-8, 4-10 mode option, 3-57, 3-58
video input module, 2-17 modes, 1-7
construction, 1-17 option, RS-232, 3-85
control option,RS-422, 3-86
option, 3-46 video, 4-3, 4-9
remote, 2-9 environment, 2-3
control and monitoring, 1-14 environmental conditions, B-7
Index-2 Instruction Manual: evolution 5000 E5500 Mobile Contribution Encoder

ST.TM.E10033.3
Index
equipment
access to, 2-6
G
basic description, 1-5 gain option, 3-73
connections,basic unit, 2-8 general menu, 3-42, 3-45
construction, 1-17 general status menu, 2-21, 5-3, 5-13
fixing, 2-5 getting started, 3-5, 3-21, G-1
flight case mounting, 2-6 global teletext option, 3-64
free-standing, 2-5 gold support, 5-5
rack mounting, 2-5 GOP. See group of pictures (GOP)
front view, 1-3 group of pictures (GOP), 4-4
functional description, 4-6 length,option, 3-61
MCE description, 4-9 structure option, 3-60
models, 1-3
rack mounting, 2-5
error detection and handling (EDH), 1-8, 2-12, 4-10
error messages, 5-8
H
alarm, 5-8 handling the encoder, 2-5
audio, C-6 hardware
dealing with, C-3 configuration, 1-4, 1-5
fail, 5-8 reference number, 1-5
how shown, 3-109 versions, 1-4
introduction, C-3 help menu, 3-20
modulator (internal module), C-7 horizontal resolution option, 3-59
motherboard, C-3 host
RS-232 data, C-6 processor, 4-7
RS-422 data, C-6 rate option, 3-105
suppression of, 3-5 status, 2-9
video compression module, C-5
video input module, C-5
ethernet,interface, 2-9 I
i/p termination option, 3-54
F IF
frequency option (setup/operations menu), 3-29
factory output, 2-9
525 dflts option, 3-33 menu option, 3-24
625 dflts option, 3-33 option, 3-89
fail power
error messages, 5-8 option, 3-89, 3-90
relay,switching, 5-8 option (setup/operations menu), 3-24
fans, 2-7, 4-7, 5-3. See also ventilation impedance option, 3-74
fault-finding, 5-13 individual modules diagnostics menu, 3-110
option (status/system/general menu), 2-21, 5-3, 5-13 information label, 1-4
fault-finding, 5-6 input
FCC, 2-4 bit-rate option, 3-108
features, summary of, 1-7 monitor, G-3
FEC rate option, 3-94 inspection routine, 5-3
setup/modulator menu, 3-94 installation, 2-3
setup/operations menu, 3-25 flight case mounting, 2-6
flight case,installation in, 2-6 free-standing, 2-5
foreign language manuals, ii rack mounting, 2-5
frame inter-frame coding, 4-4
rate, option, 3-50 intra-frame coding, 4-4
sequence, 4-4 IP address option, 2-21, 3-43
synchroniser, 1-9 IPB frames, 4-3, 4-4
types, 4-3 isog configurations, D-7
free-standing installation, 2-5
front panel
display and keyboard, 1-15
indicators, 1-15, 1-16
K
key test, 5-9 keypad
LEDs, 1-15 how to use, 3-6
menu, 3-110 what it does, 3-6
problems (intro), 5-9
screen test, 5-9
unable to adjust parameters, 5-10
function of remultiplexer, 4-15
fuse
ac, 5-7
carrier, 5-8
information, 5-7
replacement, 5-7

ST.TM.E10033.3
Index
L audio, 3-12
data, 3-13
label, information, 1-4 modulator, 3-13
language operations, 3-20, 3-23
abbreviations, E-1 options, 3-34
manuals in foriegn, ii video, 3-11
menu, 3-83 video/source, 5-10
non-ISO, E-2 setup/mux, 3-14
option, 3-74 setup/system, 3-10
LEDs status
alarm, 1-15 audio, 5-11
colour coding, 1-15 audio, 3-17
front panel, 1-15 data, 3-18
power, 1-15 modulator, 3-18
levels of service support, 5-5 system, 3-15
licence,dolby digital (AC-3), 1-10 system/general, 2-21, 5-3, 5-13
lightning protection, 2-3 video, 3-16
load config video/source, 5-10
from backup, 3-32 status, shows…, 3-109
option, 3-31 system, 3-34
loader,see osd, F-5 top level, 3-20, 3-34
local vertical blanking interval (VBI), 3-62
control introduction, 3-5 video encoder, 3-54
control, accessing, B-5 video source, 3-48
date option, 3-42 video, introduction, 3-48
time option, 3-42 mixing level option, 3-76
logo modulation
introduction to annex F, F-3 menu options (setup/mod), 3-91
option, 3-53 Ops menu option, 3-24
overlay, 2-9, 4-5 qpsk, 1-14
low pass filter option, 3-80 modulator, 4-11
IF power (Ops menu), 3-24
menu selection and options, 3-87
M module (S8692), 4-13
specification, B-10
M2/EOM1/RAS remote authorisation system (RAS), 4-17 modulator setup, G-2, G-4
maintenance and support services, 5-4 module
manual modulator (S8692), 4-13
associated, iv remultiplexing (S10655), 4-13
previous issues, iv slot positions, 1-17
MCE motion estimation
description, 4-9 hierarchical, 1-8
functional block diagram, 4-8 moving the equipment, 2-5
measurements of the E5500, B-7 MPEG-1, 1-9
mechanical inspection, 2-4 MPEG-2, 1-9, 4-3, 4-5, B-4
menu mux
audio, 3-67 host mux menu, 3-103
channel 1A, 3-67 menu
config, 3-20, 3-30 internal remux option module fitted, 3-103
configuration, 3-45 RAS option fitted, internal remux option not fitted, 3-
data, 3-84 101
diagnostics, 3-109, 5-7, 5-9, 5-10 parameters, 3-103
individual modules, 3-110 services menu, 3-106
front panel, 3-110 setup, G-4
general, 3-42, 3-45
help, 3-20
hierarchical structure, 3-8
IF power setting, 3-24
N
languages, 3-83 network name option, 3-36
modulator, 3-87 noise reduction, 4-5
moving through, 3-6 option, 3-51
mux notes, meaning of, v
host mux, 3-103 NTSC, 1-8, 2-16
services, 3-106
mux (internal remux option module fitted), 3-103
mux (RAS option fitted, internal remux option not fitted), 3-
101
operations, 3-20
RS232 (async), 3-84
RS-422 (sync), 3-86
service info, 3-35
setup

ST.TM.E10033.3
Index
O low pass filter, 3-80

mixing level, 3-76
o/p modulation, 3-91
rate option, 3-107 modulation (setup/operations menu), 3-24
video loss option, 3-51 network name, 3-36
on air option, 3-104 noise reduction, 3-51
operations o/p rate, 3-107
menu, from summary screen, 3-20 o/p video loss, 3-51
setup/operations menu, 3-23 on air, 3-104
option original, 3-78
3:2 pulldown, 3-61 output bit-rate, 3-108
add/delete language, 3-83 output format, 3-88, 3-101
aspect ratio, 3-60 packet length, 3-106
audio bit-rate, 3-70 polarisation, 3-100
audio PID, 3-81 polarisation (setup/modulator menu), 3-100
audio prod info, 3-76 port/protocol, 3-47
auto lip sync, 3-72 power on state, 3-98
background, 3-54 preset pwr low, 3-96
baud rate, 3-47, 3-85 preset pwr low (setup/modulator menu), 3-96
bit stream mode, 3-74 preset pwr norm, 3-97
bit-rate, 3-58, 3-87, 3-104 preset pwr norm (setup/modulator menu), 3-97
change password, 3-44 profile/level, 3-56
closed caption, 3-64 remove user language, 3-84
coding mode, 3-71 room type, 3-77
coding standard, 3-72 SAbus address, 3-46
control, 3-46 sampling rate, 3-73
control mode, 3-56 sat del freq, 3-98
copyright, 3-77 sat orb pos, 3-99
data PID, 3-85 sat orb pos (setup/modulator menu), 3-99
dc filter, 3-79, 3-80, 3-82 sat west/east, 3-99
default service, 3-109 sat west/east (setup/modulator menu), 3-99
define user language, 3-83 satellite – FEC rate, 3-39
diagnostics satellite – modulation type, 3-39
all modules, 3-110 satellite – polarisation, 3-41
dialogue level, 3-75 satellite - sat deliv freq, 3-38
display contrast, 3-45 satellite – sat orb pos, 3-40
display errors, 3-44 satellite – sat west/east, 3-40
dolby srnd mode, 3-75 scramble, 3-102
dynamic range, 3-78, 3-79 service name, 3-36, 3-108
embedded src 12, 3-81 setup password, 3-44
embedded src 34, 3-81 SI deliv desc, 3-37
encoding, 3-85, 3-86 SI information, 3-37
encoding mode, 3-57, 3-58 SNG key code, 3-102
factory 525 dflts, 3-33 source, 3-70
factory 625 dflts, 3-33 spare bit-rate, 3-108
fans (status/system/general menu), 2-21, 5-3, 5-13 spectrum inv, 3-95
FEC rate, 3-94 spectrum inv (setup/modulator menu), 3-95
FEC rate (setup/modulator menu), 3-94 store cfgs in backup, 3-32
FEC rate (setup/operations menu), 3-25 store config, 3-31
frame rate, 3-50 symbol rate, 3-92
front panel (diagnostics menu), 5-9, 5-10 symbol rate (setup/modulator menu), 3-92
gain, 3-73 symbol rate (setup/operations menu), 3-27
global teletext, 3-64 Sync Impedance, 3-52
GOP length, 3-61 Sync Source, 3-52
GOP structure, 3-60 system control, 3-36
horizontal resolution, 3-59 temperature (status/system/general menu), 2-21, 5-3, 5-
host rate, 3-105 13
i/p termination, 3-54 text color, 3-53
IF frequency (setup/operations menu), 3-29 tx bandwidth, 3-91
IF output, 3-89 tx bandwidth (setup/modulator menu), 3-91
IF output (setup/operations menu), 3-24 tx bandwidth (setup/operations menu), 3-26
IF power, 3-89, 3-90 UTC hour offset, 3-43
IF power (setup/operations menu), 3-24 vbi (line 7), 3-66
impedance, 3-74 VBI in picture, 3-63
input bit-rate, 3-108 video PID, 3-62
IP address, 2-21, 3-43 video source, 3-50
language, 3-74 video/audio/data (2) input, 3-110
load cfgs from backup, 3-32 VPS (line 16), 3-65
load config, 3-31 write protect configs, 3-33
local date, 3-42 WSS (line 23), 3-65
local time, 3-42 option modules
logo, 3-53 connections, 2-8, 2-16

ST.TM.E10033.3
Index
numbering, 1-19 preventive maintenance, 5-3

QPSK modulator card, 1-18, B-11 processor, 4-7
RAS CA, 1-19 profile/level option, 3-56
RAS scrambling, 4-17
remux, 1-20, B-12
RS CA module, B-12
RS-442 data input, 1-18
Q
video input, 1-18 qpsk,modulation, 1-14
original option, 3-78 quantisation, 4-4
osd quick
adding transparency manually, F-4 configuration, 3-21
adding transparency using a key file, F-4 reference guide, G-1
creating a transparency, F-3
creator, F-3
editing the palette, F-4
fault-finding, F-6
R
file creation, F-3 rack mounting, 2-5
introduction to annex F, F-3 RAS scrambling, 4-10
loader, F-5 module (S8489), 4-10
loader, using, F-5 module 9S8489), 4-17
loading a .bmp file, F-3 PIDs, 4-10
palette reallocation, F-4 rate buffer, 5-14
output rear panel
bit-rate option, 3-108 connectors, 1-16
format option, 3-88, 3-101 description, 1-16
on video loss, 1-9 information label, 1-4
overflow remote control, 2-9
avoiding, 4-16 remove user language option, 3-84
error, 4-16 remultiplexer
what to do if it occurs, 4-16 block diagram
overlay,logo, 2-9 stages of remultiplexing, 4-13
function, 4-15
module (S10655), 4-13
P overall block diagram, 4-15
overview, 4-13
packet length option, 3-106 setup, G-4
PAL, 1-8, 2-16 use of, 4-15
password replacement parts, 5-4
not working/forgotten, 5-9 resolution,and bit-rate, 1-9
setup option, 3-30 role of the MCE, 1-5
PID, 3-102 room type option, 3-77
audio, 4-11 RS-232
CAT, 4-11 (async) menu, 3-84
NULL, 4-11 asynchronous data, 1-14
PAT, 4-11 overview, 4-6
PCR, 4-11 specification, B-10
PMT, 4-11 asynchronous data handling, 4-9
RS-232 data, 4-11 RS-422
RS-422 data, 4-11 (synchronous data) menu, 3-86
teletext, 4-11 synchronous data, 1-14
video, 4-11 overview, 4-6
polarisation specification, B-10
option, 3-100 synchronous data handling, 4-9
port/protocol option, 3-47
power
down, 2-21
internal PSU description, 4-7
S
LED unlit, 5-13 S10655 remultiplexing module, 1-20, 4-13
on state option, 3-98 S8477 RS-442 data input module, 1-18, 4-9
supply, 2-9, 2-10 S8481 video input module, 1-18
colour code, 2-10 S8489 RAS CA module, 1-19, 4-10
short interruptions, 3-98 S8692 QPSK modulator card, 1-18, 4-13
supply problems, 5-13 SAbus
supply specification, B-6 address option, 3-46
up, 2-20, G-1 sampling rate option, 3-73
predefined user configurations, D-3, D-5 satellite
default settings, D-3 delivery frequency option, 3-38
pre-encoded AC-3, 1-12, 4-6 delivery frequency option (setup/modulator menu), 3-98
preliminary checks, 5-6 FEC rate option, 3-39
preset pwr modulation type option, 3-39
low option, 3-96 orbit position option, 3-99
norm option, 3-97 polarisation option, 3-41

ST.TM.E10033.3
Index
sat orb pos option, 3-40 RAS CA module, B-12

sat west/east option, 3-40 remux module, B-12
west/east option, 3-99 SDI, B-3
west/east option (setup/modulator menu), 3-99 test tone, B-6
scramble spectrum inv option (setup/modulator menu), 3-95
option, 3-102 standard modules, 1-18
PIDs list, 4-10 starting
RAS module (S8489), 4-10 with default settings, G-2
screen, summary, 3-5, 3-20 without default settings, G-2
SDI error detection and handling (EDH), 1-8, 2-12, 4-10 status
seamless modes, 3-57 audio menu, 3-17, 5-11
self-test, 3-5 data menu, 3-18
service menu shows…, 3-109
damage repair, 5-4 modulator menu, 3-18
info menu, 3-35 system menu, 3-15
maintenance and support, 5-4 system/general menu, 5-3, 5-13
name option, 3-108 video menu, 3-16
name option, 3-36 video/source menu, 5-10
setting bit-rates and avoiding overflow, 4-16 status/system/general menu, 2-21
setup store cfgs in backup option, 3-32
audio, G-3 store config option, 3-31
audio menu, 3-12 storing configurations, 1-9
data, G-3 subtitling, 1-13
data menu, 3-13 summary
menu option, 3-34 of features, 1-7
modulator, G-2, G-4 screen, 3-5, 3-20, G-1
modulator menu, 3-13, 3-24 top level menu, 3-34
mux, G-4 support
mux menu, 3-14 bronze, 5-5
operations menu, 3-20 gold, 5-5
operations menu selection, 3-23 levels of, 5-5
password option, 3-44 silver, 5-5
remultiplexing, G-4 symbol rate
system menu, 3-10 calculations, 3-23
video encoder, G-3 option
video menu, 3-11 (setup/modulator menu), 3-92
video source, G-2 (setup/operations menu), 3-27
video/source menu, 5-10 sync
shock and vibration, 2-4 impedance option (video/source menu), 3-52
SI deliv desc option, 3-37 RS-422 (synchronous data) menu, 3-86
SI information option, 3-37 RS-422 synchronous connector, 2-18
silver support, 5-5 video/source option, 3-52
SNG key code option, 3-102 system
softkey, 3-6 general status menu, 2-21, 5-3, 5-13
functions associated with, 3-7 menu
software general menu,IP address, 2-21
current version, 1-3 options, 3-34
versions, 1-5 system control option, 3-36
source option (setup/audio), 3-70
spare bit-rate option, 3-108
specification, B-9
alarm, B-5
T
ASI, B-4 technical specification, B-9
audio teletext
embedded, B-4 extraction, 1-13, B-3
standard (15 way conn), B-4 services, 1-14
environmental conditions, B-7 temperature option (status/system/general menu), 2-21, 5-3,
ethernet, B-5 5-13
host status, B-5 test
HSYNC in, B-3 pattern, 3-50
input tone,audio, 1-12
analogue video, B-9 text color option, 3-53
performance figures, B-9 top level menu, 3-20
QPSK Modulator, B-10 trademarks,registered, iv
RS-232 asynchronous data, B-10 transparency creation, F-3
RS-422 synchronous data, B-10 tx bandwidth option
video (setup/modulator menu), 3-91
analogue, B-9 (setup/operations menu), 3-26
typical
performance figures, B-9 MCE configuration, 1-6
physical details, B-7 remultiplexing configuration, 1-7
power supply, B-6
QPSK modulator card, B-11

ST.TM.E10033.3
Index
U encoding
functions, 4-9
universal time co-ordinate (UTC), 3-43 overview, 4-3
upgrades encoding functions, 1-8
licence key, 3-45 input
use of the ops menu, G-2 component, 1-8
user configurations predefined, D-3 composite (NTSC), 1-8
using the remultiplexer, 4-15 composite (PAL), 1-8
UTC. See universal time co-ordinate (UTC) connecting, 2-9
SDI error detection and handling (EDH), 1-8, 2-12
serial digital, 1-8
V types, list of, 1-8
inputs
variable length coding (VLC), 4-4 SDI error detection and handling (EDH), 4-10
VBI. See vertical blanking interval (VBI) menu introduction, 3-48
ventilation, 2-7 MPEG-2 encoding, 1-7
vertical blanking interval (VBI) parameters in menu, 3-48
(line 7) option, 3-66 PID option, 3-62
vertical blanking interval (VBI) source
in picture, 1-13 menu, 3-48
in pid, 1-13 option, 3-50
vertical blanking interval (VBI) source setup, G-2
data formats, 1-13 source setup menu, 5-10
in picture option, 3-63 source status menu, 5-10
line number range, 1-13 VLC, 4-4
menu selection, 3-62 VPS (line 16) option, 3-65
vibration and shock, 2-4
video
audio/data (2) option, 3-110
channel problems, 5-10
W
compression module warnings, meaning of, v
compression chips, 4-12 warranty, 5-4
encoding functions, 4-9 weight of the E5500, B-7
microprocessor, 4-12 what to do if overflow occurs, 4-16
processes within, 4-12 wire colour code, 2-10
rate buffer, 4-12 write protect configs option, 3-33
encoder menu selection, 3-54 WSS (line 23) option, 3-65
encoder setup, G-3

ST.TM.E10033.3

Operations Manual Tandberg E5500 Encoder PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Operations Manual Tandberg E5500 Encoder PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

ST.TM.E10033.

E5500 Mobile Contribution Encoder

Software Version 2.8 (and later)

M2/ENC/E5500 and Options

Podemos asimismo suministrarle una traducción de este manual al

Page ii Instruction Manual: evolution 5000 E5500 Mobile Contribution Encoder

Chapter 2: Installing the Equipment

Chapter 3: Operating the Equipment Locally

Chapter 4: Equipment Description

Chapter 5: Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding

About this Manual

Issue Date Software Version Comments

The following associated manuals are also available:

AC-3® is a registered trademark of Dolby Laboratories Licensing

Page iv Instruction Manual: evolution 5000 E5500 Mobile Contribution Encoder

Musicam® is a registered trademark of Thomson and Télédiffusion de

Warnings, Cautions and Notes

Instruction Manual: evolution 5000 E5500 Mobile Contribution Encoder Page v

Internet Address: http://www.tandbergtv.com

Page vi Instruction Manual: evolution 5000 E5500 Mobile Contribution Encoder

Customer Services and Technical Training Postal Address

1.1 Scope of this Manual

This manual does not include any maintenance information or procedures

1.1.2 Software Versions

1.1.3 Equipment Covered by this Manual

Figure 1.1: Mobile Contribution Encoder Front View

If option slot 4 is not occupied by an option module, it must have a

Table 1.1: Equipment Model Description

Model Model Marketing Description

Figure 1.3: Information Label 2

Figure 1.4: Correlation Between Hardware and Build Standard Numbers

Firmware / Software Versions

1.2 Role of the MCE

One channel of asynchronous data and one channel of high speed

Up-link equipment Down-link equipment

Figure 1.5: Typical evolution 5000 MCE Configuration

VIDEO (DIGITAL) SERVICE 1

Figure 1.6: Typical Remultiplexing Configuration (Remux Option Fitted)

1.3 Summary of Features

Video Encoding Modes

Video Input Types

Serial Digital Video Input Error Detection and Handling (EDH)

Video Encoding Functions

Video Variable Bit-rate

Table 1.2: Video Coding Resolutions and Typical Bit-rates

System configuration can be stored in non-volatile random access memory

Internal Frame Synchroniser

Output on Video Loss

1.3.2 Audio Encoding

• Pre-compressed (or pre-encoded – IEC 61937) audio in pass-through

MPEG Encoding Modes

Audio Variable Bit-rate

Table 1.3: MPEG-2 Audio Encoding Bit-rates

Bit-rate Single Dual Dual Dual Channel

Dolby Digital (AC-3)

Table 1.4: Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio Encoding Bit-rates

Bit-rate Single Channel Dual Channel

1.3.3 Vertical Blanking Interval Line Processing

The following Teletext services are extractable:

1.3.4 Data Channels

1.3.5 QPSK IF Modulation

1.3.6 Control and Monitoring

1.4 Guided Tour